MANUAL Fin Press

Global Experience
...Local Solutions
Fin Press Line

FP-2B-48-2331
Instruction Manual
+ 269 651 9393 | 405 W South Street, Sturgis, MI 49091 USA | www.burroak.com
Global Experience
...Local Solutions
Measured Sound
Pressure Levels
Machine ....................................................................FP-2B-48-2331
A-Weighted Noise Level:

Steady Background Noise with Machine Off .............70.0 dB
Machine Producing Parts at Fast Speed ...................74.0 dB
C-Weighted Noise Level:

Machine Producing Parts at Fast Speed ...................82.0 dB
3/2015
Global Experience
...Local Solutions Password Page
IMPORTANT: To protect your system against manipulation, you should protect the default passpord
and keep it in a safe location, accessible only to authorized persons.
BOTI Default Passwords

USER PASSWORD LEVEL
Operator 1111 1
Setup 9393 2
Maintenance 6514324 3
Master botg9393 5
Password Change Record

OLD PASSWORD NEW PASSWORD EMPLOYEE DATE
Global Experience
...Local Solutions
Who We Are
For 70 years Burr Oak Tool has delivered machines, tools and expertise to the world’s heating,
refrigeration, air conditioning, tube processing industries. Our focus is to provide effective solutions to
customers worldwide by delivering quality machines, service and parts.
Why We Deliver
Oak machines are designed and manufactured for quality, durability and productivity. We will work
with you to find cost effective and timely solutions to the challenges you face. Meeting your production
requirements means greater success and profitability for you.
What We Deliver
Burr Oak Tool produces quality fin dies, fin lines, tube expanders, tube cutoffs, tube benders, and coil
forms for companies in over 70 countries. We guarantee our machines are finished, tested, and most
importantly, will work properly upon installation in your facility.
How We Deliver
Burr Oak Tool’s experienced and dedicated workforce innovates to meet and anticipate our
customers’ needs. Our service technicians are experienced in setup, troubleshooting, and upgrading
Oak equipment. Service locations in the USA, Europe, India, and China allow us to quickly respond to
needs worldwide.
Global Experience
...Local Solutions
WARRANTY:
Burr OAK Tool warrants to the original purchaser that equipment of its own manufacture is
free of defective materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months. The obligation of the
company is limited to the replacement or repair of defective parts. Inbound and outbound freight are
included under our terms of warranty. Component parts or accessories made by other manufacturers
are warranted only to the extent of the original manufacturer’s warranty to our company.
Burr OAK Tool reserves the right to deny warranty claims for consequential damages caused
by the use of non-Burr OAK Tool replacement components or accessories.
NOTE, Die Customers Only:

If the die installed in the press exceeds the tonnage ratings of the press, this
warranty will be void.
Except as to title, there are no further warranties, expressed or implied, and the company shall
have no obligation or liabilities with respect thereto to any person or firm other than as specifically
stated herein.
The above warranty of the company does not cover damages or failures due to improper use
of the equipment, or in operating the equipment beyond its rated capacity. Also the warranty does not
apply to equipment which has been altered by those other than authorized
Global Experience
...Local Solutions
Fin Press Line i n al

Or i g
General Instructions c t i o ns
u
Instr
FP-2
FP-1
FP-3
#382268-C (08/2016)
www.burroak.com
Global Experience
...Local Solutions Table of Contents
Safety...............................................................................................1
Explanation of Precaution Notices.......................................................... 1
Prior to Unloading the Machine................................................................ 2
Training....................................................................................................... 2
General Precautions.................................................................................. 2
Risk Reduction Measures......................................................................... 3
Intrinsically Safe Design.................................................. 3
Safeguarding..................................................................... 3
Indicators........................................................................... 3
Recommended Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).......................... 8
Eye Protection................................................................... 8
Hearing Protection............................................................ 8
Hand Protection................................................................ 8
Other Personal Protective Equipment............................ 8
Lock Out / Tag Out..................................................................................... 8
Safety Features.......................................................................................... 9
Guarding............................................................................ 9
Electrical............................................................................ 9
Hydraulic and Pneumatic................................................. 9
Overview of Machinery................................................................ 11
Power Requirements............................................................................... 11
Electrical Requirements..................................................11
Hydraulic Requirements..................................................11
Pneumatic Requirements................................................11
Fin Stock Uncoiler................................................................................... 12
Loading the Uncoiler...................................................... 12
Lacing the Material......................................................... 13
Uncoiler Air Pressure Setting........................................ 13
Lubrication System................................................................................. 13
Die Lubrication................................................................ 13
Fin Stock Lubrication..................................................... 13
Option 1........................................................................... 14
Fin Stock Lubrication Mechanism (FSLM)................... 14
Option 2........................................................................... 14
Electrostatic Lubricator (ESL)...................................... 14
Fin Die....................................................................................................... 15
Suction/Stacker....................................................................................... 15
Installation & Setup......................................................................17
Removing from Trailer / Truck................................................................ 17
Fork Lift............................................................................ 17
Overhead Crane.............................................................. 17
Foundation............................................................................................... 18
Preparation...................................................................... 18
Level and Shim................................................................ 18
Anchoring........................................................................ 18
Check Levelness............................................................. 18
Vibration Mounts..................................................................................... 18
DTO Table (if applicable)......................................................................... 18
Lubrication System................................................................................. 19
Swing-Away Style........................................................... 19
Press Mount Style .......................................................... 19
Tank Stabilizer................................................................. 19
Fill the Lubrication System............................................ 19
Install Die.................................................................................................. 20
Square the Lacer..................................................................................... 20
Place Uncoiler.......................................................................................... 20
Install Suction Unit.................................................................................. 20
Place Stacker........................................................................................... 20
Stacker Overview............................................................ 20
Install Guards........................................................................................... 21
Installation....................................................................... 21
Square Post Press Installation Detail........................... 21
Fine Adjustments............................................................ 21
Press Connections.................................................................................. 22
Flywheel Rotation.................................................................................... 22
Break-In Period........................................................................................ 22
Perform Dry Run...................................................................................... 22
Make Adjustments................................................................................... 22
Lacing Material........................................................................................ 22
Removing Fin Line Components............................................................ 23
Electrical Box.................................................................. 23
Uncoiler............................................................................ 23
Press Mount Lube Tank and Support Bracket............. 23
Swing-Away Tank and Support Bracket....................... 24
Die Take Out Table.......................................................... 24
Conveyor......................................................................... 24
Suction Unit..................................................................... 25
Stacker Removal............................................................. 25
FP-1, -2 Press & FP400................................................... 25
FP-3 Press, FP1100 & FP1400........................................ 26
Machine Operation.......................................................................27
General Descriptions and Adjustments................................................ 27
Oak Fin Line Press.......................................................... 27
Vertical Movements........................................................ 27
Shut Height Adjustment................................................. 27
Tonnage Settings............................................................ 28
Overload Protection........................................................ 28
Hydraulic Circuit Breaker Adjustment.......................... 28
Relief Valve...................................................................... 28
Relief Valve Adjustment................................................. 29
Pressure Switches.......................................................... 29
Slide Parallelism............................................................. 29
Press Level and Parallelism........................................... 29
FP-1A Die Installation.............................................................................. 30
Preliminary Setup........................................................... 30
Die and Press Preparation............................................. 30
Installing Die.................................................................... 31
Installing Throw Gauge.................................................. 31
Preparing Press & Die for Operation............................ 31
FP-1A Die Removal.................................................................................. 32
Die Removal.................................................................... 32
FP-2. -3, -4 Die Installation Without Die Takeout (DTO)....................... 33
Die & Press Preparation................................................. 34
Installing Die.................................................................... 34
FP-2, -3, -4 Die Removal.......................................................................... 35
Die Removal.................................................................... 35
FP-2, -3, -4 Die Installation With Die Takeout (DTO)............................. 36
Die and Press Preparation............................................. 37
Installing Die.................................................................... 37
FP-2, -3, -4 Die Removal.......................................................................... 39
Die Removal.................................................................... 39
Feed Stock Through the Uncoiler, Load/Lacing.......... 39
Uncoiler.................................................................................................... 40
Uncoiler Options............................................................. 40
Loading the Uncoiler...................................................... 41
Lubrication Points on the Uncoiler............................... 41
Air for Uncoiler................................................................ 41
Troubleshooting.............................................................. 46
Fin Stock Lubricator ............................................................................... 51
FSLM option.................................................................... 51
Operation......................................................................... 51
ESL Option (see ESL Appendix).................................... 51
Changing Lubricants...................................................... 51
Fin Stock Lacing...................................................................................... 52
Preparation...................................................................... 52
Feed Stock Through the Lubricator.............................. 52
Lace to the First Draw Station....................................... 52
Power Up the Press........................................................ 52
Stroke Press.................................................................... 53
Advance the Stock.......................................................... 53
Reaching the Feed Fingers............................................ 53
Manual Feed to Cutoff.................................................... 53
Cutoff............................................................................... 53
Lacing Procedure (without lacer).................................. 54
Feed Adjustment Instructions................................................................ 55
Fixed Feed Cycle (no progression changer)................ 55
Standard 2-1 & 4-3 Progression Changer (FP-1A and older,
FP-2, FP-3)....................................................................... 57
Standard 2-1 Progression Changer............................... 57
Initial Conditions ........................................................... 57
Preliminary Adjustment.................................................. 57
How to True the Arc of the Progression Changer........ 58
Final Adjustment............................................................. 58
Standard 4-3 Progression Changer............................... 60
Developing Throw Gauge Length.................................. 64
Standard 2-1 & 4-3 Quick Change Progression Changer
(FP-2B, FP-3B)................................................................. 66
Developing a throw gauge:............................................ 66
Standard 2-1 Progression Changer (QC)...................... 67
Throw Gauge Length...................................................... 70
Standard 4-3 Progression Changer (QC)...................... 70
How to “True the Arc” of the Progression Changer.... 74
Throw Gauge Length...................................................... 74
Install Throw Gauge........................................................ 74
Upper Suction Unit.................................................................................. 75
Upper Suction Unit Location......................................... 75
Upper Suction Unit Operation....................................... 75
Outboard Support........................................................... 75
Blow Down....................................................................... 75
Wire Tap Down System.................................................. 76
Suction Sheet Servo Tap-Down System ...................... 76
Fin Stock Stacker.................................................................................... 77
Successful Stacking....................................................... 77
Manual Stacker Operation.............................................. 77
Air Shuttle Stacker.......................................................... 77
Hydraulic Rotary Stacker............................................... 78
Elevator Stacker Option................................................. 78
Fin Stack Stabilizer......................................................... 79
Pull-Back Option on the Rotary Stacker....................... 80
Heavy-Duty Stacker (Option)......................................... 80
Control Reference........................................................................81
Machine Operations................................................................................ 81
Screen Navigation........................................................... 81
Changing Screens.......................................................... 81
Automatic Screen Changes.................................................................... 81
Inch Screen...................................................................... 81
Continuous Run Screen................................................. 82
Acknowledge Message & Confirmation Screens......... 82
Main Screen............................................................................................. 82
Using Help....................................................................... 83
Help Button...................................................................... 83
Saving Data..................................................................... 83
Stroke Control ................................................................ 83
Data for Fin Production.................................................. 84
Units of Measurement.................................................... 84
Rows Per Die................................................................... 84
Rows Per Fin................................................................... 84
Sections Per Coil............................................................ 84
Fins Per Stack Override................................................. 84
Fins Produced................................................................. 85
Error Messages............................................................... 85
Warnings.......................................................................... 85
Machine Status................................................................ 85
Run Status....................................................................... 85
Inch Screen.............................................................................................. 86
Continuous Run Screen.......................................................................... 87
Finish Fin Button............................................................ 87
Working with Data Needed to Run the Fin Line.................................... 87
Password Authorization Configuration, Logon/Logoff.87
Authorization Configuration Screen...................................................... 88
Fin Chart Screen...................................................................................... 88
Programming a Fin......................................................... 89
Non-Programmed Parts.................................................. 89
Draw Chart................................................................................................ 89
Timing Chart Screen................................................................................ 90
Target Press Strokes per Minute (SPM)........................ 90
Uncoiler Speed................................................................ 90
Vacuum Speed (Hz)......................................................... 90
Adjusting Press Speed........................................................................... 91
Automatic Press Speed Adjustment (DC Actuator Option
or VFD)............................................................................. 91
Troubleshooting Timing Items....................................... 91
Changer Extend Timing.................................................. 92
Changer Retract Timing................................................. 92
General Changer Timing Comments:........................... 92
Top Stop Timing:............................................................. 92
Production Data Screen.......................................................................... 92
Die Setup Screen..................................................................................... 93
Draw Settings.................................................................. 93
Copy New to Current Button.......................................... 93
Sequenced Die Adjust Button....................................... 93
All at Once Die Adjust Button........................................ 93
Correcting Draw Setting Discrepancies....................... 94
Edge Trim ........................................................................ 94
Adjust Slit Station........................................................... 94
Vacuum Motor................................................................. 94
Straightener Bar and Cutoff Stripping.......................... 94
Die Data & Options Screen..................................................................... 95
Die Function Screen....................................................... 95
Auxiliary Blowoff............................................................. 96
Auto Slit Adjust............................................................... 96
Auto Die Adjust............................................................... 96
Lube Data & Options Screen.................................................................. 97
Fin Line Data & Options Screen............................................................. 98
Stacker Jam Delay.......................................................... 98
Max. Stack Height........................................................... 98
Hold to Rotate................................................................. 98
Rotation Time (msec)..................................................... 98
Stacker Has Elevator...................................................... 98
Elevator Drop (msec)...................................................... 98
Initial Drop (inch)............................................................ 98
Pull Back.......................................................................... 99
Edge Guard EStop.......................................................... 99
Own Remote IO............................................................... 99
Auto Raise Elevator........................................................ 99
Auto Lower Elevator....................................................... 99
Misc. Hardware Options Screen............................................................. 99
Uncoiler Data Screen.............................................................................. 99
Stock Feed Screen.................................................................................. 99
Die Jam Delay (msec)..................................................... 99
Keylock Pull Pin in to Stroke......................................... 99
Servo Feed....................................................................... 99
Press Speed Control Screen................................................................ 100
Machine Behavior Options Screen...................................................... 100
Shutdown Master When Idle........................................ 100
Display Fin Chart.......................................................... 100
Auto Inch Data Screen.......................................................................... 100
Fin Production Options Screen............................................................ 100
Line Setup & Overrides......................................................................... 101
Inputs Screen......................................................................................... 101
Outputs Screen...................................................................................... 102
Message Log Screen............................................................................. 102
Profibus Diagnostic Screen.................................................................. 102
Servo Status Screen.............................................................................. 103
Language Selection Screen.................................................................. 103
Touch Screen Configuration................................................................. 103
Resetting the PLC Retained Data Memory.......................................... 104
Uncoiler.................................................................................................. 105
General Maintenance.................................................................105
Stock Lubrication System.................................................................... 105
Weekly:.......................................................................... 105
Monthly:......................................................................... 105
Press....................................................................................................... 106
Daily:.............................................................................. 106
Weekly:.......................................................................... 106
Monthly.......................................................................... 106
Tighten Gib Bearing Clearances (Laminate Gib Bearing
Assemblies)................................................................... 107
Tighten Gib Bearing Clearances (Taper Pin Bearing As-
semblies)....................................................................... 107
Check Total Bearing Clearance................................... 108
Check and Adjust the Level of the Press................... 108
Check and Adjust Parallelism of the Ram to the Press.109
Progression Changer/Feed System..................................................... 110
Suction Unit............................................................................................ 110
Stacker Unit............................................................................................ 110
Uncoiler.................................................................................................. 113
Fin Press................................................................................................ 114
Suction Unit............................................................................................ 115
Stacker.................................................................................................... 116
Conveyor................................................................................................ 117
Clutch...................................................................................................... 118
Produced Fins........................................................................................ 118
Troubleshooting......................................................................... 113
Troubleshooting the Fin Line (FP1, FP2, FP3).................................... 113
Appendix B.................................................................................. 119

Machine Status Message Descriptions............................................... 119
Run Status Message Descriptions....................................................... 131
Acknowledge Message Screen Descriptions..................................... 134
Confirmation Screen Message Descriptions...................................... 138
Global Experience
...Local Solutions Safety
Explanation of Precaution Notices
There are five levels of notices in this manual. These precautions range from providing convenience to
avoiding disaster. Each level has a signal word that corresponds with its importance.
NOTICE IMPORTANT
These are helpful hints intended to assist the This information is more significant than that of
operator in avoiding common obstacles. They also a NOTICE. It informs the operator of possible
provide convenient procedures for performing situations that could damage the machine or its
certain tasks. various components.
CAUTION
Beginning with this level, the precautions address the safety of the operator. This notice signals a potential
hazard which may cause minor or moderate injury to the operator, such as a bruise, laceration or broken
bone. This notice will specify the nature of the hazard and give instructions on how to avoid or eliminate it.
WARNING
This notice is meant to warn against the potential hazard which may cause serious injury to the operator.
These injuries might result in the loss of a finger, hand or limb, or could possibly result in death. This notice
will specify the nature of the hazard and give instructions on how to avoid or eliminate it.
DANGER
This notice draws attention to an existing hazard or danger that will result in a serious injury or death. This
notice will specify the nature of the hazard and give instructions on how to avoid or eliminate it.
Prior to Unloading the Machine
WARNING
Hazards can and will arise that may cause severe injury or death. Do not work on the machinery without
training. Read the entire safety section prior to performing any tasks.
Training
WARNING
This information contains step-by-step instructions. It is extremely important that the applicable instructions
are read and understood prior to executing each procedure. Pay close attention to and follow all precautions.
Ignoring these notices could potentially lead to severe injury or death.
General Precautions
DANGER
SHOCK HAZARD. Do not touch the main electrical connection. Follow proper lock out procedures before
working around the main power lines or fuses.
DANGER
SHOCK HAZARD. Do not reach hands into the electrical enclosure when powered. Lock out the power at
the disconnect when changing any electrical components.
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Do not work on the machine when powered. Shut down the machine before making
adjustments or performing maintenance.
WARNING
CRUSHING OR PINCHING HAZARD. Do not operate the machine with any guards opened or removed.
Keep guards on and safety interlocks functional at all times.
WARNING
CRUSHING OR PINCHING HAZARD. Do not crawl on or under the machine or reach through guarding.
Lock out the machine before attempting access of any kind.
CAUTION
ENTANGLEMENT HAZARD. Do not place any part of the body near moving parts while the machine is in
operation. Maintain a safe distance from the machine at all times.
2
Risk Reduction Measures
Intrinsically Safe Design
The following safety measures were incorporated into the design of this machine in order to reduce or
eliminate various risks:
RISK DESIGN MEASURE

Unintended startup due to operator error The controller requires both motors start and
master start buttons be pressed before the machine
will cycle.
Unintended motion due to air pressure accumulation An air exhaust valve provides complete exhaustion
of air form the pneumatic circuit prior to machine
maintenance.
Machine damage from potential malfunctions Emergency stop pushbutton is positioned on
operator’s station.
Safeguarding
The following measures safeguard the operator against possible injuries with existing risks:
RISK SAFEGUARD MEASURE

Pinching or crushing hazard from moving parts during Guards have been attached surrounding moving
setup parts.
Indicators
In some cases, where completely eliminating a hazard through safeguarding is impractical, indicators
(warning signs, signals, etc.) are used. These indicators warn against injuries due to the following
residual risks:
RISK INDICATORS
Entanglement hazards at certain areas Warning signs have been placed in critical areas.
Electrical shock due to drilling into frame members Warning signs have been placed on each frame
containing wires member containing wires.
Crushing hazard present from above. Keep hands and other body parts out of the
machine.
Crushing hazard present from below. Keep hands and other body parts out of the
machine.
Crush/Pinch Point hazard present. Keep hands and other body parts out of the
machine.
3
HOT. Surface and/or internal temperatures may be hot enough to burn or injure
you. Keep hands and other body parts out of the machine.
Crushing hazard present. Keep feet clear of machine.
Crushing hazard from above. The environment may be conducive to injury due to
crushing from above. Stay out of this area.
Crushing hazard from the side. The environment may be conducive to injury due to
crushing from the side. Stay out of this area.
Objects may protrude from this machine at a rapid rate. You may be injured if
standing in front of this machine during operation.
This machine contains sharp equipment that may puncture your skin. Keep hands
and other body parts out of this area.
Saw Present. Rotating blades may cause severe injury.
Hazardous Voltage. Contact will cause electric shock or burn.
4
Fire or gas explosion possible. Be aware of the smell of gas.
Moving Material. Hand entanglement possible. Keep hands and other body parts
clear of this area.
Hydraulic or pneumatic explosion possible.
Laser present. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
Static charge present.
Do NOT operate with guard removed.
Only authorized personnel may service this equipment.
No maintenance while machine is in use.
5
Do NOT weld.
Do not open until saw stops rotating.
Do not operate with the guards removed.
Do not service with the flywheel in motion.
Do not operate with personnel inside the guarded area.
NOT a step.
6
Lock out power before inspection or service. Always follow your employer’s lock
out procedure.
Verify that Emergency Stop and guard switches are functioning properly at the
start of each shift.
Read and understand the instructions.
Verify that Emergency Stop button is functioning properly.
Follow proper lock out / tag out procedure.
Verify that light curtain is functioning properly.
Verify that interlocking guards are functioning properly.
Apply locking device here.
7
Recommended Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Eye Protection
Wear safety glasses with side shields while operating on or around this machine. Standard eye
protection is recommended.
Hearing Protection
The sound levels of these machines vary widely with size and tools used. Use ear protection and/or
sound enclosures to adequately protect operators and other personnel within reasonable proximity to
the machine.
Hand Protection
Hand protection is not necessary to guard against serious injury. Use discretion when determining
whether the use of gloves is necessary.
Other Personal Protective Equipment
The environment in which the machine is used should be the primary factor when determining
what personal protective equipment is necessary for those working around the machine. Though
this machine does not pose any specific danger related to the following, other personal protective
equipment to consider might include steel-toe shoes, hard hats, etc., depending on the environment.
Lock Out / Tag Out

Burr Oak Tool Inc. reminds all machine operators that each facility has different lock out / tag out procedures.
WARNING
ARCING HAZARD. Always turn the machine off before disconnecting the energy sources. There is a
possibility of arcing and explosion if the machine is disconnected while under load.
Below is an example of such procedure.
1. ANNOUNCE SHUTDOWN. Be sure that all workers in the area, especially those working on the
machine, are aware of the shutdown.
2. TURN OFF EQUIPMENT. Allow the machine to finish the normal cycle, then turn off the equipment
by pressing the master stop pushbutton.
3. DISCONNECT ENERGY SOURCES. Turn off the power at the disconnect and the breaker. Turn off
or disconnect the air supply.
4. TEST FOR ISOLATION. After the equipment is turned off and isolated from the power source, test
the master start pushbutton to see if the power is off. Also check the pneumatic and hydraulic
pressure gauges.
5. RELEASE STORED ENERGY. After all energy has been cut from the equipment, release the stored
energy and bring the equipment to “zero mechanical state”. It may be necessary to override valves
to release pressure.
6. LOCK OUT ENERGY SOURCES. Lock out the energy sources to ensure that energy won’t be
restored while working on the equipment. Place a lock on the disconnect at the electrical enclosure.
Place a lock on the air dump valve or provide other means to lock and prevent reenergizing the air
system. Ideally the locks will have a single key that will be in the operator’s possession.
8
Safety Features
Guarding
Special provisions have been made to guard all points where there are dangerous moving parts. Fixed
guards exist around all accessible moving parts where there is no foreseeable reason for regular
operator intervention.
CE approved safety switches have been provided on all moveable guards. Opening the guards under
any condition while the machine is operating will cause the machine to go into Emergency Stop Mode.
If the machine is already stopped, then it cannot be started until all guard doors are closed and all light
curtains are clear.
WARNING
Never remove or disable interlocking guard switches! Serious injury may result.
Daily Test Procedure for Light Curtains

A qualified person must follow this procedure at the beginning of each shift, and after any maintenance.
1. Verify that the machine is thoroughly guarded with a combination of properly installed light curtains
and mechanical guards.
2. Verify that the light curtain distance is at least as great as the calculated minimum safe distance
from the point of hazard.
3. Inspect the light curtain, machine, cables, and wiring for damage. If damage is found, then lock out
the machine and report to a supervisor.
4. Test the entire sensing field with the provided test wand or other properly sized test object. Observe
the indicator lights for appropriate response.
5. With the machine running, verify that all dangerous motion stops immediately by interrupting the
sensing field with the test wand.
WARNING
If the safety devices or the machine fails any of these tests, DO NOT RUN THE MACHINE. Serious injury
could result. Immediately tag or lock out the machine, then notify your supervisor.
Electrical
The primary and control voltages are shown on a tag on the machine electrical enclosure. These
voltages should be checked and verified.
All electrical standards and procedures requested by the customer or specified by CE requirements
have been followed in the construction of this machine. CE approved limit switches are provided on
each moveable guard door.
If an E-stop is necessary to meet CE requirements, a mushroom head emergency stop push button
has been provided in strategic positions.
Hydraulic and Pneumatic

All pressure settings for pneumatic and hydraulic components must be properly set. Tags have been
placed near all pressure regulators with the recommended pressure settings for each component.
Both the pneumatic and hydraulic systems have automatic pressure relief valves. When the machine is
in Control Stop or Emergency Stop Mode, the pressure in these lines is released.
9
10
Global Experience
...Local Solutions Overview of Machinery
The purpose of this fin line is to produce precision metal fins to be used in heat transfer for heating and air
conditioning applications. Three basic processes are involved in the fin line operation: uncoiling the material
to feed into the line, stamping and cutting the material into the required pattern using a progressive die, and
stacking the completed material in preparation for the next operation. Essential to the smooth operation is a
machine lubrication system, as well as fin stock lubrication and die lubrication system.
This technical manual is intended as a guide for the skilled technician assigned to work on this machinery.
Only those who have been properly trained should be allowed to set up and adjust this machinery and its
systems. It is the sole responsibility of the user to insure that any person or group of persons assigned to
work on this machinery has sufficient training. The operator and any technicians who regularly work on this
machinery should read the entire technical manual.
Power Requirements
Electrical Requirements IMPORTANT
All electrical equipment is set for dual voltage
operation, but is shipped with the voltage consistent Ensure that both electrical and air connections
with your plant. Refer to the wiring diagram located to the crown are flexible to allow for crown
in the electrical control panel. vertical movement.
Hydraulic Requirements
Check machine specifications on your model for specific pressure requirements.
Pneumatic Requirements
The air supply pressure should be in the range of 80-125 PSI.
Fin Stock Uncoiler
The fin stock uncoiler is located at the back of the fin press. Its purpose is to supply a loop of fin stock to the
press. Sensors built into the uncoiler detect the status of the stock and will stop the press when the fin stock
loop becomes too tight or the fin stock supply is exhausted.
Loading the Uncoiler

1. Lift red handle to release the spindle support gate.
2. One strap needed to load coil (rated for poundage of coil). CAUTION
Red handle latch can pinch.
Spindle Support
Gate
Red Handle NOTICE

Material should be
loaded so that it pays
off from the bottom.
3. Lace strap through core and attach 2 ends
level to hoist (material needs to be balanced
and level).
4. Position (rotate) spindle jaws to create opening at 12 o’clock for strap.
5. Lift balanced coil onto spindle.
NOTICE
6. Slide coil onto spindle jaws, centered to die.
For extended life of the spindle, do not
7. Close spindle support gate and lower red handle.
release all the weight of the coil until
8. Expand the jaws and tighten on inner core before one jaw is straight up (12 o’clock)
releasing weight from lifting mechanism to spindle.
9. Remove strap.
10. Rotate (tighten) jaw engagement handle while rotating coil until
Spindle Jaws
coil is supported equally by all 3 jaws.
Spindle
Core
Jaw
Engagement
Handle
CAUTION
Wear/Use proper personal
protective equipment when
lacing the material.
12
Lacing the Material
1. Open hinged roller guard. Crush/Pinch Point Hazard Present
2. Lace material over the rubber roll and under the Keep hands and other body
parts out of the machine.
steel roll.
3. Close hinged roller guard. Make sure guard switch is actuated.
Steel Roller Rubber Roller

Hinged Roller
Guard
Guard Switch
Uncoiler Air Pressure Setting

Air pressure should be set as indicated on machine tags
Lubrication System
The entire press operates on anti-friction bearings. The recommended lubricant for all bearings and the press
is a high performance, high tolerance lubricant.
The entire press is lubricated by a centralized lubrication system. See the Trabon information in the
Literature Section for further details. There are 22 points to be lubricated, including eight lower gibs and four
upper gibs. The press lubrication system should be inspected each month for broken or loose lubrication lines.
Die Lubrication
Any die moving parts, including the feed bar, cutoff, and guide pins, require lubrication with 10 weight
oil.
Fin Stock Lubrication
There are three different styles of fin stock lubricators offered. One is a press-mounted system that
bolts to the back of the press and bolster. This system forces the die removal from the front of the
press. The second system is a swing-away style that comes with a die removal system option. This
system mounts to the rear tie rods of the fin press and pivots on one corner. The swing-away style
system is recommended because removal of the die does not require removing the stacker system or
swinging the suction unit. For these two different styles the fin stock lubricators are similar. The third
style is referenced in Option 2, below.
13
Option 1
Fin Stock Lubrication Mechanism (FSLM)
The fin stock lubrication mechanism provided is a dip tank style. The fin stock is laced through the unit
before going through the fin die. The stock is forced down into the lubricant by a roller mounted to the
tank lid. The fin stock then passes through two pinch style wiper rollers. This controls the amount of
lubricant allowed to stay on the material. This dip tank also works in conjunction with many different
styles of die lubrication systems. This lubrication system should include a lube filtration system to keep
the lubricant clean. This system also requires a low-level shutoff system and comes optional with a
high-level shutoff system. An auto refill system can be added so that the tank can be automatically
refilled from an outside reservoir whenever lubricant in the system becomes low.
During the fin line operation, take note of the quality of fins produced. The lubrication system is a vital
part of the production process and also protects the fin die from damage. If the final fins are dripping
with lubricant, the wiper rolls should be adjusted so they clear lubricant from the fin stock. Adjust the
wiper rolls so that enough lubricant is left on the material that it is just damp from the lubricant. If the
final fins have broken collars, check to see if there is enough lubricant present when entering the draw
and pierce station. If so, refer to the die manual for troubleshooting the collar problem. If there is not
enough lubricant present, check to be sure the wiper rolls are allowing some lubricant to stay on the
stock. Adjust the wiper rollers if necessary.
Option 2
Electrostatic Lubricator (ESL)
Purpose: The Electrostatic Lubricator (ESL) uses micro spray nozzles in conjunction with a high
voltage electrostatic system to evenly dispense oil onto fin stock in a quantifiable weight per area.
Machine Function: The ESL uses a high negative voltage supply to provide additional electrons to the
oil. This oil is pumped through micro spray nozzles where air is used to break apart the oil droplets into
a fine mist. The mist then enters an electrical field gradient. The fin stock is the grounded side of the
field gradient. Because the oil is charged with additional electrons, the oil is attracted to the grounded
fin stock and applies itself with an extremely equal film coating.
Sensors: Multiple sensors are used to assure the deposition rate of the oil to the stock is accurate.
SENSOR FUNCTION
Width Sensor Measures the width of material to ensure that the right number of nozzles are activated.
Oil Flow Sensor Ensures that the flow through the system is correct for the number of nozzles turned on.
Air Pressure Sensor Ensures that the proper pressure is being used to maximize the splitting of the oil droplets.
Encoder Follows the speed of the stock being fed through the ESL.
The fin stock passes over a roller and into the ESL. Inside the ESL, the fin stock passes between two
electric field gradients filled with atomized and electrically charged oil. This oil is attracted to the fin
stock and applies a specific weight of oil per unit area of the fin stock passing through the ESL.
During fin line operations, take note of the quality of fins produced. The lubrication system is a vital part
of the production process and also protects the fin die from damage. If the final fins are dripping with
lubricant, the deposition rate should be adjusted lower to reduce wasting oil. Adjust the deposition rate
so that enough lubricant is left on the material that when looking at the fin stock between the ESL and
the die, a wipe of your finger will leave a color distortion on the fin stock and you will be able to feel
between your fingers the oil that you removed by wiping the fin stock. A deposition rate of 11 mg/dm2 is
typically enough. If the final fins have broken collars, check to see if there is enough lubricant present
when entering the draw and pierce stations. If so, refer to the die manual for troubleshooting the collar
problem. If there is not enough lubricant present, check to be sure the deposition rate is high enough
and that a wipe of your finger across the fin stock between the ESL and the fin die does not show any
dry spots on the fin stock. Adjust the deposition rate up if necessary. If dry spots are felt, refer to the
ESL section of the manual to diagnose issues with the ESL.
14
Fin Die
The die creates the desired fin shape progressively, building each
fin feature over several forming stations. As the fin stock progresses
through the die, it is sheared lengthwise to form individual fin rows. The
press provides the necessary force to form the stock into fins, while the
feed linkage allows the action of the press to pull the fin stock through
the die
Suction/Stacker
As the formed fin strips progress out of the die, being held up against the suction sheet by vacuum created
by the suction unit. They are then cut off into individual fins and dropped on the stacker rods where they are
neatly aligned onto stacks of a defined number of fins. When the required number of fins have been produced,
the press stops automatically, and the stacker forwards the fins to the lacing machine or to a position to
be unloaded. When the stacker mechanism returns to its stacking position, the press can resume regular
operation.
15
16
Global Experience
...Local Solutions Installation & Setup
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Never place any part of the body under the press or associated equipment during
setup.
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Be sure apparatus for lifting the press is capable of safely lifting a minimum of
30,000 lbs.
WARNING
Always stay well away from the machine when lifting or lowering it into position. Announce to all in close
proximity when you intend to initiate any movement of the machine.
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Keep hands away from any cables used for lifting as tension is applied.
CAUTION
The use of gloves is highly recommended for setup operation.
Removing from Trailer / Truck

Each Oak press is carefully prepared for shipment to protect it during transit and to enable the user to set up
the press with minimum reassembly. When the press arrives it should be thoroughly cleaned. Foreign matter
may have accumulated on the protective coating that has been applied to the hardened gib ways of the slide.
Be sure to remove all contaminates from these areas.
The press may be delivered in an upright position on a lowboy trailer in the Continental North Americas only.
The press may be removed from the trailer with a forklift or an overhead crane. The lifting apparatus must be
capable of lifting at least 36,000 lbs.
Fork Lift
To remove the press using a fork lift, locate the forks of the truck under the slide, centered in the press.
To prevent the slide surface from being damaged, place a piece of wood between the slide surface and
forks.
Overhead Crane
To remove the press using an overhead crane, place slings through the brackets on top of the crown to
lift the press. The slings should be long enough to swing an approximate 60 degree lift angle.
When the press is delivered in a horizontal position, use an overhead crane to set it upright. Insert
slings in brackets on top of the crown. Lift and rotate the press to an upright position. The slings
should be long enough to swing to an approximate 60 degree lift angle. Lower the press to its feet. To
move the press, use the overhead crane or a fork lift.
Foundation
A foundation gives support and mass to the press. Keep the press as level as possible on the foundation
so that the weight is evenly distributed to each of the press legs. This will effect the alignment of the entire
machine. The following procedure should be used when leveling the press:
Preparation
Thoroughly clean the top of the bed, and use it as a reference point. Place a precision level running
right to left on the front edge of the bed. Shim the right or left side of the press to balance the level.
Take a reading on the back of the bed also, shim accordingly.
Level and Shim
Place the level running front to back on each end of the bed and shim accordingly. Be sure that the
shim is as large as the press feet.
Anchoring
Do not bolt the press solidly to the foundation. Use studs to keep the press in line with the coil
handling and stacking equipment. Lightly tighten a nut by hand, and then tighten with another nut.
Check Levelness
Check the level of the press three or four times each year. This is more important with high-speed
operation as the press action has a tendency to weaken the foundation. The press swaying during
operation is an indicator that one or more feet are not supported. Many users prefer to grout a press
into position instead of using shims. A non-shrink grout must be used.
Vibration Mounts
Reference the installation and leveling instructions in the Micro/Level Isolators Technical Bulletin in the
Literature Section for installation instructions. Adjust the mounts so that each leg on the press receives an
equal share of the load. With proper settings, the vertical movements will be in a single plane and will avoid
twisting action. A twisting motion is unacceptable with no-clearance conditions of the press slide.
DTO Table (if applicable)

1. Place the die take out table behind the press.
2. Move the DTO table so that the front member is against the back of the bolster.
3. Position the DTO table so that the four holes on the front member and the back of the press line up,
making sure the top rails sit in the bolster.
4. Insert a roll pin into the two inner most holes.
5. Screw a bolt into the two outer holes.
6. Raise the two front leveling feet of the DTO table off the floor.
7. Adjust the back two feet so that the table is level, then lower the front feet to the floor.
18
Lubrication System
Swing-Away Style
1. The swing-away support bracket assembly mounts to one
side of the press posts by L brackets that hold the pivot shaft.
These L brackets are attached to the post by four dowel pins
and two 5/8”- 11 studs with nuts. Lift the system into place
and tighten the nuts. Swing the lube tank closed to engage
the lock pin on the opposite side.
2. Mount the table to the back of the bolster if the die take-out
system includes the swing-away lubrication system. Refer to
the DTO installation instructions for this procedure. This is necessary because the table sometimes
has lubrication hookups mounted to it.
3. Install the pierce and enhance lube tank to the die take out table if applicable. A filtration system
should already be mounted to the table if it is included.
4. Connect all pneumatic, oil, and electrical connections from the lubrication systems to the press.
Colored and/or numbered tags identify each connection.
Press Mount Style
1. The support bracket is located to the back of the bolster with two spring pins. Lift the bracket into
place and install two 5/8”-11 socket cap screws through the frame into the bolster.
2. Install two 5/16”-18 socket cap screws into the lower portion of the frame into the back of the press.
3. Install the pierce and enhance lube tanks to the bracket if applicable. If a filtration system is
included, this mounts directly to the support bracket as well.
4. If an injection system was purchased instead of the pierce and enhance lube tank, this system with
press mounted lube tanks is usually a stand alone unit that is set up next to the lube tank on the
floor.
5. Connect all pneumatic, oil, and electrical connections from the lubrication systems to the press.
These connections are identified with colored and/or numbered tags.
Tank Stabilizer
The frame design of the swing-away lubricator system requires additional parts for stabilization. The
press produces vibration when in operation, possibly causing the swing-away frame to bounce during
production. A level clamp mechanism prevents the lube tank frame from bouncing on the back of the
press. This clamp is only utilized on the swing-away system, and is usually mounted on the die take
out frame opposite the pivot side, toward the end of the frame. If a die take out table is not present, the
lever clamp is mounted directly the lube tank frame with an extended shaft so that it can support the
tank from the floor. Disengage this clamp before rotating the frame out of position.
Fill the Lubrication System

The system must be filled with the proper lubricant after it is mounted and all of the connections are
made. The die being used in the press usually dictates what type of lubricant should be used. Refer
to the draw charts of the fin die manual and ESL appendix, (if purchased) for recommended lubricants.
Utilize the automatic refill system (if purchased) in filling the lubrication tank. This allows the system
to properly control the amount of lubricant that is put into the tank. The lubricant for systems without
automatic refill must come from an external source. Fill the tank until lubricant is just below the bottom
wiper roll, allowing for displacement of the lubricant when the lid with the roller is lowered into the
lubricant. It has been found that the wiper rolls are not as effective as originally designed if the lubricant
makes contact with the bottom roll. This situation allows too much oil to pass through the die. The low-
level shut off switch will not allow the press to turn on if there is not enough lubricant in the system.
19
Install Die
See the Die Installation instructions. Refer to the table of contents in this manual.
Square the Lacer

Use a carpenter’s square to verify that the stock lacer guides are square with the back of the first die station.
Place Uncoiler
1. Refer to the floor plan layout for the minimum distance the uncoilder may be located from the press.
2. Center the pinch roll with the center of the press.
Install Suction Unit

1. Locate the suction arms to the front of the press. The support arms for the suction unit must be level with
each other.
2. The suction unit should be set on the support arms and slide toward the die until the back of the suction
box is approximately 1/8” from the cutoff screws.
3. Tighten the 4-6 screws that hold the unit in place.

The suction unit must be leveled and correctly positioned before moving the stacker into position underneath
the suction unit.
Place Stacker
Stacker Overview
The manual shuttle stacker is designed to work in conjunction with the
suction unit to stack completed fins.
As the fins progress out of the die, the suction unit secures them until
cutoff occurs and the fins are released onto the stacker rods. The
manual shuttle stacker is a three-position, left side to center to right
side stacker. The left and right sides are unloading positions with a
constant center stacking position.
WARNING
PIERCING HAZARD. Use extreme caution when working around the stacker unit. Stacker rods are sharp
and can cause severe injury. Always stay clear of the stacker unit when in operation and use caution when
making any adjustments to any part of the line where one could fall onto the rods.
1. To locate the stacker, place the floor plate in front of the press and secure it to the press using the tie bars
with the corresponding die in the press.
2. In most applications, a floor plate is attached to the press feet with two
locating pins. At the opposite end of the floor plate are two locating blocks
for the stacker to be pinned to with 1” diameter locating pins. Once
located, it can be leveled with the adjustable feet, which are mounted to
the frame base underneath the shuttle platters. The stacker should be
leveled in both directions across the stacker rod holders. The distance
between the tips of the stacker rods and the fins being held on the suction
sheet should be a minimum of 1/8” and a maximum of 1/4” clearance.
The same procedure applies to all Rotary Stackers.
20
Install Guards NOTICE
During guard installation, several holes may be required for Use a thread-locking compound when installing
mounting purposes. Most of the holes required are 1/4- the bolts for guards. This helps prevent the
20 tapped, 3/4” deep. If old mounting holes interfere with bolts from coming loose during press operation.
the new mounting holes, relocate the mounting hole on the
guard by drilling a clearance hole into the guard for a 1/4-20 bolt.
Installation
1. Install the lower changer guard using two 1/4”-20 x 1/2” socket cap screws from the front and two
from the rear.
2. Install the bottom plate guard to the lower changer guard using 1/4”-20 x 1/2” socket cap screws.
3. Install the top of the frame guard using 1/4”-20 x 1/2” socket cap screws. Four bolts from the top.
4. Install the front guard of the upper changer assembly using 1/4”-20 x 1-1/4” socket cap screws. On
an FP-2 press, this guard is located 2-1/2” from the front edge of the square post. On the round
post press, the mounting holes are centered on the post. On the FP-3 press, this guard is located 4”
from the front edge of the square post.
5. Bolt the upper changer guard door to the rear upper changer guard using 1/4”-20 x 1/2” socket cap
screws.
6. Using spacers for clearance, locate the changer guard assembly on the press and clamp the door
to the front changer guard. Bolt the rear guard to the rear post on the press using 1/4”-20 x 1-1/3”
screws.
7. Locate the top positioner bar on the rear guard and front guard of NOTICE
the upper changer guard assembly using 1/4”-20 x 1/2” screws.
Position the bar so that the door closes completely. Bolt the rear On older fin presses, the top
and front guards from the top. surface of the bolster sits
above the press bed. In this
8. Locate the upper changer guard lower plate so that the holes can
case, use the top surface
be located into the rear guard and the changer frame. Bolt into
of the progression changer
position using 1/4”-20 x 1/2” screws.
frame as the reference line for
9. Install the left rear press guard by bolting it to the rear changer the press bed.
guard using 1/4”-20 x 1/2” screws.
10. Locate the latch bracket for the left rear guard and bolt into position using 1/4”-20 x 1/2” screws.
Square Post Press Installation Detail
1. Position the right side guard so that it is centered on the opening of the right side of the press. This
guard is located approximately 1” above the press bed to allow for any hoses or wiring. Bolt into
position using 5/16 x 1/3 shoulder bolts.
2. The right side rear press guard has a stationary mounting guard that is bolted on the rear press
post. To bolt this guard into position may require moving a piece of pipe slightly, to allow for guard
mounting. Bolt into position using 1/4-20 x 1-1/4 screws.
3. Locate the die guard between the nose guard and the press post. The guard is positioned
approximately 1/2” above the press bed. The rear guard should be mounted so that the guards rear
solid piece is completely on the press post.
4. Adjust the nose guard adjustment bracket so that the guard is parallel with the press. Locate and
drill holes for 1/4-20 threads. Use a 5/16 shoulder bolt on the press post to hang the die guard in
position.
Fine Adjustments
1. Check to ensure all of the other bolts are tightened securely.
2. Check to ensure all of the other bolts are tightened securely.
21
Press Connections
The air supply pressure should be 80-125 PSI. All electrical equipment is set for dual voltage operation, but is
shipped with the voltage consistent with your plant. Refer to the wiring diagram located in the electrical control
panel.
Ensure that both electrical and air connections, which are connected to the crown, are flexible to allow for
vertical crown movement.
1. Each hose and each connector has a corresponding number and/or color.
2. Connect the hoses to the corresponding number and/or color on the connector.
3. Connect electrics per the electrical print.
4. Connect hydraulics per the hydraulics/pneumatic print.
Flywheel Rotation
The press flywheel is marked for proper rotation. This is very important for the flywheel to rotate in the correct
direction.
Break-In Period
All moving parts of the Oak press are mounted on anti-friction bearings and do not require a break-in period.
Each press has been run at the factory a minimum of twenty hours at speeds in excess of normal operation.
All bearings are checked for alignment and temperature so that the press will immediately run at the desired
production speeds. After the first day in operation, bearing temperature should be checked closely, as
clearances may have changed in transit.
Perform Dry Run

Run the press without any stock.
Make Adjustments
1. After dry run, check to assure levelness, alignment, and bolt snugness.
2. If something became unleveled, unaligned, or loose, readjust.
Lacing Material
When lacing material for the first time through the lubrication tank:
1. Lift the stock cover between the tank and lacer onto the tank lid. Remove the lacer guide cover.
2. Lift the lubricator tank lid and remove the top wiper roll by rotating the retainer spring cover to the side.
3. Take the material from the stock slide screen of the uncoiler into the lubricator tank and slide it through
the stock lacer or guide to the back of the die. Continue pulling the material through the die until it
is between the edge trims. Center the stock
between the edge trims and set the stock IMPORTANT
guide rails in the lacer or guide.
The material should progress through the die one
4. Replace the top wiper roll on top of the fin station at a time. Do not close the die onto material
stock material. that has not been processed by the previous
station, as damage to the die could result.
5. Lower the tank lid and latch. Replace the
lacer/guide cover and return the stock cover to its original position.
6. Cut the material at the back edge of the die; remove material from inside the die.
22
Removing Fin Line Components
CAUTION
PINCHING OR CRUSHING HAZARD. Use extreme caution when moving or replacing parts of the fin press.
Never place any part of the body underneath the die or any part of the press that may crush you.
WARNING
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. Only a qualified electrician should disconnect power from the machine or
work on electrical components. Do not attempt to open the control panel door with the machine powered.
Be sure to turn the machine off before disconnecting power. If the power is disconnected with the machine
on, there is a possibility of arcing and explosion.
Electrical Box
Hoist:
1. Two double chains and a bolt are needed in order to move the electrical box correctly.
2. Disconnect power from the plant electrical supply to the electric box.
3. Wrap two double chains through the two holes on the top of the electrical box. Bolt the chain together.
4. Lift the electrical box and move with caution.
Fork Lift:
1. Disconnect power from the plant electrical supply to the electric box.
2. Two people will need to lay the electrical box on its back on a skid.
3. Lift the skid with the fork lift. Move the electrical box with caution.
Uncoiler
Hoist
1. Four straps are needed to move the uncoiler correctly.
2. Lasso one strap around the bottom of each of the four legs, then slide the strap up until it will not move
any farther.
3. Lift the uncoiler and move with caution.
Fork Lift:
1. Slide forks with extensions between the two legs in the rear of the uncoiler.
2. Be sure the forks stick out at least two inches on the other side of the uncoiler. Lift and move with
caution.
Press Mount Lube Tank and Support Bracket NOTICE

Hoist: Be sure to remove all
1. One strap is needed to move the press mount lube correctly. lubricant before starting.
2. Cradle the press mount lube with one strap directly behind the lacer in stock support area.
3. Lift and move with caution.
Fork Lift:
1. Slide the forks directly behind the lacer in stock support.
23
Swing-Away Tank and Support Bracket NOTICE
Hoist: Be sure to remove all
1. One separating bar and two straps are needed to move the swing-away lubricant before starting.
correctly.
2. Cradle one strap at the lacer section of the swing-away.
3. Cradle another strap at the roller section of the swing-away.
4. Hook one strap to each side of the separating bar. Lift and move with caution.
Fork Lift:
1. Approach the machine straight on from the lacer or roller side, and slide the forks under the swing-
away.
2. Disconnect the pull-pin located on the press post.
3. Remove the four bracket bolts that connect the swing-away to the press.
4. Carefully lift and move the swing-away.
Die Take Out Table

Hoist:
1. Two straps are needed to move the Die Take Out Table correctly.
2. Cradle straps around the overlapping horizontal bars in the front and back of the die take out table.
3. While cradling the overlapping bars, be careful not to wrap the straps around the plumbing hoses.
4. Lift the die take out table just high enough that it will not hit any surrounding objects. Move with caution.
Fork Lift:
1. Slide forks between the two side legs on the die take out table.
2. Try to get the forks as close to the two legs as possible.
3. Lift the DTO and move with caution.
Conveyor
Hoist:
1. Two straps are needed to move the conveyor correctly.
2. Cradle the conveyor at the top where the vertical bar connects to the conveyor curve.
3. Lasso the bottom of the conveyor body.
4. Lift the conveyor and move with caution. Two straps are needed to move the conveyor correctly.
Fork Lift:
1. One board, one c-clamp, and one strap are needed to move the conveyor correctly.
2. Slide one fork under the cross member.
3. Place a board between the fork and the conveyor body and clamp together with a c-clamp.
4. Take one end of a strap and wrap it around the remaining fork. Loop the other end of the strap around
the bottom of the conveyor body.
24
Suction Unit
Hoist:
1. Loop one strap through each end of the hooks on top of the mounting plate.
3. Two straps are needed to move the suction unit correctly.
Fork Lift:
1. A skid is needed to move the suction unit correctly.
2. Use a fork lift to raise a skid larger than the suction unit underneath the unit.
3. Remove the nose guard.
4. Remove one or both of the suction unit support arms, and move the unit with caution.
Both forks can also be placed underneath the mounting plate to move the unit. Move with caution.
Stacker Removal
Hoist:
1. Four straps are needed to move the stacker correctly.
2. Lasso one strap around each of the legs on the base. (Do not use center legs.) Then tighten the strap
lasso so that it will not move any further.
3. Lift stacker. Move with caution. (Do not lift by using stacker table top.)
Fork Lift:
1. Slide forks with extensions between the legs from the side.
2. Be sure fork extensions stick out other side. Lift and move with caution.
FP-1, -2 Press & FP400

Hoist:
1. Slide one strap through the block on top of the machine.
Diagonally from this strap, place another strap through the
bock (creating an X). Lifting capacity of 20,500 lbs. minimum
requirement.
2. Lift the machine and move with caution.

Fork Lift
1. One large skid and two straps are needed to correctly move
the press with a fork lift.
2. Place two straps through the two blocks in the front of the
press.
3. Lift the press by the two straps cradling the font blocks. This will cause the press to tip backwards.
4. Continue to lift until the press is lying with the lubricator side down on a skid that is large and strong
enough to hold the press.
25
FP-3 Press, FP1100 & FP1400
Hoist:
1. Six straps are needed to correctly move these presses with a hoist.
2. Cradle the two front blocks with one strap each.
3. Cradle the two back blocks with two straps each.
4. Lift with caution. Lifting capacity of 36,000 lbs. minimum requirement.
Fork Lift:
1. Two straps and one skid will be necessary to move these presses.
2. Cradle the front left block on top of the machine with one strap.
3. Cradle the back left block with another strap.
4. Lift and carefully tip the machine until the press is lying with the bearing plate down.
5. Be sure to have a skid big enough to place the machine. Move with caution.
26
Global Experience
...Local Solutions Machine Operation
DANGER
Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious injury to the operator and/or damage to the
machinery.
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD. Never work on electrical equipment components until the main electrical
disconnect is locked in the off position.
General Descriptions and Adjustments

Oak Fin Line Press
The Oak Press is a combination of a slow hydraulic press and a high-speed accurate mechanical press.
The hydraulic portion keeps the frame rigid during production runs and is useful for:
• Clearing and cleaning the die
• Changing punch and die sections
• Un-sticking the press from bottom stroke
• Assisting in setting the die on the bed from the die cart
Most presses have a withdrawal travel of 8” from the minimum shut height. If the stroke of 1-1/2”
were to be placed on top, this would give a maximum opening of 9-1/2”. Press withdraw can be made
without interfering with the shut height setting.
Vertical Movements
Hydraulic cylinders controlled by a solenoid valve and selector switch enable vertical movement of the
crown. This switch is located on the control panel, convenient for operator use. Selector positions are
marked as up-hold-down. In the up position, the crown and slide will move upward until it reaches its
maximum position or until the operator places the selector in the hold position. In the hold -position,
the crown and slide will stay indefinitely in any part of the withdraw travel. In the down position, the
crown and slide will travel downward until it contacts the four adjusting nuts. The press is ready to
mechanically operate when it contacts the four adjusting nuts, and hydraulic pressure builds sufficiently.
WARNING
NEVER place any part of your body underneath the press. Even in the hold position, the press is always settling.
Shut Height Adjustment

The press crown sets on four adjusting nuts under pressure. When the crown is raised, turn the nuts
with a drift pin, up or down to change the shut height. One tie rod has a shut height scale. Read the
scale like a micrometer, measuring shut height readings in thousandths of an inch. Most users mark
their die with this reading so that the shut height can be obtained more quickly for the next run.
Tonnage Settings
The press hydraulic pressure must be changed in order to change the press tonnage. Adjust the
hydraulic circuit breaker and relief valve anytime the press hydraulic pressure is changed. Change the
relief valve if the maximum press pressure is in the range shown in the table on the next page.
2005 Presses and Prior
PRESS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT BREAKER RELIEF VALVE PRESS TONNAGE FP-3

PRESSURE
720 875 850 60
1000 1175 1150 81
1175 1350 1325 95
1230 1380 1350 100
1480 1630 1500 120
Presses after 2005

FP-1A FP-2 FP-3
Tonnage 30 TONS 60 TONS 100 TONS
Pump Pressure 800 PSI 800 PSI 1330 PSI
Pressure Reducing Valve 720 PSI 720 PSI 1230 PSI
Circuit Breaker 875 PSI 875 PSI 1350 PSI
Solid State Pressure Switch 500 PSI 500 PSI 500 PSI
Overload Protection
If the load exceeds the circuit breaker setting, the breaker will release and dump oil to the hydraulic
system tank . The press will stop immediately and the hydraulic fault light on the control panel will
come on. Reset the circuit breaker after the cause of the hydraulic overload has been corrected. To
reset, raise the crown a small amount and the circuit breaker will reset when hydraulic pressure is 0
PSI. The same results can be obtained by turning the hydraulic pump off. After resetting, bring the
crown down and depress the reset button. The fault light should turn off.
Hydraulic Circuit Breaker Adjustment

1. Remove the valve adjustment cap. Loosen the jam nut.
2. Insert 3/16” hex wrench into the end of the adjustment screw and turn clockwise to increase the
cracking pressure, counter-clockwise to decrease.
• To determine the circuit breaker racking pressure, increase the system hydraulic pressure by
turning the compensator adjusting screw on the hydraulic pump. When the circuit breaker valve
trips open, the hydraulic pressure will drop to zero.
• The valve cracking pressure is the pressure gauge reading when the circuit breaker is tripper.
3. Alternately adjust the circuit breaker and the system hydraulic pressure until the desired circuit
breaker setting is reached.
Relief Valve
The relief valve supplied has a maximum cracking pressure of 1150-1200 PSI. Replace with a
different valve for pressures above 1200 PSI.
28
Relief Valve Adjustment
1. Remove the discharge line from the relief valve.
2. Break the body joint by wrenching hexes. Do not use a pipe wrench.
3. Insert a 7/32” hex wrench into outlet end and turn clockwise to increase cracking pressure,
counter-clockwise to decrease. To determine the relief cracking pressure, increase system
hydraulic pressure by turning the compensator adjusting screw on the hydraulic pump that controls
the hydraulic pressure. When oil first comes out of the relief valve outlet, note the system hydraulic
pressure. This is the relief valve cracking pressure. Alternately adjust the relief valve and system
hydraulic pressure until the desired relief valve setting is reached.
Pressure Switches
Two pressure switches are tied into the control panel. One is connected to the hydraulic system and
the other to the air system. These are in the system so that the press cannot operate until the proper
hold down pressure is reached. Both switches are connected to the continuous operation circuit. The
press will operate in the inching cycle regardless of the pressure setting.
Slide Parallelism
Parallelism is correct when the slide face is parallel to the bolster plate within .0005” per foot of the
slide length. These are normal machine tool standards; however, the parallelism is more likely to be
within .002” from any corner. The press should remain with these tolerances for an extended period of
time. Check press parallelism once a year. If the parallelism is out of spec, adjustments can be made.
The adjusting nuts on the tie rods can be turned independently to bring the slide parallelism back into
tolerance. Remove the idler pin, creating enough slack in the chair to change position with the main
sprockets. Use the nut that measures the shut height as the master. If the slide is out of adjustment
in the front to back direction, move the rear set of nuts accordingly. This should be adequate for
adjustments within a range of .012”. Adjustments greater than .012” should be accomplished with the
use of the gibs.
Press Level and Parallelism

Ensure that the press is level with all feet bearing on the foundation before measuring parallelism.
Use Indicator device to show parallelism between the bolster and the slide face. All gibs are set at the
factory with no clearance and no adjustment. If a gib needs replacing, the replacement roller bearings
are exactly the same size and require no adjustment. Some gibs are held in place with two screws and
two taper pins. Other gibs, based on the machine model, include a shank pack and one screw instead
of taper pins. If it is necessary to reset one or more gibs, the gib must be doweled in a new position.
Check with Burr Oak Tool Inc. before performing any major bearing repositioning.
29
FP-1A Die Installation
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Never place any part of the body under the die when it is in the press.
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. When moving the die in and out of the press, keep fingers and hands clear of stops
and other areas where they can be pinched.
WARNING
Always stay well away from the machine when raising or lowering the crown. Announce to all in close
proximity when initiating any crown movement.
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Never reach around guarding. Stay clear of the machine while it is in motion.
Preliminary Setup
1. Verify that the press is in setup mode.
WARNING
2. Inch the slide to the top of stroke (12 o’clock). ENTANGLEMENT HAZARD. Always allow the
3. Place the hydraulic control switch in the up press flywheel to stop before doing any work or
position and shut the press motor off. adjustments on the press.
4. Verify that the regulator for the air retard has
been turned off and the blowoff selector switch is in the off position.

1. Verify that the slide is up and the press stroke is in the 12 o’clock
position.
2. Release the preload off of the counterbalance spring.
3. Adjust the shut height of the press to match the dimension stamped
into the top of the die.
4. Rotate the adjusting ring located on top of the slide. This adjusting
ring reads like a micrometer.
5. Place the hydraulic control switch in the down position.
6. 6. Apply a 1/2” preload to the counterbalance spring (with the stroke in the 12 o’clock position).
Die and Press Preparation

1. Stone and clean all mounting surfaces.
 Die mounting surface on the slide.  Top surface of the bolster.
 Top surface of the die punch holder.  Bottom surface of the die shoe.
2. Check for and remove anything that may interfere with the press post while positioning the die under
the slide.
3. Remove the feed connector pin.
30
Installing Die
1. Using a forklift, position the die under the press slide. Elevate the die to within approximately 3/8” of
the bottom of the slide, keeping the die parallel to the slide surface.
2. Align the die mounting holes with the slide CAUTION
mounting holes and install all slide mounting
bolts, finger tight only. The press motor must be off and the flywheel
stopped or the press slide must be hydraulically
3. Raise the slide and remove all materials used to raised to its highest point anytime the die straps
install the die into the press. are on the die and the die is in the press.
4. With the slide in the up position, turn the press
motor on and inch the press so that the pointer (slide position) is in the 7 o’clock position. Turn the
press motor off.
5. Use the slide hydraulic control switch to lower IMPORTANT
the die onto the bolster. Use the jogging method
to lower the die (turn switch back and forth Maintain a slight gap between the bottom of
between hold and down positions). the slide and the top of the die punch holder.
6. Using a die bar, install the die locator pins.
7. Remove die strap bolts from upper die punch holder (same applies if external straps are used).
8. Raise the slide with the hydraulic control switch far enough to remove all die straps from the lower
die shoe.
9. Install and tighten all lower die shoe screws.
10. With the slide in the up position, turn the press motor on and inch the press so that the pointer (slide
position is in the 12 o’clock position. Turn the press motor off.
11. Check the punch holder ball cages; manually turn them and verify that they are free to move up and
down at this position. Inspect the die interior for any foreign objects and that all lines and hoses are
in their proper locations.
12. Start the press motor and turn the hydraulic control switch to the down position. Inch the slide to the
down position (6 o’clock). The bottom of the punch holder must be resting on the four die stop posts
at this time.
13. Turn the press motor off and tighten all slide mounting bolts to the upper die shoe.
14. Start the press motor and inch the slide to the top of stroke (12 o’clock). Turn the press motor off.
Connect all lines and hoses.
Installing Throw Gauge

1. Install the proper throw gauge for the die being used.
2. Inch the press in order to position the eccentric adjusting bolt at approximately 8 o’clock.
3. Loosen the eccentric nut. Pull the tear drop out away from the press.
4. Turn the eccentric adjusting bolt counter-clockwise enough to enable you to remove the existing
throw gauge.
5. Replace the throw gauge that corresponds with the die being used.
6. Reverse procedure for securing the throw gauge.
Preparing Press & Die for Operation
1. Install feed connector links.
2. Start the press motor, lower the slide and inch the press to the forward feed position. Verify that the
progression changer is arched out.
31
3. Insert the feed connector pin into the feed linkage (feed bar should remain within 0.010” or less of
the feed stop blocks with pin in place). Adjusting the feed linkage rod can alter this dimension.
4. Inch the press until the feed bar is in its back feed position.
5. Measure between the front of the feed bar and the feed stop block. This dimension should equal
between 1/16” to 3/32”, plus one full feed progression. Refer to the fin print for feed dimension.
FP-1A Die Removal

Preliminary Setup
1. Verify that the press is in setup mode.
2. Inch the slide to the top of stroke (12 o’clock).
3. Place the hydraulic control switch in the up position and shut the press motor off.
4. Verify that the regulator for the air retard has been turned off and the blowoff selector switch is in the
off position.
Die Removal
1. Energize the master start, pump start, and motor NOTICE
start. Put the slide selector switch on down. Some consoles may have a keyed control start
2. After the low hydraulic pressure indicator light goes switch instead of master control start and pump
off, inch the press until the slide position indicator start. Turning control start starts the hydraulic
on the rotary limit switch points to 7 o’clock. pump on these presses.
3. Stop the press motor.

4. Loosen all mounting screws by CAUTION
one turn only. ENTANGLEMENT HAZARD. Always allow the press flywheel to stop
5. Using the slide selector switch, turning before doing any work or adjustments on the press or the die.
jog the slide up just far enough
to insert the die straps. If a die strap will prevent access to the lower die shoe mounting bolt,
remove the bolt before installing the die strap.
6. Put in lower strap bolts finger tight only. If internal straps are used, screw them into the lower die
shoe.
7. Remove the die locating pins from the lower die shoe. Remove IMPORTANT
all lower die shoe screws.
Do not allow the die shoe to
8. Using the slide switch (press motor remains off) jog the slide apply pressure on the die strap.
down until the bottom of the upper die shoe makes contact with
the die strap.
9. Insert the upper die strap bolts and tighten all bolts at this time.
CAUTION
10. Remove the upper die shoe mounting bolts that are located at the The press motor must be off
sides of the press. The mounting bolts that are located in the front and the flywheel stopped or the
and rear of the press should be loosened by one turn only. press slide hydraulically raised
11. Check that all lower die shoe mounting bolts have been removed. to its highest point anytime the
Use the slide switch to raise the slide to the top. die straps are on the die and
the die is in the press.
12. Stop the press motor, inch the slide to the top of stroke (12
o’clock). Turn the press motor off.
13. Support the bottom of the die with a forklift (forks must be capable of lifting and supporting the total
weight of the die).
14. Remove the remainder of the upper die shoe mounting bolts. Lower the die and remove it from the
press. 32
FP-2. -3, -4 Die Installation Without Die Takeout (DTO)
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Always stay well away from the machine when raising or lowering the crown.
Announce to all in close proximity when initiating any crown movement..
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Never reach around guarding. Stay clear of the machine while it is in motion..
Preliminary Setup
1. Verify that the press guard switch is in setup mode (keyed switch).
2. Verify that the regulator for the air retard has been shut off.
3. Turn cutoff, blowoff, progression changer, lacer and stacker switches to the off position.
4. Remove the feed connector pin (crown key lock pull-pin) and place it in the key lock pull-pin switch
located near the front of the feed frame.
5. Energize master start, pump start, and motor start.
6. Inch the press until the slide WARNING
position indicator points
Always allow the press flywheel to stop before doing any work
to the 7 o’clock position,
or adjustments on the press or die.
just starting the up stroke. (210
degrees on the slide indicator). The slide position indicator is located on front of the press.
7. Shut the press motor off by pressing motor stop.
8. Place the crown selector switch in the up position to raise the crown to its highest point.
Shut Height Adjustment NOTICE

1. The shut height of the press is adjusted by turning Make sure the crown has been raised
the sprockets on each of the four press posts. These to allow easier sprocket turning.
sprockets are linked together by chain and can be turned
from one sprocket.
2. The press comes with a special tool attached to the front of the machine to turn the sprocket. Insert
this tool into the holes on the side of the sprocket.
3. The scale on the sprocket on the left side, front corner (progression changer side) reads like a
micrometer.
4. Shut height is obtained by turning the sprocket to the correct setting. The shut height necessary for
the press setting should be stamped into the top of the die.
5. Some presses have hydraulic shut height adjustment and are operated by a lever switch that is
mounted below the sprocket with the micrometer scale.
33
Die & Press Preparation
• Die mounting surface on slide
• Top surface of bolster
• Top surface of die punch holder
• Bottom surface of the die shoe
the slide.

2. Inch the press to position the eccentric adjusting bolt at approximately 8 o’clock.
4. Turn the eccentric adjusting bolt counter-clockwise enough to remove the existing throw gauge.
5. Replace the throw gauge that corresponds with the die used.
6. Reverse this procedure for securing the throw gauge.
Installing Die
1. Using a forklift, position the die under the press slide. Elevate the die to within approximately 3/8” of
the bottom of the slide, keeping the die parallel to the slide surface.
2. Align the die mounting holes with the slide CAUTION
mounting holes and install all slide mounting
bolts, finger tight only. The press motor must be off and the flywheel
stopped or the press slide must be hydraulically
3. Raise the slide and remove all materials used to raised to its highest point anytime the die straps
install the die into the press. are on the die and the die is in the press.
4. With the slide in the up position, turn the press
motor on and inch the press so that the pointer (slide position) is in the 7 o’clock position. Turn the
press motor off.
5. Use the slide hydraulic control switch to lower IMPORTANT
the die onto the bolster. Use the jogging method
to lower the die (turn switch back and forth Maintain a slight gap between the bottom of
between hold and down positions). the slide and the top of the die punch holder.
6. Using a die bar, install the die locator pins.
7. Remove die strap bolts from upper die punch holder (same applies if external straps are used).
8. Raise the slide with the hydraulic control switch far enough to remove all die straps from the lower
die shoe.
9. Install and tighten all lower die shoe screws.
10. With the slide in the up position, turn the press motor on and inch the press so that the pointer (slide
position is in the 12 o’clock position. Turn the press motor off.
11. Check the punch holder ball cages; manually turn them and verify that they are free to move up and
down at this position. Inspect the die interior for any foreign objects and that all lines and hoses are
34
12. Start the press motor and turn the hydraulic control switch to the down position. Inch the slide to the
down position (6 o’clock). The bottom of the punch holder must be resting on the four die stop posts
at this time.
13. Turn the press motor off and tighten all slide mounting bolts to the upper die shoe.
14. Start the press motor and inch the slide to the top of stroke (12 o’clock). Turn the press motor off.
Connect all lines and hoses.

2. Start the press motor, lower the slide and inch the press to forward feed position. Verify that the
progression changer is arced out (see Feed Adjustment instructions). Insert feed connection pin
into the feed linkage (feed bar should remain within .010” of the feed stop blocks with pin in place).
Adjusting the feed linkage rod can alter this dimension.
3. Inch the press until the feed bar is in its back feed position. Measure between the front of the feed
bar and the feed stop block. This dimension should equal between 1/16” and 3/32”, plus one full
feed progression. Refer to the fin print for feed dimension.
FP-2, -3, -4 Die Removal

Preliminary Setup
1. Verify that the press guard switch is in setup mode.
2. Remove the feed connector pin (crown key lock pull-pin), feed connector links, and all lines and
hoses that connect to the die.
3. Place the feed connector pin in the key lock pull-pin switch.
4. Place the cutoff, blowoff, progression changer, lacer and stacker selector switches in the off position.
5. Turn the air retard regulator off.
6. Go to the Setup Screen, Line Setup & Error Overrides and select No Die and No Stock options. This
will keep the Blowoff from blowing and the fin stock uncoiler from feeding fin stock
IMPORTANT
Swingaway must stay in position until die is ready to be removed.
Die Removal
1. Energize the master start, pump start, and motor start. Put CAUTION
the crown selector switch in the down position. After the low Always allow the press flywheel to
hydraulic pressure indicator light goes off, inch the press until stop turning before doing any work
the slide position indicator on the rotary limit switch points to or adjustments on the press or die
the 6:30 o’clock position.
3. Loosen all ram mounting screws one full turn.
4. Using the crown selector switch, jog the slide up just far enough to insert the die straps. If a die
strap will prevent access to the lower die shoe mounting screw, remove the screw before installing
the die strap.
5. Put lower strap screws in finger tight only. If internal straps are CAUTION
used, screw them into the lower die shoe. Do not allow the die shoe to apply
pressure on the die strap.
6. Use the crown switch to jog the crown down until the bottom of
the upper die shoe just makes contact with the die strap.
35
IMPORTANT
The press motor must be off and the flywheel stopped or have the press slide hydraulically raised
to its highest point anytime the die straps are on the die and the die is in the press.
7. Remove the die locating pins from the lower die shoe. Remove all lower die shoe screws.
8. Insert the upper die strap screws and tighten all screws at this time.
9. Check that all lower die shoe mounting screws have been removed. Using the crown switch, raise
the crown to the top.
10. Start the press motor and inch the slide to the top of stroke (12 o’clock).
11. Turn the press motor off.
12. Support the bottom of the die with a forklift (forks must be capable of lifting and supporting the total
weight of the die). Remove the remainder of the upper die shoe mounting screws. Lower the die
and remove it from the press.
FP-2, -3, -4 Die Installation With Die Takeout (DTO)

WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Always stay well away from the machine when raising or lowering the crown. Announce to all in close
proximity when initiating any crown movement.
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Never reach around guarding. Stay clear of the machine while it is in motion.
Preliminary Setup
1. Verify that the press guard switch is in setup mode (keyed switch).
WARNING
2. Verify that the regulator for the air retard has been shut off.
Always allow the
3. Turn cutoff, blowoff, progression changer, lacer and stacker switches to press flywheel to stop
the off position. before doing any
4. Remove the feed connector pin (crown key lock pull-pin) and place it in work or adjustments
the key lock pull-pin switch located near the front of the feed frame. on the press or die.
5. Energize master start, pump start, and motor start.
6. Inch the press until the slide position indicator points to the 7 o’clock position, just starting the up
stroke. (210 degrees on the slide indicator). The slide position indicator is located on the front of
the press.
7. Shut the press motor off by pressing motor stop.
8. Place the crown selector switch in the up position to raise the crown to its highest point.
36
1. The shut height of the press is adjusted by turning the sprockets on each of the four press posts.
These sprockets are linked together by chain and can be turned from one sprocket.
2. The press comes with a special tool attached to the front NOTICE
of the machine to turn the sprocket. Insert this tool into the
holes on the side of the sprocket. Make sure the crown has been raised
to allow easier sprocket turning.
3. The scale on the sprocket on the left side, front corner
(progression changer side) reads like a micrometer.
4. Shut height is obtained by turning the sprocket to the correct setting. The shut height necessary for
the press setting should be stamped into the top of the die.
5. Some presses have hydraulic shut height adjustment and are operated by a lever switch that is
mounted below the sprocket with the micrometer scale.
Die and Press Preparation

• Die mounting surface on slide
• Top surface of bolster
• Top surface of die punch holder
• Bottom surface of the die shoe
the slide.
Installing Die
1. Verify that the slide position indicator points to the 7 o’clock position and that the crown has been
hydraulically raised to its highest point.
IMPORTANT
2. With the die straps still on the die, place the die onto the Press motor must be off and
takeout cart at the rear of the press. flywheel stopped any time die straps
3. Locate the die onto the cart using the location pins that are on die and the die is in the press.
normally locate the die to the bolster. Once the die has
been located on the takeout cart, remove the locating pins.
4. Use the crown selector switch to lower the ram to within 3/8” of the top of the upper die shoe.
5. Install all of the upper die shoe screws, finger tight only.
6. Use the crown selector switch to raise the die off the WARNING
takeout cart so that it can be removed. Inspect and
CRUSHING HAZARD. Never place hands
clean if necessary with a cloth on a stick:
under the die when it is in the press.
7. Top surface of the bolster
8. Bottom surface of the die shoe
9. Using the crown selector switch, lower the die to within 1/4” above the bolster by alternating the
switch between the down and hold positions. IMPORTANT
10. Use the crown selector switch to slowly lower the die to Failure to maintain a gap between
within 1/4” of the bolster by joggling the switch between the slide and the top of the die while
hold and down. the die straps are on could result in
11. Use the die bar to install the die locator pins. damage to the die.
12. Use the crown selector switch to lower the die onto the bolster, while maintaining a 1/8” gap between
the slide and the upper die shoe. Finger tighten all upper die shoe screws.
37
13. With the crown switch in the hold position, remove die strap screws from the upper die shoe. The
same applies if internal die straps are used.
14. Install the screws that hold the lower die shoe to the bolster. Some may not be accessible at this
time.
15. Use the crown selector switch to raise the crown and upper die shoe just enough to completely
remove the die straps from the lower die shoe. The same applies if internal die straps are used.
16. Install the rest of the lower die shoe screws and tighten all of them. Verify that all lower die shoe
screws are tight and that the die straps have been removed.
17. Place the crown switch in the up position. Start the press motor and inch the slide to the top of
stroke (12 o’clock on the slide indicator). Turn the press motor off.
18. Check all punch holder ball cages by manually turning them. Check that they are free to move up
and down at this position. Inspect die interior for any foreign objects and that all lines and hoses are
19. Place the crown switch in the down position. The low hydraulic pressure light should go off when the
crown is completely down. Leave the crown switch in the down position.
20. Start the press motor and inch the slide to the bottom of stroke (6 o’clock). The bottom of the
upper die shoe must be in contact with the die stop posts. The bottom of the slide should be in full
contact with the upper die shoe.
21. Stop the press motor and tighten all upper die shoe screws to the slide.
22. Start the press motor and inch the slide to the top of stroke (12 o’clock on the slide indicator). Stop
the press motor and wait for the flywheel to stop. Place the crown switch in the up position to raise
the crown. Connect all lines and hoses between the press and die.

2. Inch the press in order to position the eccentric adjusting bolt at approximately 8 o’clock.
4. Turn the eccentric adjusting bolt counter-clockwise enough to remove the existing throw gauge.
5. Replace the throw gauge that corresponds with the die being used.
6. Reverse procedure for securing the throw gauge.

2. Start the press motor, lower the slide and inch the press to forward feed position. Verify that the
progression changer is arced out (see Feed Adjustment instructions). Insert feed connection pin
into the feed linkage (feed bar should remain within .010” of the feed stop blocks with pin in place).
Adjusting the feed linkage rod can alter this dimension.
3. Inch the press until the feed bar is in its back feed position. Measure between the front of the feed
bar and the feed stop block. This dimension should equal between 1/16” and 3/32”, plus one full
feed progression. Refer to the fin print for feed dimension.
38
FP-2, -3, -4 Die Removal
Preliminary Setup
1. Verify that the press guard switch is in setup mode.
2. Remove the feed connector pin, feed connector links, and all lines and hoses that connect to the die.
3. Place the feed connector pin in the key lock pull-pin switch.
4. Place the cutoff, blowoff, progression changer, lacer and stacker selector switches in the off position.
5. Turn the air retard regulator off.
6. Go to the Setup Screen, Line Setup & Error Overrides and select No Die and No Stock options. This
will keep the Blowoff from blowing and the fin stock uncoiler from feeding fin stock
Die Removal
1. Energize the master start, pump start, and motor start. Put the crown selector switch in the down
position. After the low hydraulic pressure indicator light goes off, inch the press until the slide
position indicator on the rotary limit switch points to the 7 o’clock position.
3. Loosen all ram mounting screws one full turn. CAUTION
Always allow the press flywheel to
4. Using the crown selector switch, jog the slide up just
stop turning before doing any work or
far enough to insert the die straps. If a die strap will
adjustments on the press or die.
prevent access to the lower die shoe mounting bolt,
remove the bolt before installing the die strap.
5. Put lower strap bolts in finger tight only. If internal straps are CAUTION
used, screw them into the lower die shoe. Do not allow the die shoe to apply
6. Use the crown switch to jog the crown down until the bottom pressure on the die strap.
of the upper die shoe just makes contact with the die strap.
IMPORTANT
The press motor must be off and the flywheel stopped or have the press slide hydraulically raised to its
highest point anytime the die straps are on the die and the die is in the press.
7. Remove the die locating pins from the lower die shoe. Remove all lower die shoe screws.
8. Insert the upper die strap bolts and tighten all bolts at this time.
9. Check that all lower die shoe mounting bolts have been removed. Using the crown switch, raise the
crown to the top.
10. Move the die takeout cart into position in the press. A stop on the back of the cart will help locate
the cart in position.
11. Lower the die on the cart using the crown selector switch. When doing this, always maintain a gap
between the upper die shoe and the press ram. Once the die is on the takeout cart, remove all ram
mounting screws and raise the ram to its highest point by using the crown selector switch.
12. The die is now ready to move out the back of the press on the takeout cart.
Feed Stock Through the Uncoiler, Load/Lacing

Confirm that the uncoiler has been loaded and laced per Section 2, Overview of Machinery.
39
Uncoiler
The fin stock uncoiler is located at the back of the fin press. Its purpose is to supply fin stock to the press.
The uncoiler supports a coil of fin stock on a horizontal cantilevered spindle. This spindle is bearing mounted
on one end to allow for free rotational movement. An A-framed style swingaway outboard support may be
added to the opposite end if large coils are required. The spindle uses expandable jaws to lock onto the inside
diameter of the core in the coil. Many sizes of cores are accommodated by the use of optional jaw extenders
which mount directly to the expandable jaws. The feed roller can be adjusted for tension against the stock by
turning the spring tension plunger screws at each end of the roller. Be sure to adjust the plunger screws so that
the roller has equal tension on each end.
There are two pinch type feed rollers positioned at the front of the uncoiler. One is made of steel, while the
other is a nitrile coated steel roller. The nitrile coated roller is driven with a fixed speed or variable speed drive
motor and gear reducer combination. The gear reducer is coupled to the nitrile coated roller with an air clutch.
During the uncoiler operation, the motor runs continuously while the air clutch starts and stops the feed rollers.
The feed rollers pull the fin stock off the coil and into a loop between the press and the uncoiler.
The function of the uncoiler is to supply the press with a loop of fin stock between the press and the uncoiler. A
limit switch is used to control the size of the loop. The uncoiler feeds material into the loop until the limit switch
is actuated which causes the air clutch to disengage. When the press uses the fin stock, the loop pulls away
from the limit switch and restarts the feed rollers.
The uncoiler is also equipped with a stock fault photo eye detector which detects tight stock and end of stock
conditions. The stock fault detector signals the press to “top stop” when the fin stock rises above the photo eye.
This stops the press and prevents the loss of progression of fin stock in the die. It also detects when the stock
has been exhausted from the roll and signals the “top stop” of the press. The stock fault detector is mounted
near the top of the uncoiler framework, under the drive rollers.
Uncoiler Options
Standard 4” Spindle
A 4” diameter spindle is standard on all sizes of uncoilers. This spindle diameter will
accommodate inner core diameters of 5-1/2” to 5-1/2” diameters. Larger core diameters of up to
20” may be mounted if optional jaw extenders are used.
2-5/8” Spindle
The 2-5/8” spindle diameter is an option used to accommodate small inner core sizes, up to
2-3/4” to 3-1/4” diameter.
8” Spindle
The 8” spindle diameter option is used on uncoilers that require maximum coil sizes. This
spindle diameter will accommodate inner core diameters of 11 1/2” to 12 1/2” diameters. Larger
core diameters of up to 20” may be mounted if optional jaw extenders are used.
Jaw Extenders
Jaw extenders mount directly to the expandable jaws and are custom made to fit a specified
diameter.
Outboard Support
The outboard support is used on 4” spindles that require the use of large coils weighing over
4000#.
3/4 HP Fixed Speed Drive
This drive is used on the smallest uncoiler with an 18” wide drive roll and maximum coil
diameter of 40”.
3/4 HP Variable Speed Drive
This drive is used to give added versatility in feeding the stock into the fin press.
40
2 HP Variable Speed Drive
This drive is used on larger uncoilers where added horsepower is required.
Stock Fault Photo Eye Detector
The stock fault photo eye detector is located behind the loop of stock. If for any reason the loop
raises above a set point, the detector will signal the press to top stop. This will prevent loss of
progression of the fin stock in the die. This detector also signals for the top stop of the press
whenever the coil of fin stock material runs out. This detector serves as a tight stock and end of
stock detector.
Loading the Uncoiler

1. Make sure that the press is turned off, and that the pressure regulator on the uncoiler reads zero.
2. Disengage the lock pin, and rotate the lock pin into place so that it may be locked into the face of
the hand wheel (Detail 3117).
3. Rotate the handwheel counterclockwise in order to retract the holding jaws.
4. Adjust the coil stop collar (Detail 3116) to position the coil central to the die.
5. Load the coil with one of the three holding jaws located in the straight up position. Important Note:
(One holding jaw must be straight up before loading the coil to give equal balance and weight
distribution on the holding jaws.) Then load the new coil by pushing it over the spindle (Detail 3101)
and up to the stop collar. Remove the coil loading device (lift or sling) from the coil.
6. Turn the handwheel clockwise to lock the coil in place. Allow the coil to rotate to prevent over-
tightening of the locking mechanism.
7. Wipe the outside of the coil clean before lacing the fin stock through the feed rollers and into the fin
press.
Lubrication Points on the Uncoiler

• There are two grease fittings on each jaw extender located at the grease line shown on jaw (Detail
3108). (The jaw extenders must be extended to see the grease line).
• A grease fitting is located on the end cap by the hand wheel (Detail 3113).
• A grease fitting is located on each pillow block bearing (Detail 3108) - See Manual.
• Air clutch (Detail 3002) - See Manual
• Drive unit (Detail 3001) - See Manual
• Air Combo (Detail 3011) - See Manual
• Brake (Detail 3118) - See Manual
Air for Uncoiler

Uncoiler brake and clutch (Detail 3002). 40 PSI (2.8 Kgs/sq. cm)
41
Maintenance of 4” Standard Spindle NOTICE
Malfunction of the uncoiler spindle may require that the
spindle be taken apart to replace internal parts that are Before disassembly, be sure that
crucial to proper operation. The following steps illustrate the pneumatic supply has been
how a standard 4” uncoiler spindle is to be disassembled. disconnected.
Disassembly of Spindle
1. Using a 1/4” Allen wrench, remove the 4. Using the 5/32” Allen wrench, remove
four socket head cap screws that hold the one socket set screw from hole C. Only
spindle end cap inposition. Remove the remove the one set screw from hole C.
end cap and set aside. The other set screw D is used to stop the
left-hand wedge nut from rotating when
removal of long draw bar is necessary.
2. Pull out the wedge nut stop spacer if there

is one in the spindle. This stop spacer
is not used on size 18 uncoilers. This
spacer prevents the right-hand wedge nut
from disengaging from the jaws during
5. Turn the hand wheel to disengage the
operation.
wedge nuts from the jaws and to get the
left hand wedge nut to pass by the set
screw hole C.
6. Remove the right-hand wedge nut by
turning the nut counter-clockwise until it
comes free from the draw bar.
3. Using a 5/32” Allen wrench, remove two

socket set screws from holes A & B that
are on the top and bottom of the spindle
located near the middle of the spindle
jaws.
7. Rotate the spindle until one jaw is pointed

towards the floor. The jaw should be
clamped in the fully extended position.
Repeat this until all three jaws are
clamped.
42
8. Rotate the draw bar until the roll pin that 12. Unscrew the long shaft from the left-hand
connects the long draw bar to the short wedge nut that is still in the spindle.
draw bar with a coupling, lines up with the
set screw hole A
13. Remove all grease zerks from each jaw

before proceeding. Remove the jaws by
rotating the spindle until one is pointed
9. Drive out the roll pin with a 1/4” diameter downward. Unclamp this jaw and push
rod or punch. The roll pin will come out up through the slot it is in. While pushing
through the bottom set screw hole B. up, move the jaw towards the end of the
spindle for removal.
10. Using a 1/2” square piece of steel or a 14. Repeat step #13 for the other two jaws.
1/2” drive ratchet extension, unscrew the
short draw bar from the long draw bar by 15. Using the long draw bar, push the left-
rotating it clockwise. The coupling and hand wedge nut to the jaw openings in the
stop sleeve are attached to the short draw spindle. This will allow the wedge nut to
bar and will all come out at once. be pushed out the spindle end.
11. Use a 1/4” Allen wrench to remove the

four socket cap screws from the end cap NOTICE
on the hand wheel end of the shaft. The long draw bar will not be able to
push the wedge nut out the end.
43
16. Inspect all parts for damage and repair or
replace. The wear strips on the jaws are
subjected to severe forces and may be
damaged. It is recommended that while
the spindle is apart, that the wear strips be
replaced.
17. Each jaw has two wear strips that each
have two special screws. These screws
are now being glued into place with
Loctite 680 retaining compound. This
helps insure that the wear strip screws do
not work loose. To remove these screws
will require heat to be applied close to the
screw location on the jaw. Heating the
wear strip will not be as effective
Assembly of Spindle
1. Verify that the set screw is in the tapped 3. With one jaw slot pointed downward,
hole D farthest from the spindle jaw install one jaw into the spindle slot and
as shown. This set screw prevents the clamp into position. Rotate spindle and
left-hand wedge nut from rotating when repeat this for the other two jaws. Install
installing the long draw bar. Do not put the the grease zerks into the spindle jaws.
set screw in hole C at this time.
4. Insert the long draw bar from the bearing

2. Place the left-hand wedge nut into the end of the spindle and screw into the left-
spindle and push it in until it stops by the hand wedge nut.
set screw hole D. It is important that this
nut be put in the spindle as shown with the
small slot pointed upward.. Reversing the
nut will cause damage and not allow the
jaws to work.
5. Fasten the hand wheel end cap onto the

spindle with four socket cap screws.
44
6. Install the short draw bar onto the long 10. Using a 1/4” diameter rod in the set screw
draw using a 1/2” drive extension or 1/2” hole C, slowly rotate the hand wheel until
square bar. the left hand wedge nut makes contact
with this rod. Remove the rod.
7. Using a 3/16” diameter rod or punch in

the middle set screw hole A, line up the
roll pin-hole by rotating the short draw bar
until the rod engages the hole.
11. Install the right-hand wedge nut onto the
short draw bar and rotate it until it touches
the jaws. Rotate this nut back until it lines
up with the jaws. (Look into the end of the
spindle to determine if the nut is lined up
with the jaws.)
8. With the pin through the set screw hole

and into the coupling hole, rotate the
long draw bar using the hand wheel until
the holes line up so that the rod can go 12. Unclamp all of the jaws. While holding
through. the bottom jaw up, rotate the hand wheel
clockwise to engage both nuts onto the
9. Drive a 1/4” x 1-3/4” long roll pin into the jaws. This may take a couple of attempts
coupling and long draw bar. Be sure to to line up the wedge nuts properly.
drive the roll pin far enough so that the
draw bar can rotate freely. Use a 1/4” 13. Install the wedge nut stop sleeve if the
diameter punch to get the roll pin inside of uncoiler is not a size 18. Make sure this
the spindle. stop sleeve is installed. Without it, the
wedge nuts could come free from the jaws
during operation.
14. Install the spindle end cap.
45
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Solution
Excessive play in jaws
Wear Strip damaged Replace Wear Strip (Det. #3110)
Wedge Nut worn Replace Wedge Nut (Det. #3106)
Wear Strip screw broken or loose Replace Strip Screw (Det. #3111)
Lock Pin will not lock

Pin in wrong location Locate Pin correctly
Pin bent or broken Replace Pin Ass’y (Det. #3117A)
Only one side of jaws expand

Wear Strip Screw damaged Replace Strip Screw (Det. #3111)
46
Disassembly of 4” Uncoiler Spindle - Hydraulic Powered
1. Remove the hydraulic motor assembly (Det. 6112) by removing 4 - socket cap screws.
2. Remove end cap (Det. 3122 or Det. 3123) by removing 4 socket head cap screws.
3. Remove 2 - 5/16-18 set screws approximately 18 1/2” from the right hand end of the coil
shaft. (Det. 3101)
4. Remove 1 - 5/16-18 set screw approximately 27 1/2” from the right hand end of the coil
shaft. (Det. 3101)
5. Using a 1/2” extension, retract the coil holding jaws (Det. 3108) until the left hand wedge nut
(Det. 3107) just passes completely by the set screw hole at (Step #4) above.
6. Unscrew and remove the right hand wedge nut. (Det. 3106)
7. Hold the coil holding jaws (Det. 3108) out and clamp in position.
8. Line up the 1/4 x 1 3/4 inch roll pin with the set screw holes (Step #3) and drive out.
9. Unscrew the short draw bar (Det. 3103) and remove. The coupling (Det. 3104) and the stop
sleeve (Det. 3105) will also come out when you remove the short draw bar using a 1/2”
square extension. Note: Det. #3105 is not used on size 18 and size 25 uncoilers.
10. Put a 1/4” diameter rod in the set screw hole (Step #4) to hold the left hand wedge nut in
position.
11. Remove the 4 socket cap screws on the motor adapter housing (Det. 6117) of the coil shaft.
12. Unscrew the long draw bar (Det. 3102) along with the motor adapter housing (Det. 6117)
and remove. This assembly should be taken apart before reassembly.
13. After removing the grease fittings and unclamping, the coil holding jaws may be removed
from inside of the coil shaft one at a time.
14. Reverse procedure for reassembly but, first assemble the left hand nut (Det. 3107) and the
long draw bar. (Det. 3102)
47
Troubleshooting


Hydraulic fluid leak Tighten all hose connections and

Hoses not properly tightened or
replace as necessary
damaged
Replace or rebuild hydraulic motor
Motor seals bad
(Det #6112)
Jaws do not extend Replace or rebuild hydraulic motor
Motor not functioning
(Det #6112)
Check if power is on and check
Low Hydraulic pressure
pressure settings.
Disassembly of 8” Uncoiler Spindle
1. Remove end cap assembly (Det. 3122) by removing 4 socket head cap screws.
2. Remove 1 set screw from the coil shaft closest to the jaws. (Do not remove the Dog Point
set screw.)
3. Turn handwheel to retract coil holding jaws (Det. 3108) until the wedge nuts (Det. 3107 and
Det. 3106) disengage from the holding jaws. The jaws are disengaged when the left hand
wedge nut (Det. 3107) just passes by the set screw hole.
4. Unscrew and remove the right hand wedge nut. (Det. 3106)
5. Hold the coil holding jaws (Det. 3108) out and clamp in position.
6. Put a 1/4” diameter rod in the set screw hole (Step #2) to hold the left hand wedge nut in
position.
7. Remove the 4 end cap screws on the handwheel end of the coil shaft.
8. Turn handwheel in order to expose the bearing (Det. 3115) and remove the spring pin
holding it onto the shaft. Next, remove the spring pin from the handwheel. (Det. 3117)
9. Remove the handwheel (Det. 3117), end cap (Det. 3113), bearing (Det. 3115) and bearing
housing (Det. 3114) from the shaft. Remove the draw bar (Det. 3103) from the opposite end
by unscrewing it from the left hand wedge nut. (Det. 3107)
11. Remove the left hand wedge nut (Det. 3107) out the same end as the above step.
12. Reverse procedure for reassembly.
48
Troubleshooting


49
Disassembly of 8” Uncoiler Spindle - Hydraulic Powered
1. Disconnect and remove hydraulic lines to the spindle.
2. Remove hydraulic motor assembly (Det. 6108, 6109, 6110 and 6112) by removing 4 - 1/4-20
socket cap screws (outermost bolts) from the cover plate. (Det. 6110)
3. Remove the locking plate (Det. 6000) by loosening 2 set screws on the side of the cap and
sliding off the shaft that it is keyed to.
4. Remove 4 socket cap screws in order to remove the end cap. (Det. 3122)
5. Remove the right hand wedge nut (Det. 3106) by rotating the draw bar (Det. 3103) until the
holding jaws (Det. 3108) come free from the wedge nuts and drop in. The right hand wedge
nut (Det. 3106) should then come out the end with more rotation of the draw bar. (Det. 3103)
6. Pull the coil holding jaws (Det. 3108) into an extended position and clamp.
7. Remove the draw bar (Det. 3103), stop sleeve (Det. 3105) and the left hand wedge nut (Det.
3107) by sliding it out the end where the hydraulic motor was removed from.
9. Reverse procedure for reassembly.
Troubleshooting


Hydraulic fluid leak Tighten all hose connections and

Hoses not properly tightened or replace as necessary
damaged Replace or rebuild hydraulic motor
Motor seals bad (Det #6112)
Jaws do not extend Replace or rebuild hydraulic motor
Motor not functioning (Det #6112)
Low Hydraulic pressure Check if power is on and check
pressure settings.
50
Fin Stock Lubricator
FSLM option
Operation
The fin stock passes over a roller mounted at the back of the lubrication tank. It then passes under
another roller mounted on the lubrication tank lid; this roller forces the material into the lubricant being
stored in the tank. The stock passes through a set of wiper rolls which control the amount of lubricant
supplied to the fin die. The wiper rolls are stacked one on top of the other. The bottom roller is held
in place, while the top roller can be adjusted up and down to allow a gap between the two. This gap
controls the amount of lubricant left on the material as it enters the fin die. An adjustment screw on the
mounting block controls the gap. The adjustment screw is a cone point socket cap screw with a nut to
lock it into position. These screws are located on both ends of the wiper rolls and must be adjusted the
same amount to keep them parallel to one another. The material may bind or improperly track if these
rollers are not parallel to one another. The rollers must also be parallel to the lacer/guide.
During fin line operation, take note of the quality of fins produced. The lubrication system is a vital
part of the production process and also protects the fin die from damage. If the final fins are dripping
with lubricant, the wiper rolls should be adjusted so they clear lubricant from the fin stock. Adjust the
wiper rolls so that enough lubricant is left on the material that it is just damp from the lubricant. If the
final fins have broken collars, check to see if there is enough lubricant present when entering the draw
and pierce stations. If so, refer to the die manual for troubleshooting the collar problem. If there is not
enough lubricant present, check to be sure the wiper rolls are allowing some lubricant to stay on the
stock. Adjust the wiper rollers if necessary.
To decrease the amount of lubricant left on the material before entering the die, turn the adjusting
screw counter-clockwise. Be sure to adjust both screws on either end the same amount. Turn the
screw clockwise to increase the amount of lubricant left on the material before entering the die. The
lubrication tank lid also has two pressure pad assemblies that apply some pressure to the top roller.
With the use of evaporative lubricants, these pads are effective in applying enough pressure to the top
wiper roll. If the lubrication tank contains non-evaporative oils, these pressure spring pads may need
some assistance in applying enough pressure to the top wiper roll. Inserts may need to be installed
in the lid above the pressure pad with a 1/4”-20 bolt to apply more pressure if non-evaporative oils are
used.
The low-level switch will top stop the press if the lubricant level in the lubricator tank becomes too low
during production. Lubricant must be added to the system in order to restart the press. When the
system detects enough lubricant, it will reset the press and allow it to run. Refer to “Filling the
Lubrication Tank” for the proper amount of lubricant necessary to run the fin line. If the lubricator
system has an automatic refill system, a pump on the system draws lubricant from an outside supply to
keep the lubricant in the tank at a safe operating level.
ESL Option (see ESL Appendix)
Changing Lubricants
A drain located at the bottom of the lubrication tank makes changing the lubricant relatively simple.
1. This drain consists of a shutoff valve with a length of hose connected to it. Opening the valve allows
the lubricant to drain out. Be sure to have a reservoir under the drain hose before opening the
shutoff valve.
2. Wipe down the inside of the lube tank with solvent if a different type of lubricant will replace what
was previously in the tank.
3. Dispose of any used lubricants properly.
4. Shut the drain valve and refill the lubrication tank with the desired oil.
51
Fin Stock Lacing
WARNING
CUTTING HAZARD. Use caution when handling fin stock. Edges are sharp and will cut if contacted
improperly. The use of tight fitting gloves is recommended. Avoid loose gloves because they can create an
entanglement hazard.
The fin stock lacer is designed to lace the fin stock into the die automatically. This makes lacing safer
and more convenient, and usually less time consuming than lacing fin stock through the die by hand.
The lacer feeds stock through the die at the set progression established by the length of the gauge
stop. Once the fin stock has been laced in the die, the feed station begins pulling the stock through
the die and the stock lacer is de-
energized until needed. WARNING
The stock guide keeps the stock CRUSHING OR PINCHING HAZARD. Make sure all personnel
straight and consistent with every are clear of the uncoiler before performing the following steps
stroke of the feed station.
Preparation
1. The press must be off. NOTICE
2. Remove the pin from feed linkage. Disengage the slit station to aid in
lacing the fin stock through the fin die.
3. Disengage the slit station.
4. Remove the feed cover tray.
5. Wipe the outside of the fin stock coil clean of all residues.
Feed Stock Through the Lubricator

1. Open the lube tank and remove the upper wiper roller.
2. Pull the stock over the stationary roller at the back of the lube tank, through the tank, over the lower
wiper roller, and out the front of the lube tank.
3. Reinstall the upper wiper roller and adjust the wiper roller clearance to the desired height.
4. Close and latch the lube tank lit.
Lace to the First Draw Station

1. Take the stock through the lacer and guide so that the stock covers the first draw station on the die.
2. Check for a 1/64” clearance between the stock and the guide rails on both sides. If necessary,
adjust the guide rails as needed to obtain a 1/64” clearance.
3. Remove a 3” x 45° piece from both sides of the leading edge of the stock. This will help prevent
problems while advancing the fin stock throughout the lacing process.
Power Up the Press

NOTICE
1. Press the master start and motors on and start buttons
at the control station. Older control stations with a setup option
on the guards selector switch need to
2. Turn the guards selector switch to run.
be turned to setup. The lacer on these
3. Turn the lacer selector switch to on. The lacer will grab machines will not function when the
the stock and hold it in place. guards selector switch is set to run.
52
Stroke Press
1. Turn the crown selector switch to down to lower the crown.
2. Turn the ss-cont-inch selector switch to ss for Setup Stroke.
3. Press the run/inch buttons once to stroke the press.
4. Raise the crown by turning the crown selector switch to up.
Advance the Stock

1. Before advancing the stock to the next draw, IMPORTANT
lift the stock up off of the die using a wooden
dowel or flat stick this will prevent it from NEVER use a stacker rod or steel object to free the
sticking to the die and bending the stock stock. DAMAGE TO THE DIE COULD RESULT.
when the lacer is used to advance the stock.
2. Press the feed advance buttons once. The lacer pulls the stock to the next draw.
NOTICE On older models, the feed advance button must be held until the lacer has completed its stroke.
Reaching the Feed Fingers

1. Repeat steps in the Stroke Press and Advance the Stock Sections of this manual, until reaching the
feed fingers.
2. The stock should be far enough that the feed fingers can grab the stock when the feed bar is in the
back position.
3. Repeat steps for stroking the press.
Manual Feed to Cutoff

1. When the stock has reached the feed fingers, the lacer will no longer be needed to feed the stock.
2. Turn the lacer knob to the off position.
3. Move the feed to the back position by hand.
4. If the feed fingers do not grab the pierced stock, the stock will need to be held down onto the fingers
by hand.
5. Advance the feed by hand.
6. Repeat steps for Stroking the Press.
7. Repeat Steps 3-6 until the stock has advanced past the cutoff.
Cutoff
1. Install the feed cover tray.
2. Turn the ss-cont-inch selector switch to inch.
3. With the feed in the forward position, inch the slide/ram to the feed forward position. The feed
forward position is the bottom of the stroke.
4. Install the pin into the feed linkage mechanism.
NOTICE
5. Inch to the top of the stroke.
On older presses, change the press
6. Engage the slit station. from setup mode to run mode.
7. All guards must be closed.
53
8. Turn the ss-cont-inch selector switch to ss.
9. Setup Stroke the press until slit fins are past the cutoff.
10. Manually engage the cutoff and remove the scrap fins.
11. Adjust the counter to the appropriate setting and begin automatic production.
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Never place hands on any part of the die closing area when the flywheel is rotating.
If the stock sticks in any part of the die, use a 3/8” wooden dowel, 36” long to break the stock loose.
Lacing Procedure (without lacer)

Scribe a line the length of the progressing per stroke across both stock guide rails (if not already done),
in from the back edge of the stock guide.
1. The press does not have inch and top stop buttons at the rear of the press. Bring the console to the
back corner of the press.
2. Remove the feed cover tray from the die.
IMPORTANT
3. Insert the stock into the first draw of the die. Hold the
stock down against the stock guide with a weight that NEVER use a metal rod to break stock
is too tall to fit into the press, somewhere between 5-10 loose from the die. Damage to the die
lbs. placed back several inches from the die opening. could result..
Inch the press through one cycle by slowly tapping the
run and inch buttons at the same time.
4. Change the ss-cont-inch selector switch to the ss position. Kink the stock at the back edge of the
line found on the stock guide rail. Make sure that the weight is still several inches away from the
back of the press.
5. Single stoke the press by pressing the two buttons labeled run and NOTICE
inch, both at the same time.
Continue Step
6. Move the feed to the back position by hand. #4 until the stock
7. If the feed fingers do not grab the pierced stock, then the stock will reaches the feed
need to be held down onto the fingers by hand. station. Check the
stock to see if an
8. Advance the feed by hand. incorrect feed was
9. Repeat steps for stroking the press until the stock has advanced past made. If so, remove
the cutoff. the stock and start
over at Step #3.
10. 1Install the feed cover tray.
11. Inch to the top of the stroke.
12. Turn the ss-cont-inch selector switch to inch.
13. With the feed in the forward position, inch the slide/ram to the feed forward position. The feed
forward position is the bottom of the feed stroke.
54
Feed Adjustment Instructions
WARNING
CRUSHING HAZARD. Never place fingers or any part of the body inside the die without the die safety
blocks installed. See the Safety section at the front of this manual.
WARNING
CRUSHING OR CUTTING HAZARD. Announce intentions to inch or cycle to all personnel within immediate
proximity of the press.
WARNING
CRUSHING OR CUTTING HAZARD. Never insert fingers into the feed connector link in order to line it up to
insert the pull-pin.
Fixed Feed Cycle (no progression changer)

Initial Conditions
• Die must be properly mounted in the press.
• Feed linkage arms and feed connector links must be properly attached.
• A blank, oversize throw gauge must be provided. (Proper length will be determined by following
instructions.
Preliminary Adjustment
1. Removed crown pull pin.
2. Adjust eccentric stud in eccentric assembly approximately 1/2 inch
away from center and towards the open end of the slot in the eccentric
hub.
3. Slowly inch the press until the open end of the slot in the eccentric
hub is down and in line with the connector rod. This is the eccentric
position for the forward feed point of the feed bar.
4. Establish an approximate adjustment for the feed linkage rod as
follows:
• Manually pull the die feed bar fully forward against forward stop
blocks.
• Loosen 2 jam nuts on feed linkage rod.
• Adjust the feed linkage rod until the crown pull pin can be inserted.
• Snug 2 jam nuts.
• Remove crown pull pin.
5. Slowly inch the press until open end of the slot in the eccentric hub is
up and in line with the connector rod. This is the eccentric position for
the rear feed point of the feed bar.
6. Manually push the die feed bar to the rear feed bar position and install
the crown pull pin.
7. Measure the maximum travel of the feed bar from the feed bar stops
to the front of the feed bar.
NOTICE
The required feed length is equal to the theoretical die feed, plus between 1/16” and
3/32”. Compare the measured feed length to the required length noted.
55
8. If the measured feed length is equal to the required feed length, then proceed.
9. If the measured feed length is not equal to the required feed length, then adjust as follows:
• To increase the feed length, adjust the eccentric stud toward the open CAUTION
end of the eccentric hub slot. A small adjustment of
the eccentric hub moves
• To decrease the feed length, adjust the eccentric stud away from the
the feed bar quite far.
open end of the eccentric hub slot.
Final Adjustment
Initial Conditions:
• Crown pull pin installed.
• Measured feed length is equal to theoretical die feed length plus
1/16 to 3/32 inch.
• The preliminary adjustment has been properly completed.
CAUTION
If preliminary adjustment was not completed correctly, it may be possible to inch the press and drive the feed
bar into the front feed stop or the rear feed bar shaft bearings. Repeat preliminary adjustment section, if
necessary, to avoid damage to feed system.
1. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar

is in its fully forward position.
2. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the
feed bar is about .005 away from the
forward feed stops.

is in the full reverse position.
4. Return to preliminary adjustment
section to check for proper feed of
stock. Readjust if necessary.
Throw Gauge Length

1. Properly complete preliminary adjustments & final adjustments.
2. Accurately measure the distance between the eccentric stud base and the end of the eccentric hub
slot. Machine the throw gauge blank to this dimension.
NOTICE
Remove the feed connector bar and throw arm to gain access for accurate
measurement.
3. Install throw gauge.
56
Standard 2-1 & 4-3 Progression Changer (FP-1A and older, FP-2, FP-3)
For 4-3 progression changer only (all other steps are identical):
1. Spacers mounted to the stop block and slide must be in place. Thickness of the 4-3 spacer must be
machined at assembly for proper length.
2. After the progression changer is arced out, (see section How to “True the Arc”) and the full length
feed is set, inch the press to the position where the feed bar picks up the material for a new feed.
3. Turn the progression changer selector switch to ext. The feed bar will move forward.
4. Measure the distance from the front of the feed bar to the stop block. This distance will equal 3
times the 1 hole spacing for the die, plus between .062” and 3.093” (77.79 mm to 78.58mm).
5. If the dimension is long, reduce the .75” (1905mm) thickness of the aluminum stop. Reduce the
stop by .050” (1.27mm) and re-measure the distance between the feed bar and the stop block
to establish a relationship between the distance measured and the amount removed from the
aluminum stop.
6. Continue to remove material until the calculated dimension is achieved.
Standard 2-1 Progression Changer

Initial Conditions
• Feed linkage arms and feed connector links must be properly
attached.
• A blank, oversize throw gauge must be provided. (Proper length
will be determined by following instructions.
1. Remove crown pull pin.
2. Adjust the eccentric stud in the eccentric
assembly to approximately 1/2" (12.7mm) away from center and towards the open end of the slot in
the eccentric hub.
3. Slowly inch the press until the open end of the slot in the eccentric hub is
down and in line with the connector rod. This is the eccentric position for
the forward feed point of the feed bar.
4. Adjust the length of the connector rod assembly as follows:
• Loosen (2) jam nuts on connector rod.
• While observing the progression changer shaft stop block, extend and
retract the progression changer cylinder. As the cylinder is cycled,
the stop block will raise and lower. Adjust the connector rod length
to minimize this movement. When properly adjusted, extending and
retracting the progression changer cylinder should result in a total up
and down movement of the stop block of less than 1/16" (1.59mm).
• Snug (2) jam nuts. 57
5. Establish and approximate adjustment for the feed linkage rod as follows:
• Manually pull the die feed bar fully forward against the forward stop blocks.
• Loosen (2) jam nuts on feed linkage rod.
• Adjust the feed linkage rod until the
crown pull pin can be inserted.
• Snug (2) jam nuts.
6. Slowly inch the press until open end of
the slot in the eccentric hub is up and in
line with the connector rod. This is the
eccentric position for the rear feed point of
the feed bar.
7. Manually push the die feed bar toward the
rear until you can install the crown pull pin.
Install the pin.
8. Measure the maximum travel of the feed
bar from the feed bar stops to the front of
the feed bar.
NOTICE
The required feed length is equal to the theoretical die feed, plus between 1/16” and 3/32”. Compare the measured
feed length to the required length noted.
9. If the measured feed length is equal to the required feed length then proceed to section True the
Arc of the progression changer.
• To increase the feed length, adjust the eccentric stud toward the open end
of the eccentric hub slot. To decrease the feed length, adjust the eccentric
stud away from the open end of the eccentric hub slot. This changes the
feed at both ends and you will need to go back to step 5.
CAUTION
A small adjustment of the eccentric hub moves the feed bar quite far.
How to True the Arc of the Progression Changer

Final Adjustment
The final precise adjustment of the progression changer is referred to as
Truing the Arc. Following is a detailed description:
Initial Condition
• Crown pull pin must be installed.
• Measured feed length is the same as calculated die feed length plus
1/16"-3/32" (1.59mm-2.38mm).
CAUTION
If preliminary adjustment was not completed correctly, it may be possible to inch
the press and drive the feed bar into the front feed stop or the rear feed bar shaft
bearings. Repeat preliminary adjustment section, if necessary, to avoid damage to feed system.
58
1. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar is in its fully forward position.
2. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the feed bar is approximately 1/8" (3.18mm) away from the front
feed stops.

• While observing the feed bar, extend and retract the progression
changer cylinder. As the cylinder is cycled , the feed bar will move
slightly.
• Measure the distance from the feed bar stop to the front of the
feed bar with the changer cylinder extended and with the changer
cylinder retracted.
NOTICE
If the connector rod is properly adjusted, this dimension should be
exactly the same regardless of whether the changer cylinder is fully
extended or in the fully retracted position. If necessary, adjust the
connector rod to achieve this condition.
• Snug (2) jam nuts on connector rod.

4. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the feed
bar is about .005” (.13mm) away from
the forward feed stops.
NOTICE 5. 5.
In the full retracted position the distance
from stop block to feed bar should be
approximately the calculated feed length
plus 1/16” - 3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm).
Slowly inch the press until the feed bar
is in the full reverse position.
6. Fully extend the progression changer
cylinder. In the fully extended
position the distance from the
stop block to the feed bar should
be approximately half (50%) the calculated feed length plus 1/16” - 3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm).
7. Return to preliminary adjustment to check for proper feed of stock. Readjust if necessary.
59
Throw Gauge Length
1. Properly complete preliminary adjustments & final adjustments
2. Accurately measure the distance between the eccentric stud base
and the end of the eccentric hub slot. Machine the throw gauge blank
to this dimension.
NOTICE
measurement.

4. Repeat How to True the Arc.
Standard 4-3 Progression Changer

Initial Conditions
attached.
• Spacers mounted to the stop block and slide must be in place.
• Thickness of the 4-3 spacer needs to be machined at assembly
for proper length. After the progression changer is arced out
and the full length feed is set, you inch the press to the position
where the feed bar picks up the material for a new feed.
• Turn the progression changer selector switch to lock. The feed
bar will move forward, you need to measure the distance from
the front of the feed bar to the stop block. This distance will
equal 3 times the 1 hole spacing of the die plus .062”-.093”
(1.59mm-2.38mm).
• Example: The die is 1.000” (25.4mm) from center of one hole
to center of next hole in direction of feed. The dimension will be
3.062”-3.093” (77.79mm-78.58mm).
• If the dimension you measure is long, you will have to reduce
the .75” (19.05mm) thickness of the aluminum stop. Reduce the stop by .050” (1.27mm)
and re-measure the distance between the feed bar and stop block to establish a relationship
between distance measured and amount removed from aluminum stop. Continue to remove
material until you achieve your calculated dimension.
1. 1. Remove crown pull pin.
2. 2. Adjust the eccentric stud in the eccentric assembly to approximately
1/2" (12.7mm) away from center and towards the open end of the slot in the
eccentric hub.
60
3. Slowly inch the press until the open end of the slot in the eccentric hub is down and in line with the
connector rod. This is the eccentric position for the forward feed point of the feed bar.
4. Adjust the length of the connector rod
assembly as follows:
• While observing the progression changer
shaft stop block, extend and retract the
progression changer cylinder. As the
cylinder is cycled, the stop block will raise
and lower. Adjust the connector rod length
to minimize this movement. When properly
adjusted, extending and retracting the
progression changer cylinder should result
in a total up and down movement of the stop block of less than 1/16” (1.59mm).
• Loosen (2) jam nuts on feed linkage
rod.
• Adjust the feed linkage rod until the
crown pull pin can be inserted.
6. Slowly inch the press until open end of
the slot in the eccentric hub is up and in
line with the connector rod. This is the
eccentric position for the rear feed point of
the feed bar.
7. Manually push the die feed bar toward the
rear until you can install the crown pull pin.
Install the pin.
8. Measure the maximum travel of the feed
bar from the feed bar stops to the front of the feed bar.
NOTICE
The required feed length is equal to the theoretical die feed, plus between 1/16” and 3/32” (1.59mm - 2.38mm).
Compare the measured feed length to the required length noted.
• To increase the feed length, adjust the eccentric stud toward the open end
of the eccentric hub slot. To decrease the feed length, adjust the eccentric
stud away from the open end of the eccentric hub slot. This changes the
feed at both ends and you will need to go back to step 5.
CAUTION
61
Final Adjustment
Initial Condition
1/16"-3/32" (1.59mm-2.38mm).
CAUTION
the press and drive the feed bar into the front feed stop or the rear feed bar shaft
bearings. Repeat preliminary adjustment section, if necessary, to avoid damage to feed system.
1. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar is in its fully forward position.
2. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the feed bar is approximately 1/8” (3.18mm) away from the front
feed stops.

changer cylinder. As the cylinder is cycled , the feed bar will move
slightly.
cylinder retracted.
NOTICE
If the connector rod is properly adjusted, this dimension should be
• Snug (2) jam nuts on connector rod.

4. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the feed bar is about .005” (.13mm)
away from the forward feed stops.
NOTICE
In the full retracted position the distance from stop block to feed
bar should be approximately the calculated feed length plus 1/16” -
3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm).
62
5. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar is in the full reverse position. In the fully retracted position,
the distance from stop block to feed bar should be approximately the calculated feed length plus
1/16”-3/32” (1.59 - 2.38mm).
6. Fully extend the progression changer cylinder. In the fully extended position the distance from the
stop block to the feed bar should be approximately three quarters (75%) the calculated feed length
plus 1/16” - 3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm).
Throw Gauge Length

and the end of the eccentric hub slot. Machine the throw gauge
blank to this dimension.
NOTICE
measurement.

63
Developing Throw Gauge Length
1. Remove the crown pull-pin.

2. Adjust the eccentric stud in the eccentric assembly to approximately 1/2” (1.27 mm) away from
center and towards the open end of the slot in the eccentric hub.
WARNING
CRUSHING OR CUTTING HAZARD. If the feed is not in the forward position, a message is displayed
telling the operator to inch the feed to the forward position. The progression changer cylinder will shift
as soon as the feed gets within a predetermined range of the forward position. Do not put hands or any
other part of the body in the press.
• Loosen two jam nuts on the connector rod.
• While observing the progression changer shaft stop block, extend and retract the progression
changer cylinder (turn the prog. changer selector switch to ext, then back to retr).
5. As the cylinder is cycled, the stop block will raise and lower. Adjust the connector rod length to
minimize this movement. When properly adjusted, extending and retracting the progression changer
cylinder should result in a total stop block movement of less than 1/16” (1.59mm) up and down.
6. Snug two (2) jam nuts.
• Loosen two jam nuts on the feed linkage rod.
• Adjust the feed linkage rod until the crown pull-pin can be inserted.
• Snug two jam nuts.
• Remove crown pull-pin.
• Slowly inch the press until the open end of the slot in the eccentric hub is up and in line with the
connector rod. This is the eccentric position for the rear feed point of the feed bar.
• Manually push the die feed bar toward the rear until the crown pull-pin can be installed. Install the
pin.
• Measure the maximum travel of the feed bar from the feed bar stops to the front of the feed bar.
8. If the measured feed length is equal to the required feed length, then proceed to section How to
True the Arc of the progression changer.
• Remove the crown pull-pin.
• To increase the feed length, adjust the NOTICE
eccentric stud toward the open end of the The required feed length is equal to the calculated
eccentric hub slot. die feed, plus between 1/16” and 3/32” (1.59mm-
• To decrease the feed length, adjust the 2.38mm). Compare the measured feed length to
eccentric stud away from the open end of the required feed noted.
the eccentric hub slot. This changes the
feed at both ends. Go back to Step 3.
64
How to True the Arc of a Progression Changer
Final Adjustment
1. Crown pull-pin must be installed.
2. Measure feed length is the same as the
IMPORTANT
calculated die feed length, plus between
1/16” and 3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm). If preliminary adjustment was not completed
correctly, it may be possible to inch the press and
3. The preliminary adjustment has been
drive the feed bar through the front feed stop or
properly completed.
the rear feed stop bearings. Repeat preliminary
4. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar is in adjustment if necessary to avoid damage to the
its full forward position. feed system.
feed stops.
• Loosen two jam nuts on the connector rod.
• While observing the feed bar, extend and retract the progression changer cylinder. As the
cylinder is cycled, the feed bar will move slightly.
• Measure the distance from the feed bar stop to the front of the feed bar with the changer
cylinder extended and with the changer cylinder retracted.
• Snug two jam nuts on the connector rod.
NOTICE
If the connector rod is properly adjusted, this dimension should be exactly the same regardless of whether
the changer cylinder is fully extended or in the fully retracted position. If necessary, adjust the connector rod
to achieve this condition.
7. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the feed bar is about .005” (.13mm) away from the forward feed
stops.
8. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar is in the full reverse position. The distance from the stop
block to the feed bar should be approximately the calculated feed length, plus between 1/16” and
3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm) in the fully retracted position.
9. Fully extend the progression changer cylinder. In the fully extended position, the distance from the
stop block to the feed bar should be approximately half (50%) of the calculated feed length, plus
between 1/16” and 3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm).
Throw Gauge Length

1. Properly complete preliminary adjustments & final adjustments.
2. Accurately measure the distance between the eccentric stud base and the end of the eccentric
hub slot.
NOTICE
3. Machine the throw gauge blank to this dimension.
NOTE: Remove the feed connector bar
4. Repeat section How to True the Arc of the and throw arm to gain access for accurate
progression changer. measurement.
65
Standard 2-1 & 4-3 Quick Change Progression Changer (FP-2B, FP-3B)
Developing a throw gauge:
1. Remove the crown pull-pin.
2. Adjust the eccentric stud in the eccentric assembly to approximately 1/2” (12.7mm) away from the
4. The progression changer connector rod is provided with adjustable plates to cover a wide range of
shut heights with minimum adjustment. Adjust the length of the connector rod assembly as follows:
• Loosen the collar clamp on the connector rod.
changer cylinder. As the cylinder is cycled, the stop block will raise and lower. Adjust the
connector rod adjusting ring length to minimize this movement. It will be necessary to slightly
raise the crown hydraulically so the sleeve can be adjusted. Lower the crown after the
adjustment is made. When properly adjusted, extending and retracting the progression changer
cylinder should result in a total stop block up and down movement of less than 1/16” (1.59mm)
• Snug the collar clamp.
5. Establish an approximate adjustment for the feed linkage rod as follows:
• Manually pull the die feed bar fully forward against
WARNING
the forward stop blocks.
• Loosen two jam nuts on the feed linkage rod. Never place your fingers through any part
of the feed linkage for any reason.
• Adjust the feed linkage rod until the crown pull-pin
can be inserted.
• Snug two jam nuts.
6. Remove the crown pull-pin. NOTICE
7. Slowly inch the press until the open end of the A small adjustment of the eccentric hub
slot in the eccentric hub is up and in line with the moves the feed bar quite far.
connector rod.
8. Manually push the die feed bar to the rear feed bar position and install the crown pull-pin.
9. If the measured feed length is equal to the required feed length, then proceed to section How to
“True the Arc” of the progression changer.
10. If the measured feed length is not equal to the required feed length, adjust as follows:
• Remove the crown pull-pin.
• To increase the feed length, adjust the eccentric stud toward the open end of the eccentric hub
slot.
• To decrease the feed length, adjust the eccentric stud away from the open end of the eccentric
hub slot. Go back to Step #4.
66
Standard 2-1 Progression Changer (QC)
Initial Conditions
attached.
2. Adjust the eccentric stud in the eccentric assembly to approximately 1/2" (12.7mm) away from
3. Slowly inch the press until the open end of the slot in the eccentric hub is down and in line with
the connector rod. This is the eccentric position for the forward feed point of the feed bar.
4. The Progression Changer Connector Rod is provided with adjustable plates to cover a wide range
of die shut-heights with a minimum of adjustment. The following are examples of the connector
rod set at different lengths:
1 inch (25.4mm) 2 inch (50.8mm) 3 inch (76.2mm) 4 inch (101.6mm)
Adjust the length of the connector rod assembly as follows:

changer cylinder. As the cylinder is cycled, the stop block will raise and lower. Adjust the
connector rod adjusting ring length to minimize this movement. It will be necessary to slightly
raise the crown hydraulically so the sleeve can be adjusted. Lower crown after the adjustment
is made. When properly adjusted, extending and retracting the progression changer cylinder
should result in a total up and down movement of the stop block of less than 1/16” (1.59mm).
• Snug collar clamp.
67
5. Establish and approximate adjustment for the feed linkage rod as
follows:
• Manually pull the die feed bar fully forward against the forward stop
blocks.
6. Slowly inch the press until open end of the slot in the eccentric hub is
up and in line with the connector rod. This is the eccentric position for
the rear feed point of the feed bar.
7. Manually push the die feed bar toward the rear until you can install the
crown pull pin.
8. Measure the maximum travel of the feed bar from the feed bar stops to
the front of the feed bar.
NOTICE
The required feed length is equal to the theoretical die feed, plus between 1/16” and 3/32”n (1.59mm - 2.38mm).
Compare the measured feed length to the required length noted.
• To increase the feed length, adjust the eccentric stud toward the open end of the eccentric
hub slot. To decrease the feed length, adjust the eccentric stud away from the open end of
the eccentric hub slot. This
CAUTION
changes the feed at both ends
and you will need to go back to A small adjustment of the eccentric hub moves the feed bar quite far.
step 5.
68
Final Adjustment
The final precise adjustment of the
progression changer is referred to as
Truing the Arc. Following is a detailed
description:
Initial Condition
• Measured feed length is the same
as calculated die feed length plus
1/16"-3/32" (1.59mm-2.38mm).
CAUTION
If preliminary adjustment was not completed correctly, it may be possible to inch the press and drive the feed
bar into the front feed stop or the rear feed bar shaft bearings. Repeat preliminary adjustment section, if
necessary, to avoid damage to feed system.

is in its fully forward position.
2. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the
feed bar is approximately 1/8" (3.18mm)
away from the front feed stops.
3. Adjust the length of the connector rod
assembly as follows:
• Loosen collar clamp on connector
rod.
changer cylinder. As the cylinder is cycled, the feed bar will move
slightly.
cylinder retracted.
• If the connector rod is properly adjusted, this dimension should be
• Snug collar clamp on connector rod.
4. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the feed bar is about .005” (.13mm)
away from the forward feed stops. Slowly inch the press until the
feed bar is in the full reverse position. In the full retracted position,
the distance from stop block to feed bar should be approximately the
calculated feed length plus 1/16” - 3/32” (1.59mm - 2.38mm).
69
stop block to the feed bar should be approximately half (50%) the calculated feed length plus 1/16”-
3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm).
WARNING
Keep hands clear of progression changer at all times.
Throw Gauge Length

and the end of the eccentric hub slot. Machine the throw gauge blank
to this dimension.
NOTICE
measurement.

Standard 4-3 Progression Changer (QC)
Initial Conditions
attached.
• Spacers mounted to the stop block and body must be in place.
• Thickness of the 4-3 spacer needs to be machined at
assembly for proper length. After the progression changer is
arced out and the full length feed is set, you inch the press to
the position where the feed bar picks up the material for a new
feed.
• Turn the progression changer selector switch to lock. The feed
bar will move forward, you need to measure the distance from
the front of the feed bar to the stop block. This distance will
equal 3 times the 1 hole spacing of the die plus .062”-.093”
(1.59mm-2.38mm).
• Example: The die is 1.000” (25.4mm) from center of one hole
to center of next hole in direction of feed. The dimension will
be 3.062”-3.093” (77.79mm-78.58mm).
• If the dimension you measure is long, you will have to reduce the .75” (19.05mm) thickness of
the aluminum stop. Reduce the stop by .050” (1.27mm) and re-measure the distance between
the feed bar and stop block to establish a relationship between distance measured and amount
removed from aluminum stop. Continue to remove material until you achieve your calculated
dimension.
70
2. Adjust the eccentric stud in the eccentric assembly to approximately 1/2" (12.7mm) away from
4. The Progression Changer Connector Rod is provided with adjustable

plates to cover a wide range of die shut-heights with a minimum of adjustments. The following are
examples of the connector rod set at different lengths:
1 inch (25.4mm) 2 inch (50.8mm) 3 inch (76.2mm) 4 inch (101.6mm)

• Loosen collar clamp on connector rod.
changer cylinder. As the cylinder is cycled, the stop block will
raise and lower. Adjust the connector rod adjusting ring length
to minimize this movement. It will be necessary to slightly raise
the crown hydraulically so the sleeve can be adjusted. Lower
crown after adjustment is made. When properly adjusted,
extending and retracting the progression changer cylinder should
result in a total up and down movement of the stop block of
less than 1/16” (1.59mm).
• Snug collar clamp.
6. Establish an approximate adjustment for the feed linkage rod as
follows:
• Manually pull the die feed bar fully forward against the forward stop
blocks.
71
7. Slowly inch the press until open end of the slot in the eccentric hub is up and in line with the
connector rod. This is the eccentric position for the rear feed point of the feed bar.
8. Manually push the die feed bar toward the rear until you can install the crown pull pin.
9. Measure the maximum travel of the feed bar from the feed bar stops to the front of the feed bar.
NOTICE
The required feed length is equal to the theoretical die feed, plus between 1/16” and 3/32”. Compare the measured
feed length to the required length noted.
10. If the measured feed length is equal to the required feed length then proceed to section True the Arc
of the progression changer.
• To increase the feed length, adjust the eccentric stud toward the open
end of the eccentric hub slot. To decrease the feed length, adjust the
eccentric stud away from the open end of the eccentric hub slot. This
changes the feed at both ends and you will need to go back to step 5.
CAUTION

Final Adjustment
Initial Condition
1/16"-3/32" (1.59mm-2.38mm).
CAUTION
the press and drive the feed bar into the front feed stop or the rear feed bar
shaft bearings. Repeat preliminary adjustment section, if necessary, to avoid
damage to feed system.
1. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar is in its fully forward
WARNING
position.
Keep hands clear of progression
2. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the feed bar is approximately
changer at all times.
1/8" (3.18mm) away from the front feed stops.
72
• Loosen collar clamp on connector rod.
• While observing the feed bar, extend and retract the progression changer cylinder. As the cylinder
is cycled, the feed bar will move slightly.
• Measure the distance from the feed bar stop to the front of the feed bar with the changer cylinder
extended and with the changer cylinder retracted.
• If the connector rod is properly adjusted, this dimension should be exactly the same regardless
of whether the changer cylinder is fully extended or in the fully retracted position. If necessary,
adjust the connector rod to achieve this condition.
• Snug collar clamp on connector rod.
4. Adjust the feed linkage rod until the feed bar is about .005” (.13mm) away from the forward feed
stops.
5. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar is in the full reverse position.
6. In the full retracted position, the distance from stop block to feed bar should be approximately the
calculated feed length plus 1/16” - 3/32” (1.59mm - 2.38mm).
stop block to the feed bar should be approximately half (50%) the calculated feed length plus 1/16”-
3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm).
Throw Gauge Length

2. Accurately measure the distance between the eccentric stud base and
the end of the eccentric hub slot. Machine the throw gauge blank to
this dimension.
NOTICE
measurement.

73
How to “True the Arc” of the Progression Changer
The final precise progression changer adjustment is referred to as Truing the Arc. Following is a
detailed description:
1. The crown pull-pin must be installed.
IMPORTANT
2. Measured feed length is the same as
calculated die feed length, plus between If preliminary adjustment was not completed
1/16” and 3/32” (1.59mm-2.38mm). correctly, it may be possible to inch the press and
3. Preliminary adjustment has been properly drive the feed bar through the front feed stop or
completed. the rear feed stop bearings. Repeat preliminary
adjustment if necessary to avoid damage to the
4. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar is in feed system.
its fully forward position.
feed stops.
6. Adjust the connector rod assembly length as follows:
• Loosen the collar clamp and connector rod.
• While observing the feed bar, extend and retract the progression changer cylinder. As the
cylinder is cycled, the feed bar will move slightly.
• Measure the distance from the feed bar stop to the front of the feed bar with the changer cylinder
extended, and with the changer cylinder retracted. If the connector rod is properly adjusted,
this dimension should be exactly the same regardless of whether the changer cylinder is fully
extended or fully retracted. If necessary, adjust the connector rod to achieve this condition.
• Snug the collar clamp on the connector rod.
7. Adjust the feed linkage rod, until the feed bar is about .005” WARNING
(.13mm) away from the forward feed stops. Keep hands clear of the
8. Slowly inch the press until the feed bar is in the full reversed progression changer at all times.
position. In the fully retracted position, the distance from stop
block to feed bar should be approximately the calculated feed length, plus between 1/16” and 3/32”
(1.59mm-2.38mm).
9. Return to the Preliminary Setup section, to again check for proper feed stock. Readjust if
necessary.
Throw Gauge Length

1. Prior sections of this manual must be properly
completed. NOTICE
2. Accurately measure the distance between the Remove the feed connector bar and throw arm
eccentric stud base and the end of the eccentric to gain access for accurate measurement.
hub slot. Machine the throw gauge blank to this
dimension.
Install Throw Gauge

1. Repeat section—How to “True the Arc” of the Progression Changer.
74
Upper Suction Unit WARNING
The purpose of the upper suction unit is to support, PIERCING HAZARD. Use extreme caution when working
guide, and hold the finished fin stock until cutoff on the suction unit and around the stacker unit. Stacker
occurs. It also releases the fin stock at the precise rods are sharp and can cause severe injury. Always stay
time and position to allow fins to be stacked on the clear of the stacker unit when in operation, and use caution
stacker rods. when making any adjustments to any part of the line where
one could fall onto the stacker rods.
Upper Suction Unit Location
The upper suction unit is mounted on top of two support arms which are fastened to the suction drop
brackets. These brackets are mounted to the press tie rods on the front side of the press.
Upper Suction Unit Operation

The upper suction unit has three basic sections. The upper portion of the suction unit consists of the
motor, fan housing, fan, and exhaust cone. The middle section is the suction tower where the air
cylinder controlled doors are located. The lower section consists of the suction box, which houses the
suction sheet.
The fan housing framework has milled slots in it for adjusting the suction unit on the support arms. This
adjustment is used to set the suction unit closer to or farther away from the press, depending on the
length of die being used. The suction box measures 1/8” from the cutoff screws. Measurements should
be taken at both back corners of the suction box to square the unit before final adjustment.
Adjusting screws are located in the caps of each support arm and in the slotted frameworks of the
suction tower. These are used for setting the proper height and level of the suction unit. With the
suction sheet mounted in the suction box, the distance from the fin stock line to the bottom of the
suction sheet should be approximately 1/8”. To adjust for leveling the suction box, use the slot
adjustments in the lower framework of the suction tower.
When the upper suction unit is mounted, leveled, and secured to the support arms and press, a length
of fin stock should be run out onto the suction sheet. This will allow the operator to check the fin stock
movement across the suction sheet. If final adjustments are needed for fin alignment of the stacker,
four screws in the suction box that hold the suction sheet securely can be adjusted to improve fin
alignment.
The upper suction unit is an important material transfer unit. It works in conjunction with the fin die
cutoff station and stacker unit to transfer fins from the fin die to a stacked coil of fins on the stacker.
The standard unit uses air flow interruption from the bottom of the suction sheet to the exhaust cone to
allow the suction to be broken and the fin to drop.
Outboard Support
An optional outboard support system can be added with a support bar mounted across the outer ends
of the support arms. An adjustable post fastened to the stacker unit is attached to the suction unit
support bar to give added support. For extreme fin lengths or cart systems, a two-post system may be
required.
Blow Down
The fin blow down system is another option. This system mounts to the top side of the suction sheet
after the suction sheet is secured in place. Pressurized air hook-ups from the press to a regulator
air valve on the suction unit to a connection inside the suction box are used. When activated, this
system blows pressurized air down on the fins that are on the suction sheet during the suction air flow
interrupt period. This aids in faster removal of the fins from the suction unit to the stacker rods. The fin
blow down system is adjustable for different length fins.
75
Wire Tap Down System
The wire tap down system is used for quick removal of the fins from the suction sheet to the stacker
rods. High-speed presses produce fins at a rapid pace. The wire tap down is an efficient system for
aiding in transferring fins from the suction unit to the stacker rods.
Strands of piano wire pneumatically activate the wire tap down units. There are generally two wires,
one near the outboard end of the fin and one near the cutoff end. At approximately the same time the
cutoff operates to cut the fins, the wires are quickly activated, tapped down to help release the fins from
the suction sheet and out of the way of the next fin.
A set of rails is attached to each side of the suction box. The wire tap down units are attached to these
rails and can be positioned along these rails as needed to line up with the tap down grooves in the
suction sheet.
Suction Sheet Servo Tap-Down System

(minimum fin length – 36 inches)
The suction sheet tap-down system provides a mechanical method for moving the fin away from
the sheet, onto the rods, and out of the way of the following fin. This method is accomplished by
eliminating the precise timing needs of vacuum doors and conventional air blow-down system. The
suction sheet tap-down system is comprised of plates nestled in machined pockets in the suction sheet.
They are activated by a signal provided by the press timing controls.
Homing the Servo Tap Down Motor

1. From the Main Screen, Click Setup.
2. Click Logon and use password botg9393
3. Click Fin Line Data and Options.
4. Click Suction Unit.
5. Look at the Servo Motor Status.
6. Compare the color to that of the color code.
7. If the motor is Faulted, or Waiting to be Homed, press
the reset button.
8. You may have to press the reset button twice to clear
a fault.
9. Follow the instructions on the screen to home the
servo motor.
10. Once the servo motor is homed, the two buttons on the
Test Tap Down section of the screen will be functional.
11. Press the Single Tap Down to see the tap down cycle
once.
12. Press the Continuous Tap Down Running to have
the Tap Down cycle once every few seconds.
13. Press the Continuous Tap Down Running again to
stop cycling the system.
If the Servo Motor Status turns RED during either of
these tests, then there is likely a mechanical bind in the
mechanism or the belt is improperly tensioned for the
Servo Tap Down.
Once you have a GREEN light on the Servo Motor Status,
you may return to the main screen and the MS174 error
will be gone.
76
Fin Stock Stacker
Successful Stacking
Normally two rods must be used for each fin. The operation is most successful if the rods are placed as
near the center of the hole pattern sideways as possible (i.e. in a 3 row fin, use the 2nd row, in 4 row fin
use the 2nd and 3rd row). Lengthwise, dividing the fin into thirds with rods.
A Siemens controller is used to control the press. Refer to “Fin Line Users Manual for Siemens
Controlled Fin Lines” for instructions on how to set the fin length and number of fins per stack. Once
these values have been manually set at the control console, the stacker is ready for operation.
This press has a low voltage relay detector. The stacker is one contact, the press is the other. The
stacker must be electrically insulated from the press. When a fin shorts a rod to the press, the low
voltage relay is energized, which will stop the press and prevent fin build-up.
When the press stops after making stacks of fins, the operator must push the manual latch on the
shuttle platter that is opposite the loader platter. When pressed, the spring loaded trip latch allows the
shuttle platters to be released and free to travel to the other stacking position. The operator pushes the
shuttles toward the next stacking position until the latch on the other end locks the shuttles into position.
This will position another set
of rods under the suction box. WARNING
When the stacker is latched ENTANGLEMENT HAZARD. Stay clear of stacker unit and announce
and secure in the second intentions to engage shuttle stacker to all in proximity of the stacker unit.
stacking position, the press
can be restarted and run while the stacked fins from the first stacking position are removed from the
stacker rods.
Manual Stacker Operation

1. With the stacker in its initial position and a length of fin stock run out and held in place by the suction
box, jog the press until the forward motion of the feed stops.
2. Align the stacker rods in both directions (front to back and left to right) to the holes in the fin stock.
The rod holders nearest the press should be to the extreme back position and the stacker base
aligned so as to catch a row of fin holes, as well as to clear any sideways obstructions.
3. Once the base has been aligned to the fins, the rod holders can be positioned to each fin variation.
Air Shuttle Stacker

A shock absorber is positioned on the inside rail of each platter. This allows for the deceleration of
the shuttle platters movement before reaching the positive stop. The positive stop can be adjusted
for positioning the final stopping position of the shuttle platters. These stops can be fine tuned to
center the stacker rods to the center of the holes. When the press stops after making stacks of fins, the
operator must push the manual shuttle button on the press control panel. This will activate the cylinder
underneath the shuttle to the opposite end of the track rail. The shuttle will stop when it reaches the
positive stop. This will position another set of rods under the suction box. The press can be restarted
and run while the stacked fins from the first stacking position are removed from the stacker rods.
NOTICE
The Manual Shuttle Stacker functions similar to the Air Shuttle, except the release lever, shuttle movement
(side to side) to the positive stop (lock) is done manually by the operator.
77
Hydraulic Rotary Stacker
1. When the press stops after making stacks of fins, the operator must push the manual shuttle button,
allowing the stacker to index. This puts another set of rods under this suction box. This method is
used for operator’s safety. The stacker will not rotate until this button is pushed.
2. The index signal will cause the stop station to retract, allowing the fluid motor to drive the table in
rotation. A flow control valve located on the right leg of the press under the fluid motor directional
valve, controls the table rotation speed.
3. When stacker position #1 clears the stop station and before stacker station #2 comes into position,
the timer for the latch pin retract drops out, extending the stop station.
4. As stacker position #2 approaches the stop station it contacts the stop bar, which depresses the
shock absorber and slows the table. The shock absorber is adjustable and must be set in relation
to table speed to stop the table smoothly in the load position. The stacker drive motor stalls with the
stacker against the stop bar.
NOTICE
5. The anti-backup pin then extends, trapping the
stacker in the load position. After a few seconds, the An optional support can be attached
timer for delay stopping motor stops the drive motor. between the upper suction unit and
The stacker is now in position for the next stack of the stacker frame for additional
fins. The press can be restarted to stack fins on the second support to the system.
set of stacker rods.
6. The finished stack of fins on the first set of rods can be unloaded while the press is operating.
Elevator Stacker Option

• The elevator stacker option is used when the stacking rods become too long or too small in diameter. The
rods tend to shake excessively when the stacker repositions under the suction unit, causing the fin to miss
the rods as it drops from the suction unit onto the stacker.
A damping bar is used to limit the vibrations of the rods. This is simply a bar with clearance holes in
it for the stacking rods to pass through. The fins are dropped on the stacking rods and caught by the
damping bar. As a stack of fins on the stacker rods begin to increase, the damping bar is lowered to
allow more fins onto the rods. The damping bar is raised and lowered by four ball screws mounted to
each corner of the stacking station. The ball screws are driven by an electric motor.
• An upper and lower limit switch determines the travel of the damping bar. The upper switch should be set
near the top of the stacker rods (4-6”). The lower limit switch should be set so that the distance between
limit switches is the desired stack height of the bank of fins being produced.
A controller mounted to the stacker determines the damping bar downward rate of travel. A fast rate
is used for the first stack of fins produced when first powering up the machine. The controller then
determines the correct rate of travel for the damping bar based on the first stack. This speed setting is
automatic. The operation of the elevator portion of the stacker can be turned off with a switch mounted
on the control panel of the press.
• The ball screws are chain driven. Proper tension on the chain should be maintained. The chain tension
is adjusted by sliding the motor mounting bracket along the mounting rail. The motor is equipped with a
slip clutch. This clutch should be adjusted so that it slips when the ball nut bottoms out on the rails.
78
Fin Stack Stabilizer
The fin stack stabilizing system was developed to help prevent movement of a fin stack from back to
front on the stacker. This system is intended to prevent the fin stack from leaning so far as to misalign
the stacker rods, but is not intended to aid in stacking fins. This system works with the damping bar
guide rods to help hold a fin stack in position during production. Fins with small diameter holes that
require small diameter stacker rods sometimes lean forward on a stacker. The system utilizes a
stabilizer bar that spans the front and back of the fin stack to help eliminate
NOTICE
some of the lean. This is held in place with adjustment screws that are
threaded into a clamping block that locks onto a guide rod. This system This system should not be
allows the guide rod holder to be placed near the end of the fin stack where used to compensate for a
fine adjustments of the stabilizer bar can be made. stacker that is not level.
1. Produce at least one half of a fin stack to aid in locating the stabilizer
assembly. Do not produce a full
stack, as this may cause the stack to NOTICE
lean, which would lead to improper Make sure the guide rod holder is parallel to the stacker rod
setting of the system. holders, as this will aid in adjustment of the stabilizer bar. The
2. Locate the guide rod holder near the guide rod holder is clamped into position similar to the rod
end of the fin stack on the locating holders onto the locating rails. The guide rod holders do not
rails. have a locating pin like the stacker rod holders. This allows
the guide rod holder to be located at any position on the
3. Locate the stabilizer bar and clamping
locating rails.
blocks on the guide rods.
4. Set the stabilizer bar and clamping blocks on the guide rods.
5. Use a level to make sure the stabilizer bar is level before tightening the clamping blocks to the guide
rod.
6. Adjust the stabilizer bar to within 1/32” of the fin stack. This adjustment should be done from both
sides so that there is an even gap between the stack and stabilizer bar. Tighten the adjustment
screw nut to prevent the screw from rotating during production.
7. Repeat this for both the front and back of the fin stack on all stacker stations.
During production, it will become apparent if the stabilizer bar needs to be adjusted. Different style fins
will react differently to this system, which will require more or less clearance between the fin and the
stabilizer bar. If the stabilizer bar is set too close, the fins may not stack properly. The height position
of the stabilizer bar next to the fin stack can be adjusted. The clearance between the stack and
stabilizer bar can be fine tuned with an adjustment screw.
79
Pull-Back Option on the Rotary Stacker
The Pull-Back Option is provided when it is necessary to locate the Rod Holders near the end of the
Rotary Stacker. This feature moves the Stacker away from the Press 5” before letting the Stacker
rotate, allowing clearance for the radius of the outside (widest) Stacker Rods and/or the Elevator Ball
Screws to miss the Die Shoe. The new style Pull-Back feature has continuously supported rails that
helps prevent flexing that can occur during pull-back and also improves stability.
NOTICE
Longer than 5” pull-back can be provided when necessary.
Heavy-Duty Stacker (Option)

The following list of features are included in and provided with the Heavy Duty Stacker when a Fin Hole
Diameter of less than 3/8” is required. The Pull-Back feature is provided with this Option
• Double Delta Stacker Rods
◊ The Design of the tips on these rods allow for better stacking by allowing the fin more time to
stabilize on the rods.
• Locating Rails for the Dampening Bar.
◊ This provides a stable platform for holding the stacker rods steady because the dampening bar
location can be fixed and rigid.
◊ This also allows for fine tune adjustment of the stacker rod tips to provide precision stacking.
• Slide Lock on the Rod Holders for Stacker Rods.
◊ This allows for easier installation and removal of the stacker rods. With the turn of 1 screw you
can unlock or lock all of the stacker rods.
• Rod Holders can now be moved by 1 person from one side of the stacker.
• New Rod Holder Locating Design.
◊ New design provides a better and more positive locking mechanism.
◊ Numbered locating rails allow for easier and faster setup/changeover times.
• The Stacker Table Top has been stiffened to reduce unwanted flexing.
• Lifting ball screws are guided by linear bearings.
◊ This ensures smooth and accurate movement of the dampening bar without effecting the location
of the stacker rod tips.
• All bearings have been chosen to handle a higher load capacity.
• The Turntable bearing has been upgraded to a new design.
◊ The new bearing provides smoother table motion, better weight distribution on the Stacker frame
and provides superior load capacity.
• Pullback linear rails are now continuously supported.
◊ This prevents unwanted flexing that can occur during pullback and also improves stability during
stacking.
• Redesigned stacker Base.
◊ The base is a single piece of machined steel that provides maximum stability.
• Improvements were made to the Pullback frame to increase its rigidity.
• New Larger and sturdier leveling feet.
• Dowels have been added to many components of the stacker to allow for easier removal and
realignment of parts after performing maintenance/repairs.
• Nylon set screws have been added to locate the Dampening Bars in their left and right positions.
80
Global Experience
...Local Solutions Control Reference
The Control Reference section of this manual will provide an overview of the machine’s operation. It will give
instructions on how to work with the data needed to produce the desired fins in the desired quantities for a
given size and number of production coils. Additionally, this section explains how to setup and configure the
operator touchscreen interface such as passwords, as well as the machine lubrication scheduling, and data for
various fin dies that may be installed into the fin line.
Machine Operations
Screen Navigation
Whenever the main power has been turned
off and then restored again, the PLC controller
and touchscreen will reboot and display the
Main Screen. The touchscreen displays
various intermediate screens during power
up. Wait until this screen is displayed before
proceeding.
Changing Screens
The Screen Change Menu Bar appears along
the bottom of most of the screens. It provides
a quick and easy way to find and change to a
desired screen anytime this menu is visible.
The buttons stay in the same order from
screen to screen, but the button for the current
screen disappears.
Automatic Screen Changes

Inch Screen
Some screen changes are automatic.
Switching to Inch Mode causes the Inch
Screen to automatically be displayed.
Changing to Cont. Run will cause the PLC to
automatically exit the Inch Screen. An attempt
to inch the press without the Inch Screen
displayed will be ignored, but the system
will automatically display the Inch Screen.
Release the inch buttons and press them
again to inch the press.
Continuous Run Screen
The Continuous Run Screen is another
automatic screen. This screen only contains
information and controls that are relevant
when running in Continuous Mode. When
the press stops, the program returns to
the Main Screen, providing access to the
reset fins produce and reset coils produced
buttons.
Acknowledge Message & Confirmation

Screens
The Acknowledge Message and Confirmation
Screens pop up when a response from the
operator is required. The display screen
is restored to the previous screen after the
operator acknowledges the message or
answers the question.
Each message has a unique number to aid in
identifying the message when communicating
a problem with Burr Oak Tool Inc. service
department. Many of the messages, along
with helpful suggestions are listed in the
Appendices at the end of this manual.
Main Screen
The Main Screen displays information about running
the press. The selected mode is displayed to the
left of the screen name. In the upper right corner
are two help buttons shown in close up view below.
82
Using Help
Pressing the using help button will display
the following text box describing how to get
context sensitive help.
To exit this popup screen, press the small x
in the upper right hand corner of the info text
box.
NOTICE
If the small size of the x makes it difficult to
close the text box, try pressing slightly higher,
lower, to the left or to right of the x.
Help Button
Pressing the help button will display context sensitive help
text. The next button pressed after activating help will
display a popup screen with help text for that button or
display area of the screen. Press the help button again to
cancel.
Saving Data
Shown below is an example of a recipe selection window.
These windows can be found throughout the touchscreen.
Each are capable of recalling their existing recipes. With
the proper login many have the ability to create, save, and delete
recipes. On the main screen there are up to four recipes to select
from; from top to bottom: part selection, timing chart, fin chart, and
draw chart. It is not necessary to use all of the recipe tools, some
operators enter the data manually on the main screen, but many
prefer having the data entered correctly once, and the ability to
quickly recall the data by part number, or coil information.
Stroke Control
The figure below shows a variety of items. The Target Press SPM is the desired press speed entered
in the Timing Chart Screen.
In the example, the Stroke Count is 1 / 5, meaning
the press is on stroke 1 of 5. The first stroke starts
at the bottom of the stroke, just after cutoff occurs.
The screen will display stroke 1 for 360 degrees,
until the next bottom dead center is reached.
Press the last stroke button to cause fins to be
cutoff on the next stroke or inch of the press. In
a similar fashion, set the cutoff switch to auto and
instruct the system to begin counting stokes with the current stroke set to 1 by pressing the first stroke
button.
Hoes/Fin displays the number of holes to be produced per fin. The operator can enter a new value in
the input field, however, the data displayed on the Fin Chart dictates the number of holes per fin to
produce if the Prog. Fin button is on. The system considers it an error if the Holes/Fin based on the
Prog. Fin data does not match the value entered in the input field. To correct this error, either turn the
Prog. Fin off, or enter the same value in the Holes/Fin input field.
83
Data for Fin Production
Data related to the number of fins to produce
on the stacker is entered in this section of the
Main Screen. The Coil Length is the size value
of the coil produced. If each stack becomes
its own coil, then the coil length is the same
as the stack height. If multiple stacks produce
one coil, then Coil Length is the stack height
multiplied by the number of Sections Per Coil.
Fin Density is the number of fins per inch. In
the example to the left, the display shows that
375 Fins per Coil is the mathematic result of
multiplying the Coil Length by the Fin Density.
Units of Measurement
This system also supports the use of metric units measured in millimeters. The option to use metric
units is selected from the Draw Chart Screen. When using metric units, the Fins Per Coil is calculated
by dividing the Coil Length by the Fin Spacing, instead of multiplying Fins Per Coil by Fin Density, as is
done when using English inch units. All other data entry on the Main Screen is the same, regardless of
which unit system is active.
Rows Per Die

Rows Per Die represents the total number
of rows in the die. This number does not
typically change unless the die is changed,
or the die has adjustable edge trims that can
remove one or two rows. This value is also referred to as the Stock Width (measured in rows).
Rows Per Fin

Rows Per Fin describes the width of the fin as measured by its number of rows. It is the same as the
number of rows as set by the slit station. The Sections Per Stack value is calculated by dividing the
number of Rows Per Die by the number of Rows Per Fin. The Rows Per Fin value should always be
evenly divisible into the Rows Per Die value.
Sections Per Coil

Sections Per Coil represents the number of sections needed to make one coil. For shorter coils, this
value is often 1. This value may be as high as 4 or 5 for longer coils.
Fins Per Stack Override

If one of the previous sections, such as Coil Length,
is re-entered, then Fins Per Stack is recalculated
and the Fins Per Stack override value is replaced
with the new calculated value. When an override
value has been entered for Fins Per Stack a reset
button appears next to the input fields. This is a
visual reminder that the calculated value has been
overridden. Pressing the reset button causes the
values to be recalculated using the numbers already
entered in the fields.
84
Fins Produced
The upper right box in the figure above displays the number of Fins Produced and Coils Produced.
Fins Produced represents the number of fins on any given section of the stack. When Fins Produced
equals Fins Per Stack, the system stops fin production because the stack is complete.
The Fins Per Stack input field allows entry in case fins are damaged and must be removed from the
stack. Once the fins have been
removed, the operator should press
the Reset Fins Produced button
to set the Fins Produced to zero.
The value of 0 can also be entered
directly into the Fins Produced field.
Error Messages
The figure above displays an error message indicating that the operator must press the master
start button as the next action in order to bring the machine into a condition where it is ready to run.
Messages shown in red with a corresponding red button and the word “Error” cannot be overridden.
The error must be corrected in order to proceed to the point where the press is ready to run.
Some error conditions will lock the press in a condition where it cannot be cleared without cycling the
main power. The message will indicate that the main power must be cycle.
IMPORTANT
The operator should NOT cycle power. The main power should only be cycled by an electrician.
Warnings
Warnings appear with black text on a yellow background. The button color matches the message
line with the words “Override Warning” on the button. If appropriate, the operator can override these
warnings by pressing the yellow button on the screen or pressing the yellow top stop pushbutton.
The press is ready to run when all error and warnings have been cleared or resolved. The message line will
turn white and the message “[MS001] Press is Ready to Run” will appear.
This same message line and button appear on the Fin Chart, Timing Chart, and Inch Screens. The operator
can initiate press motion from any of these screens on which the message line appears
Machine Status
This line displays the status of the
machine and any faults, errors or
warnings that may be present.
Run Status
This line displays the results of the
last main action that occurred. It will display the reason that the press stopped running continuous,
even after the condition that caused the problem has been resolved.
For additional information on Machine Status and Run Status displays, see Appendix B.
85
Inch Screen
The Inch Screen is designed specifically to aid the
operator while inching the press to various crank angle
positions. This screen can be accessed by switching
the stroke selector switch to the inch position while in
any other screen.
The Inch Screen displays differently depending on the

selected Inch Mode. This figure shows the Inch Screen
with manual selected for Manual Mode.
Once running conditions have been satisfied, the

operator can manually inch the press by holding in
one of the black run buttons while quickly tapping the
other black run button. The tapping action requires the
operator to fully and quickly depress the second button,
but to then quickly release it again. If the operator holds
both buttons without quickly releasing at lease one of
them, the controller will keep the clutch engaged for only a short period of time and then disengage the clutch
and apply brakes.
The operator can toggle between Auto and Manual

Inch Modes by pressing the inch mode button. The
figure below shows the screen in Auto Inch Mode.
Each button around the crank angle dial represents
a possible target to which the operator can inch the
press. Pressing one of the buttons transfers the
associated displayed crank angle value to the Inch to
Target: readout.
Upon releasing the run buttons, a new target is

automatically selected as either the Preferred Top Stop
or the Forward Feed position, depending on which
target is the next closest.
NOTICE
Due to the possibility of large strokes, it is preferred to use the Auto Inch Mode to move the Press to various
crank angle locations.
86
Continuous Run Screen
The Continuous Run Screen appears when
the press begins running in Continuous Mode.
This screen displays all of the timing items
that might need to be adjusted while running.
These timing items appear in the same
location and order as the Timing Chart Screen.
Timing items can be adjusted only if an
adequate password level has been entered,
or if particular timing items have been enabled
for adjustment previously in the Timing Chart
Screen. Assuming that a timing item can be
adjusted, follow the directions below.
1. Select the timing item to be adjusted.
2. Press the Increase Value or Decrease

Value buttons to increase or decrease the
value. The change is made to the value
shown in the apply new field.
3. Once the applied new value displays the new desired value, it can be assigned to the selected timing by
pressing the apply new button.
NOTICE
The increase value and decrease value buttons will only appear when the selected timing is allowed to be
adjusted.
Finish Fin Button

By pressing the Finish Fin button, the operator signals to the
press to perform a top stop after the current fin has been
completed. This button will flash during the production of the final
fin either because the stack is complete or because the finish fin
button has been pressed.
When the press motion stops, the system leaves the Continuous
Run Screen and returns to the Main Screen.
Working with Data Needed to Run the Fin Line

Password Authorization Configuration, Logon/Logoff
This machine shipped with data access restrictions set to levels
that are commonly used by various customers. Because each
company has different views on who should have access to
certain data, the system was designed to allow the customer
to configure their own passwords and authorization levels after
receiving the machine.
Within the Password Configuration Screen passwords can
be edited, created and deleted, and password levels can be
assigned to various passwords.
Anyone that has entered a valid password through the logon
process can enter the Password Configuration Screen, but only
passwords at their level will be displayed.
87
Authorization Configuration Screen
The supervisor should enter this screen and change the passwords and levels as desired. The supervisor
should remain at Level 5 in order to continue to have access to the Authorization Configuration Screen.
The machine owner/supervisor has access to levels 1-5.

Multiple users can be created within the same access level.
Passwords can have any number of digits, but only contain
numeric values.
If the supervisor password is lost, contact Burr Oak Tool

Inc. to recreate the top level password. Please make
every effort to safeguard passwords. For security reasons,
the operator must log back on after leaving the Password
Configuration and Authorization Configuration Screens.
The Authorization Configuration Screen sets the password
levels that are required to perform various machine and
data entry functions. After leaving this screen, notice that
some input fields are hidden when the required password
level is not entered. Some data can be viewed but not
edited.
The Logon Required to Operate Press toggles between Logon Not Required and Logon Required. When set
to Logon Required, a password (at any level) must be entered, or else the press will not Master Start.
The Line Setup and Overrides password levels should be set to high values, since overriding the normal
warnings without understanding the implications and circumstances could lead to machine damage.
Validating the software license is installed. Just above the bottom of the screen will be three circles, 1, 2,
and 3. To verify the software license is installed, circle three should be colored green. Entering the supplied
authorization code in the text box on the right and clicking … button will validate the entered code. If your code
will not change circle three green, contact Burr Oak Tool Inc.
Fin Chart Screen

The Fin Chart allows for the programming of unique
fins. Various die functions can be turned on or off on
a per stroke basis within this chart.
In the example shown, the Prog. Fin button is
highlighted yellow, indicating that the programmable
data is active.
When this button is not highlighted, the system

automatically calculates the cutoff stroke and the
changer strokes needed in order to produce the
entered Holes/Fin value.
88
Programming a Fin
One of the first things to do when programming a fin is to set the cutoff stroke. Various combinations
of changer extend and retract strokes can add up to the same number of holes produced. Simply
program the new stroke by pressing the button on the desired stroke and delete the previously
programmed cutoff by pressing the highlighted button if cutoff occurrence needs to be changed.
1. Set the gag stations as required after setting the cutoff.

2. Program a needed gag station anywhere in the fin sequence and stamp out several fins.
3. The effect of setting the gag will not appear for the first several fins.
4. This trial and error process can become complicated if a changer stroke is required to shift in the
gag’s position on the fin.
Non-Programmed Parts
The figure to the right shows the Fin Chart in the
non-programmable mode, Prog. Fin is turned off.
In this mode, the number of stokes and the changer
are automatically calculated by the system to
produce the entered Holes/Fin value. The column
headings under the gag station numbers have
changed to describe what controls that gag station.
In this example, all of the gags are defined as Sw.
This is typical for the Prog. Fin off condition, and
means that the gag stations will turn on/off with the
die function selector switch.
Draw Chart
The Draw Chart data is used for reference only. It does not have any effect on the operation of the fin line. A
warning will display if a match is not found. The draw setting for the corresponding row in the Draw Chart will
be copied to the main screen. These same values will
be used as the Move To values for fin lines installed
with the Auto Draw Adjust option.
Collar Height can be manually entered or

automatically calculated. When Manually Enter Collar
height is checked, as shown in the figure to the right,
any value can be entered in the Height column. If
Calc: (1FPI)*(1+Shrink Rate) is checked, then the
system will use this equation to calculate the collar
height based on the FPI entry in the column to the left.
The entry for Shrink Rate is hidden in this example,

but become visible when the Calc: option is selected.
Entering 0 in the Shrink Rate field will cause the
controller to calculate the coil height, but not the shrink
rate compensation.
89
Timing Chart Screen
The timing chart screen is where the timing of events
in relationship to the press crank angle is adjusted.
Screen settings and other parameters that relate to
the press can also be adjusted here.
The timing items on the left side of the screen, with

the exception of Top Stop, have values associated
with them that refer to the press crank angle when the
solenoid associated with that action is too energized
or de-energized. These values are not intended to
indicate when the actual event takes place, since
there are electrical and mechanical delays from the
time that voltage is first applied to or removed from the
solenoid until the action completes.
It is important to be able to watch the press and tell if a
timing item is happening too soon or too late, and then
make the timing change to correct the problem.
Target Press Strokes per Minute (SPM)

The Target Press Strokes per Minute (SPM) is the set point value for machines with the Auto Speed
Adjustment DC actuator option installed. If this option is installed, the system will adjust the motor
sheaves over a number of steps to make the actual running press speed match the Target Press speed.
Uncoiler Speed
The Uncoiler Speed (Hz) is a percentage of the maximum allowable speed. A larger number will cause
stock to pay out more quickly when the uncoiler clutch is engaged. If the press stops often while
running continuous because of a stock fault, then this value may need to be increased.
NOTICE
When the stroke mode is set to Setup Stroke or Inch Mode, the uncoiler speed is set to a fixed failure
of 40 hertz, regardless of the press speed.
Vacuum Speed (Hz)

Vacuum Speed affects the strength of the suction on the plate. Caution should be used when
changing this value. It is not uncommon to need to adjust Stacker Door Open and Close settings when
adjusting this value.
An adequate password level must be entered in order to enable timing items through the Timing Chart
Screen. Once an item has been enabled
for adjustment, the operator password
level will be sufficient to adjust the enabled
timing items. Timing items will show a
green circle in the Adj. column when they
have been enabled.
The figure shown is a section of the Timing
Chart Screen. A sufficient password level
has been entered when the allow adjust
button is visible. Once an item has been
enabled for adjustment, the operator password level will be sufficient to allow adjustment of the enabled
timing items.
90
Adjusting Press Speed
Press speed is adjusted automatically using a dc motor self-contained actuator system or variable frequency
drive (VFD).
Automatic Press Speed Adjustment (DC Actuator Option or VFD)
Press speed on machines with the Automatic Press Speed Adjustment option is adjusted by highlighting
the Target Press Speed timing item, setting a new value using the increase and decrease buttons, and
pressing the Apply Value button. This value can be set with the machine running or stopped, but the
actual adjustment to the sheave only occurs when the press is running in Continuous Mode.
Troubleshooting Timing Items

Three timing activities are sensitive to proper timing.
Timing the fins fall onto the stacker rods: This activity often involves mechanical setup as well as setting
timing values.
1. Stroke a fin to the last stroke before cutoff, and then inch the press to forward feed.
2. Look at the fin to see if the collars are tracking properly in the suction sheet grooves. If not, it may
be necessary to shift the suction sheet or make an adjustment to the left-right position of the cutoff
stripper bar, if one is installed.
3. Look at the alignment of the stacker rods beneath the holes of the fins. The rods should be
centered on the holes left-to-right and front-to-
IMPORTANT
back. If not, a qualified die setup person will be
required to make the proper adjustment. A qualified die setup person will be required to
make the proper adjustments!
4. Inch through bottom and back to the top of the
stroke. Watch for the fins to drop. Look for any hang-ups as the press inches through bottom.
5. When the press is near top again, put the press in the Stroke
Mode that is experiencing difficulty with stacking (Single or
Continuous Run).
6. Go to the Timing Chart Screen and disable both the Fin Blow-
Down and the Fin Tap-Down. With these functions off, it is easier
to see the effects of the stacker door open timing.
7. Run the press and watch carefully.
The leading edge of the fins will start to drop before cutoff occurs. If the Stacker Doors Open timing
item is set too early. If the fins drop enough to catch on the tips of the stacker rods before reaching
their full forward position, increase the Stacker Doors Open value.
Return to the Timing Chart Screen and enable one or both fin release functions once the value is set so
that the fins drop parallel to the suction plate.
Fin Tap-Down works best with thin stock single row fins. Start with the Fin Tap-Down option only. Set
the on values quite late (closer toward the actual cutoff, such as 110 for Cont. Run and 130 for Setup
Stroke). The wire tap-down happens quickly in comparison to the stacker doors. At this late setting,
the wire tap-down should not have any effect. The fin should already be released and partially on the
stacker rods.
Adjust the tap-down timing to lesser degrees, in increments of 10, causing the tap-down to occur
sooner. It is best to disable the wire tap-down until the stacker doors open timing it properly adjusted.
The timing is set too early if the edge of the fin that was just cutoff gets struck by the next incoming fin.
The wire tap-down off timing is very flexible. The wires need to move down only a very short distance
before retracting. The stacker doors closing time is more sensitive. If the doors close too early, the fin
could be drawn back toward the suction sheet. If the doors close too late, the next fin coming out of
the press might not pull up against the suction sheet, causing it to be blocked against the tip of the first
stacker rod.
91
Changer Extend Timing
The changer could shift prior to reaching its full back feed position, and possibly miss the intended
pickup hole if the extend timing is too early (-160). There will be more movement in the feed bar as
it moves farther from the forward point when the changer switches. The normal motion of the press
moves the stock forward station about 300° and continuing until around 120°. If this additional feed
bar movement peaks at around 0°, it will further accelerate the stock forward. The stock can be flung
ahead of its normal position if this happens before the stock retard pins engage. This will result in the
loss of progression.
Changer Retract Timing

If the retract timing is too early, the feed bar will appear to stall or come to a stop on its way toward
forward feed. This might lead to more wear on the bearings. Advancing the timing (larger values) will
cause this stalling out effect to blend better with the normal stopping that occurs at forward feed.
The changer might not be fully retracted by the time the press reaches the full back feed position if the
retracting timing is too late. This will result in fewer holes than expected.
General Changer Timing Comments:

When the changer extend and the changer retract both fire too late, the correct number of holes will be
produced in Continuous Mode, but enhancement features will not appear in the proper locations.
Another timing effect is that long or short fins are produced in Setup Stroke, but not in continuous run,
or vise versa. The late changer extend may produce an extra hole, but the late changer retract loses a
hole so that the net effect is the correct number of holes with an apparent shift in the fin configuration.
This same pattern might not hold true for Setup Stroke because the timing for single stoke is different
than that used for continuous run, and it may be set correctly. If this problem is present in Setup
Stroke, it can be detected by carefully counting the number of holes produced with each stroke and
checking them against the expected results.
Top Stop Timing:

The top stop value does not have the same input range as the other timing items in the left-hand
column. It represents the number of degrees required to stop the press from the point where the clutch
is disengaged to a point near the top of the stroke. The preferred stopping point is usually around
10:30, or 345 degrees on the crank angle. The number of degree needed to stop the press is smaller
for Setup Stroke. The required stopping degrees might exceed 400 (maximum allowable: 450) in
continuous run, when running the press fast and with a heavy die.
Production Data Screen

The production Data Screen tracks the total accumulation of
strokes, fins, and coils since the last time the counter was reset.
These can be used to track coil produced for a given work shift or
total strokes since the last preventative maintenance action.
92
Die Setup Screen
The Die Setup Screen is used by the operator to view and modify the
current state of the die. This screen includes displays for such things
as auto draw adjust, auto slit select, and auto edge trim adjust. Most
of the draw settings are visible, even if the fin line is not equipped
with auto draw adjust.
Draw Settings
When a value is entered for Fins/Inch: the system searches
the active draw chart to find a row that contains a matching
value for the fins/inch value. The system then copies the
data in that row to the New Column in the Die Setup Screen.
This is almost identical to what the system does for the draw
settings table in the Main Screen.
If the operator edits any of the values in the New column,
then a button appears allowing the operator to copy these
new values to the active draw chart, provided that the
currently entered password is high enough to allow draw
chart editing. This method can be used to edit existing data,
as well as enter new data. The system will create a new row
of data if the fins/inch value entered does not match any in
the active draw chart.
Copy New to Current Button

This button allows the operator to copy the values in the
New column to the Current column. Use this button to update the current draw position with values
displayed in the New column, after retrieving new values from the active draw chart and manually
moving the draw stations to the displayed new settings.
Sequenced Die Adjust Button

This button is only available for fin lines equipped with the Auto Draw Adjust option. The intended
purpose is to quickly adjust the draw settings from one set of values to another in a way that preserves
the integrity of the stock in the die so that the material does not have to be laced through the die. This
is accomplished by moving the draws to an intermediate setting and then instructing the operator
to Setup Stroke the press. One or more draw stations might be adjusted simultaneously in order to
achieve the most rapid transition from one setting to the next.
This tool works best when moving from one known set of draw values to another. The biggest
advantage to using this tool comes when moving from a low collar to a high collar setup. The
adjustment process can be resumed if it is aborted, but there will be an increased risk of stock damage.
All at Once Die Adjust Button

Pressing this button will activate a process that simultaneously moves the draw stations from their
current positions to the listed new positions. This method of adjusting the die is best when there is no
stock in the die. This method can also be useful if only changing the collar height by a small amount. It
is important that the current and new positions accurately represent the current actual positions of the
draws and the desired “move to” new positions of the draws.
93
Correcting Draw Setting Discrepancies
Values for the current draw setting and the actual values as read on the dial at the die may not match.
Generally a small error such as this will not affect the performance of the die in producing fins.
Large errors should be corrected by entering the actual value into the Current column. It may be
necessary to home the draw stations by manually cranking them down to the hard stops and entering
zeroes in the Current column. The physical dials should read zero when moved fully down. If not,
contact Burr Oak Tool Inc. service department. If the fin line has the auto draw adjust option, unlock
the die in order to make any manual adjustment to the draw stations. Buttons are provided to lock and
unlock the die. The current status of the die is shown in the green box. Once any manual adjustments
have been made, the die should be locked again.
Edge Trim
Fin lines with auto edge trim can be equipped with controls for left, right, or both edge trims. A button is
provided to extend and retract the edge trim. Some dies also have a mid-stop position. The retracted
position provides the widest stock. Mid-stop in narrower and extended creates the narrowest of the
three. The operator is required to update the rows per fine value on the Main Screen in order to match
the actual rows per die as affected by the edge trim settings. This value should be updated if the edge
trim is manually changed to a different location.
Adjust Slit Station

Fin lines with auto slit adjust will have controls visible to adjust the slit station from the Die Setup
Screen. The entry for the rows per fin value is identical to the one found on the Main Screen, and
changing the value in one place will change it in the other. Like the edge trim, it is the operator’s
responsibility to change the slit station when needed to get the desired rows per fin (fin width as
measured in rows). With the auto adjust, simply press the blue adjust slit station button. A Please Wait
Screen will appear while the system makes the change
Vacuum Motor
The vacuum motor can be turned off while still allowing the vacuum doors to operate. This might be
useful when producing short fins.
Straightener Bar and Cutoff Stripping

Some machines have additional automated equipment. Controls for these features appear only if they
are installed. The controls allow the operator to raise and lower the bars that affect fin straightening
and cutoff fin stripping. There are no physical operator switches associated with these bars. These
bars will be automatically raised when the lacer switch is turned to the on position. A pop-up screen will
prompt the operator with a choice to lower them when the lacer is turned off again.
94
Die Data & Options Screen
This screen allows data for multiple dies to be configured
and stored with unique names. The Die No. Field allows
flexibility in naming the recipe something other than the
Die Number if desired.
By using the recipe window in the upper left, all data

pertinent to the use of a particular die can be saved if the
customer has a need to run multiple dies in the Fin Line.
If the Fin Line has a progression changer or servo feed

option, the upper right corner will be visible. Enter the
number of holes fed during a full feed and the number of
holes fed during a partial feed. In addition, the forward
feed position in degrees must be set. (102 typically for
progression changer, 85 typically for servo feed)
A collection of options appear in the center of the screen. Most fin dies do not need these options; however,
they can be enabled and disabled for the particular die being run in the Fin Line.
The Die Functions button will allow you to setup how the gag stations and auxiliary blowoffs will behave based
on die function switch positions and the use of a programmed fin from the Fin Chart.
This table shows the possible number of gags and auxiliary blowoffs available on the Fin Line. Each of these
gags can be set up to work in a particular way.
Die Function Screen

On the Gag Installed row, press the red button (under
the corresponding gag station number) to enable the gag
functionality for that particular station. When enabled, the
button will turn green. To disable a particular gag station,
just press the green button under the corresponding gag
station number.
Press the button in the Prog Fin On: row beneath the
desired gag station number in order to change the
definition for a particular gag station. The readout in the
button will rotate between Prog., Sw, and –Sw.
Prog. means that the state of the gag station is directly set
by the state of the button on the Fin Chart Screen.
Sw means that the state of the gag station is directly controlled by the position of the die function
selector switch.
-Sw is used to define the gag station as being the same as Sw, but opposite. In other words, when
the die function selector switch is off, the gag station will be energized. This is useful when the wiring,
plumbing, or function of the die gag is reversed from expected or desired behavior.
The definitions in the Prog Fin Off row determine how the gags behave when the system is not using
programmable fin chart data.
To change a definition for a particular gag station, press the button in the Prog Fin Off row under the
gag number to be changed. The readout in the button will rotate between Sw, -Sw, On, and Off.
On means that the gag station will be energized regardless of the position of the die function selector
switch. Off means that the gag station will be de-energized regardless of the position of the die function
selector switch.
95
Auxiliary Blowoff
Shown in the figure above are rows labeled Auxiliary Blowoff 1 and Auxiliary Blowoff 2.The auxiliary
blowoffs are an option for some machines with extra notch stations. The Die Data screen allows blowoff
functions to be associated with any of the valid gag stations. The auxiliary blowoff will energize on every
stroke in which any one of the associated gag stations create a true condition. Press the red button on
the corresponding Auxiliary Blowoff 1/2 station in order to enable the Auxiliary Blowoff to energize with
the corresponding gag station. Press the green button on the corresponding Auxiliary Blowoff station in
order to disable the Auxiliary Blowoff for that particular station.
Auto Slit Adjust

The auto Slit Adjust button is an option available which will automatically set 1
the number of rows on a die if both the fin line and die have the option. The 2
setup of the table will be specific to a particular die and the rows a customer 3
will wish to run. You will need to refer to the Fin Die manual to properly select 4
Extend (Ext.) or Retract (Ret.) on the cylinder to configure the die to have the 5
proper number of slits selected. 6
7
Auto Die Adjust 8
The Auto Die Adjust button is an option available which will automatically set 9
the draws on the die. 10
Die Adjust Data

This data is only needed for fins lines
with the auto die adjust option installed
and fin dies with the automatic adjuster
that are compatible with this option.
Max Reflare/Restrike Dial

This setting should be set to the
maximum dial setting that either of
there adjusters can move to before
they hit their up limit hard stops. The
system uses these values to recognize
the upper limit of travel.
Stroke to Next
This value must be entered so that the system knows how many full progression strokes it takes
to move the stock from one draw station to the next. Typically these values are 1 or 2. The
value listed under the last active draw station is usually larger since it indicates the number of
strokes from that station to the reflare or restrike station. The value listed under the reflare or
restrike is typically larger (10-15) and indicates the number of strokes to move the stock from
that station to just beyond the cutoff. These values are used in conjunction with the Sequenced
Die Adjust method.
Station Number
This value must be entered so that the system can relate valves with die stations. These
numbers are not necessarily in order since the valves could alternate between being plumbed to
the left and right side of the die.
96
Lube Data & Options Screen
The Lube Data & Options Screen is also located
in the Setup Screen area. Enter data that affects
the various lubrication systems on the machine
in this screen. Lube setup and maintenance
functions such as purging air out of the lube lines
and greasing the press can also be performed.
Pre-lube will automatically take place when the

operator initiates running in Continuous Mode by
pressing the green Prior Action/Run Continuous
button if the timer has expired based on the idle
time until pre-lube value entered in this screen.
The figure to the right shows a value of 10
minutes for Idle Time Until Pre-Lube. This means
that the machine will only idle for 10 minutes after
the last activity before it will lubricate the stock.
Running in Continuous Mode causes the stock to be lubed since the stock is pulled through the stock lube tray/
tank. The operator can force a manual pre-lube before the elapsed time has expired by pressing the green
Prior Action/Run Continuous button twice within a few seconds.
Two other entries in the pre-lube data section tell the system how many pulses of lube to inject into the
different areas of the die. Enter a larger number of injections for more lubricant.
After the pre-lube stock has completed, the system automatically extends the pre-lube for several strokes
in order to allow time for stick that has been pulled through the lube tank to reach the die when running
continuous. This happens automatically after any pre-lube if the press if running in Continuous Mode. After
the extend pre-lube occurs, the system begins running
the continuous lube function. NOTICE
The data in the continuous lube section controls
The first two entries in the machine lube section affect how many strokes of the press happen between
greasing the press. Strokes Between Greasing the injections into the various areas of the die that are
Press (thousand) is an entry that affects how often the listed. If more lube is desired, the number should be
press is greased. reduced. This makes the injections more frequent.
Strokes Since Last Grease (thousand) is a readout that shows how many thousands of strokes have happened
since the press was last greased. When this number reaches the value entered above it, a greasing cycle will
automatically happen and this number will reset.
Pulses During Tie Rod Lube sets the number of injection pulses sent to the tie rods when they are lubricated.
The tie rods are lubricated every time the press is greased. Changing how often the press is greased also
changes how often the tie rods are lubed. Use a value of at least 10 for this setting in case it takes 8 pulses to
refill lines that have partially drained.
To operate one of the purge functions, with the master start on, simply press the desired purge button. It will
turn yellow and the appropriate injector will cycle off and on. To turn the purge function back off, press the
screen button again.
Grease press is not a purge function. Press this button to run the press greasing function as it runs when
automatically greasing the press. The counter will reset.
97
Fin Line Data & Options Screen
Enter data that is specific to the machine and
installed options in the Fin Line Data & Options
Screen. All of the options selected on the following
screens will be saved by the recipe window in the
upper left of the screen.
Stacker Jam Delay

Allows a fin to be touching both the suction
sheet and the stacker for X msec before the
press will fault with a stacker jam.
Max. Stack Height

The system uses this information along with
the collar height to determine how many fins
can fit on the stacker rod. Leave an inch from
the bottom of the suction sheet to the top of
the stack. The vacuum system can draw the fins back off the top of the stack, especially if they do not
have room to settle flat on the stack.
NOTICE
Hold to Rotate
The NO setting means that the operator does not have to If the operator releases the manual stacker
press and hold the manual stacker pushbutton the entire pushbutton too early, the stacker will
time the stacker is rotating. The Yes setting means the immediately stop rotating.
operator will hold the pushbutton the entire time.
Rotation Time (msec)

This is the amount of time in milliseconds that the stacker has for completion of its rotation. The stacker
will stop attempting to complete the rotation after this set amount of time, if the stacker does not have
the pull back option the value does not affect the speed of rotation. A flow metering unit on the stacker
controls the rotation speed. If the stacker is equipped with the pull back option, the stacker will push
forward after rotation is complete based on an in-position sensor . This means that the process might
be completed much faster than the maximum allowable time, which can be set as high as 20 seconds.
Stacker Has Elevator

Option to turn on control of an elevator if elevator
stacker is installed.
Elevator Drop (msec)

This value determines how many milliseconds the
elevator stacker will drop each time it calculates that
an inch worth of fins have been placed on the stacker.
This value should be made larger if the stacker does
not drop far enough each time. The collar height and/
or fins per inch value are used to determine when an
inch worth of fins has been produced. Be sure these
values are entered correctly on the Main Screen.
Initial Drop (inch)

This value is the amount of fins (in inches) that must
be placed on the stack initially before the stacker
begins dropping with each inch of fins.
98
Pull Back
Option to turn on control of pull back if stacker has pull back option.
Edge Guard EStop

Option if the edge guard bumper EStops are installed on stacker.
Own Remote IO
Option set if machine has elevator stacker that has a dedicated PLC to control its operation.
Auto Raise Elevator

Option will only be used if machine is equipped with a fantail stacker.
Auto Lower Elevator

Option will only be used if machine id equipped with a fantail stacker.
Misc. Hardware Options Screen

Used to turn on specific options that may have
been purchased for the Fin Line.
Uncoiler Data Screen

Slack stock determines how long the uncoiler
will continue to pay out after the switch has
been seen
Stock Feed Screen

Die Jam Delay (msec)
Amount of time the die jam detector can be
high before the press stops.
Keylock Pull Pin in to Stroke

If true, then the pull pin must be installed in the
feed system to perform set up or continuous running of the press.
Servo Feed
If Servo Feed option is installed, this will home the servo motor. The feed bar should be in the forward
feed position before homing the encoder. See the servo feed section for a procedure to home the servo
feed.
99
Press Speed Control Screen
If an electric sheave is installed, this screen
will allow you to perform your sheave
maintenance, or manually control the fly wheel
speed to verify the sheave if working properly.
The sheave maintenance function will lower
the speed of the flywheel and verify the system
is working within the tolerable range and then
increase the speed of the fly wheel and verify
the system is working within the tolerable range.
Machine Behavior Options Screen

Shutdown Master When Idle
Customers can choose to turn the master off if
the machine has been left idle for a specified
amount of time.
Display Fin Chart

Hiding the Fin Chart can be done if the fin die
being run does not have the need to be setup
as a programmable fin.
Auto Inch Data Screen

These parameters will typically be set by
BOTI. The Auto Inch function is used to inch
the press to a specific crank angle position.
Depending on how close to the target angle,
the auto inch clutch on time will be either
large, medium or small. As the crank angle
approaches the target, the choice will shrink
from large to small. These move times are also
sealed by the die/no die weight. If a press will
run dies of multiple different weights, the die
weight should be adjusted to allow the crank to
move normally.
Fin Production Options Screen

Both options are typically enabled. These
options were created to increase operator
efficiency.
100
Line Setup & Overrides
This section allows continued operation in the event of a failed sensor until a replacement sensor can be
obtained. Another purpose is to allow operation of the press when the die has been removed during die
change outs. The system will turn off functions that
relate to the die and the handling of the stock when the
No Die button is pressed.
The system requires that the motors start while still in

the Line Setup and Overrides Screen to prevent misuse
of these overrides. All overrides will be cleared if the
motors are started in any other screen. This helps
protect against someone setting the overrides and
forgetting to clear them. The system alerts the operator
with various warnings stating that overrides are active.
As another precaution, the errors that use to appear
as red (cannot be overridden) are instead displayed
as yellow warnings that can and must be overridden in
order to run the press.
IMPORTANT
Before using any of these overrides, understand the implications of doing so. If not certain, do NOT use these
overrides. Damage to the machine and/or die could result from improperly setting overrides.
Inputs Screen
The Inputs Screen indicates which inputs are powered
by lighting a green circle next to the input.
There are several pages of inputs. The heading at

the top of each screen describes the physical location
where you can find the remote I/O modules for these
inputs. Press the arrow buttons to view the other input
pages. The outputs button on the Screen Change
Menu along the bottom allows direct access to the
Outputs Screen.
The wires connected to the inputs are numbered to

indicate that they are inputs, the rack number, and
the address of the I/O point. For example, the wire
connected to the input for the Right Run Inch PB would
be numbered 9.5.
101
Outputs Screen
The Outputs Screen is located in the Setup Screen
area. Outputs that are on (power at the output) are
indicated by a value of 1 and a red square to the left of
the output description. If an adequate password level
has been entered through the logon process outputs
can be turned on/off in this screen. Some pairs of I/O
are interlocked such that both sides of a double acting
solenoid valve cannot be energized at the same time.
There are several pages of outputs. The heading at
the top of each screen describes the physical location
where the remote I/O modules for the outputs can be
found. Use the arrow buttons at the bottom of the
screen to view the other output pages.
IMPORTANT
Care should be used when turning any output on or off since the outputs are not interlocked to protect the
machine.
Message Log Screen

The most recent operator message is displayed at the
top of the Message Log Screen, with progressively
older messages displayed down the page. These
messages were not intended for use by the machine
operator, but as a means of obtaining internal
messages and timed based sequencing of events
for further diagnosis by Burr Oak Tool Inc. technical
support personnel. A list of all messages and required
actions is located in the Appendices section of this
operator’s manual.
Profibus Diagnostic Screen

The Profibus Diagnostic Screen is used as a
troubleshooting tool to help diagnose issues with the
profibus nodes and network. If a node is missing it will
be highlighted in Red. If a node is present it will be
highlighted in Green. Nodes that are disabled or not
used will be marked as well.
102
Servo Status Screen
This screen is used to display any servo system faults,
alarms, and warnings. The Reset All button on the
bottom left is used to clear any existing faults and
alarms.
Language Selection Screen

This screen is used to switch between different
languages. Select one of the languages displayed on
this screen to switch to that particular language.
Touch Screen Configuration

A number of buttons that are on the Setup Screen are
used to configure the touchscreen. They are shown in
the example to the right.
The Calibrate Screen button is used to align the touch
zones on the physical membrane of the screen with
the image that is displayed on the LCD. Unlike a CRT
screen, an LCD screen rarely needs to be recalibrated
once it has been done correctly. The only reason to
recalibrate is to adjust for slight differences in view
angle for operators of different heights.
NOTICE
The data in the continuous lube section controls how many strokes of the press happen between injections
into the various areas of the die that are listed. If more lube is desired, the number should be reduced. This
makes the injections more frequent.
103
Resetting the PLC Retained Data Memory
Unknown problems in the software are referred to as “bugs” in the code. Some bugs cause only minor
annoyances and can be worked around until a software fix can be developed and a program update sent for
installation. Other bugs cause more difficult problems. Some of these bugs can be cleared by cycling the
main power to the machine.
The PLC has a section of memory that retains certain data values even when the main power is cycled. If a
bug interacts with one of these retained values, then cycling the main power may not fix the problem. It may
become necessary to reset the PLC Retained Data memory. Resetting this data will not affect any of the
stored recipes, since that data resides on the memory card in the touchscreen, not on the PLC. To reset the
PLC data, complete the following steps:
1. Go to the Inch Screen and record the current crank angle (to be reset afterwards).
2. Open the door on the operator pendant (this door holds the touchscreen) in order to gain access to
the PLC CPU module.
3. On the CPU module (furthest to the left), there is a switch that controls the CPU operation mode. It
is normally in the Run mode. To reset the memory, move the switch to the MRES position. Press it
down somewhat firmly for two seconds (the switch is spring loaded in this lower position). A light on
the CPU should flash on, then off, then on again during this period.
4. After the light comes back on, release the downward pressure on the switch for about 1 second and
then press down on the switch again. This should initiate the memory resetting process. The lights
will begin to flash.
5. After the resetting process has started, move the switch to the run position. Wait until all lights stop
flashing and the status light indicates that the CPU is running (about 1 minute).
6. Cycle the main disconnect power, leave the power off for about 10 seconds before restoring the
main power.
7. Go to the Inch Screen, logon with a high level password and reset the crank angle.
If this process does not correct the problem the bug is likely interacting with a machine hardware or electrical
hardware malfunction and is not related to retained data.
104
Global Experience
...Local Solutions
General Maintenance
All fin line components require regular maintenance to ensure continued safe and efficient operation. The
proper maintenance procedures for each fin line component are listed below, in the order of regularity. A table
of maintenance procedures is also included for easy reference.
Uncoiler
Daily:
1. Check air lines lubricator fluid level and fill with ISO 10 hydraulic oil as needed.
2. Check for fluid build-up in air filter. Drain as needed.
Monthly:
1. Grease two fittings on each spindle jaw.
2. Grease one fitting at end of spindle.
3. Grease one fitting on each of two spindle support pillow blocks.
4. Grease two fittings on uncoiler clutch, when applicable.
5. Check lubricant level of mechanical uncoiler drive. Fill with ISO VG 220 Gear Lube as needed per
instructions in the Uncoiler Section.
Stock Lubrication System

Daily:
1. Check level of fluid in Wilden pump air line lubricator (progression changer side of the press) and
fill with ISO 10 hydraulic oil as needed.
2. Check level of fluid in lacer/edge trim air line lubricator (opposite progression changer side of
press) and fill with ISO 10 hydraulic oil as needed.
3. Check for fluid buildup in lacer/edge trim air filter (opposite progression changer side of press).
Drain as needed.
4. Check the lubricant level in the tank before the start of each shift. Also check the lubricant tank for
any foreign matter. Too much debris will require the lube tank to be drained and wiped clean.
5. Check the level of fluid circulation pump air line lubricator. Pump the air line lubricator and fill with
anti-wear oil as needed.
Weekly:
1. Check the level of fluid in the stock lube reservoir. Refill as needed with recommended fin forming
lubricant.
2. Check to make sure that the rollers on the back of the tank and inside the tank roll freely. If these
rollers do not rotate freely, replace.
Monthly:
1. Change stock lubrication filter bag.
Press
Daily:
1. Check for broken lubricant lines.
2. Check for hydraulic system leaks.
3. Check for broken guards or switches.
4. Check for loose electrical fittings.
5. Check for air leaks in pneumatic system.
6. Check for temperature on main press pitman bearings. Approximate running temperature should
be about 140° F, when applicable.
7. Manually cycle the Trabon press lubricant system as follows:
8. Wipe off all grease from the gib area.
9. Manually pump grease through the system using the grease fitting located on the grease
reservoir.
10. Check all grease locations to ensure that each has received fresh grease.
11. Raise the press crown to the top, then lower it to ensure oil coverage on the crown cylinders.
12. Drain fluid from the air inlet filter..
Weekly:
1. Check the level of grease in the press lubrication system. Fill if necessary with SHC 460 lithium
base grease.
2. Check the level of fluid in the press clutch air line lubricator and fill with ISO 10 hydraulic oil as
needed.
3. Check the tightness of the gib assembly as follows:
4. Start the press drive motor.
5. Run the press several times to ensure that the gib bearings are not in a skid.
6. Turn the press motor off.
7. Verify that the hydraulic pump is operating, that the crown position selector switch is in the down
position, and that the crown is resting on the adjusting nuts.
8. Apply a screwdriver to the bearing cages on the eight gib assemblies. If a bearing cage slides, the
bearing is loose. Tighten the bearings.
Monthly
1. Check the level of fluid in the die pin/tie rod lubrication reservoir through the sight glass. If the level
is low, fill the reservoir as follows:
• Turn the pull out knob counter-clockwise to reduce pressure in the canister to 0 PSI.
• Remove the fill plug and fill canister with ISO 10, hydraulic oil. Replace the fill plug.
• Turn the regulator knob clockwise to increase pressure in the canister to 10 PSI.
2. Check the level of hydraulic fluid using the sight gauge on the reservoir. Fill with ISO AW32, anti-
wear hydraulic fluid as needed.
3. Check the filter indicator. Replace filter element as needed.
NOTICE
Deflection in the idler pins will cause the chain to be tight at the minimum press shut height, and loose at
the maximum shut height. The proper amount of chain tension should allow between 1/2” to 3/4” sag in the
chain between any two adjusting nuts.
106
4. Check chain tension between the adjusting nuts. The chain tension should be loose enough to
allow smooth operation of all four adjusting nuts and idler sprockets, yet tight enough to ensure
that the chain does not jump any teeth off the sprockets.
5. If required, adjust the chain tension as follows:
• Raise the crown off of the adjusting nuts.
• Loosen lock nut on the idler pins.
• Turn the idler pin to take up slack in the chain. All four idler pins should be adjusted equally.
• Tighten the lock nut on the idler pins.
• Be sure the chain is free to move on the idler pins.
• Lower the crown onto adjusting nuts.
NOTICE
The chain will get tighter when the crown is lowered onto the
adjusting nuts. Without the crown resting on the nuts, the
clearance in the threads will allow the chain tension to shift the
nuts off center toward each other. When the crown is lowered on the nuts, the weight of the crown will
force the thread clearances to equalize and thereby take up additional slack in the chain. Keep this in
mind when adjusting the tension in the chain.
Annually:
1. Check the press for total bearing clearance.
2. Check and adjust the level of the press.
3. Check and adjust the parallelism of the ram on the press.
Tighten Gib Bearing Clearances (Laminate Gib Bearing Assemblies)

1. Loosen the socket head mounting screws.
2. Preload the gib race with the pusher screw to 75 ft.lbs of torque. (located between the mounting screws).
3. Remove the lower mounting screw to allow the shim to
be extracted. Remove the shim.
4. With the gib preloaded, use feeler gauges to determine
the correct shim thickness.
5. Peel a new shim until it is the correct thickness. Verify
this thickness with a micrometer.
6. Insert the new shim.
7. Back the pusher screw off.
8. Replace and tighten the socket head mounting screws.
9. Recheck the gib bearing for tightness.
Tighten Gib Bearing Clearances (Taper Pin Bearing Assemblies)

1. Remove taper pins and loosen socket head mounting screws.
2. Use 1”-8 threaded rod and two 1”-8 hex nuts to preload the gib bearings to 100 ft. lbs of torque on
hex nuts.
3. Tighten the socket head cap screws.
4. Ream the pin hole deeper with a tapered reamer.
5. Replace taper pins.
6. Loosen the hex nuts to remove the preload.
7. Recheck the gib bearings for tightness.
107
Check Total Bearing Clearance
The total bearing clearance is the combined clearances of the main, eccentric, and ladder race press
bearings.
1. Turn the press drive motor on. NOTICE
2. Inch the slide to the top of its stroke. The slide must be at the top of the stroke to
3. Remove the counter balance springs. relieve the counter balance spring tension.
4. Inch the press crank around to the bottom of its stroke.
5. Verify that the crown position switch is in the down position and that the crown is resting on the
adjusting nuts.
6. Turn off the drive motor.
7. Place a hydraulic jack between the bolster and slide, on the centerline of the press, at the side
closest to the flywheel shaft. Use plates between the jack and press surfaces to ensure better load
distribution and to protect press surfaces.
8. Place an indicator as close to the jack as possible. Set the indicator to .000.
9. Apply enough pressure with the jack to support the slide and eccentric shaft assembly. Record the
reading and release the jack. The indicator should return to .000.
10. Repeat Step #9 several times until the recorded indicator reading repeats several times.
This reading is the total clearance for the flywheel side of the press.
11. Repeat Steps #7-10 with the jack located on the center of the other three sides, and at each of the
four corners for the press slide. Record these readings.
12. Turn the press drive motor on.
13. Inch the slide to the top of the stroke.
14. Replace the counter balance springs, applying 1/2” preload (5/8” preload for FP-3 presses).
If the recorded clearances are within .012”, which is the acceptable tolerance, then there is no bearing
damage. If clearances are greater than the acceptable tolerance, then one or more bearings may need
to be replaced. Contact Oak Products, Inc. to receive further instruction before attempting to repair.
Check and Adjust the Level of the Press

1. Thoroughly clean the top of the bolster since this will be the reference for leveling the press.
2. Place a precision level on the center line of the bolster running side to side.
3. Adjust the mounting pads by twisting the threaded stud with a wrench as needed to bring the press
level. Repeat the level on the center line of the bolster running front to back.
4. Tighten the nuts onto the threaded studs to lock the pads in
position and hold the press in place. NOTICE
5. Run the press in continuous mode. Allow the press to run in The press can be level and still not
this mode until satisfied that press vibration is not excessive. have an equal weight distribution.
This inspection will verify that the press weight is evenly
distributed over the press feet.
108
Check and Adjust Parallelism of the Ram to the Press
1. Start the press drive motor.
2. Inch the slide to the bottom of its stroke.
3. Turn off the press drive motor.
4. Verify that the crown position switch is in the down position
and that the crown is resting on the adjusting nuts.
5. Place a hydraulic jack between the bolster and slide,
positioned at the center of the press. Use plates between
the jack and press surfaces to ensure better load
distribution and to protect press surfaces.
6. Energize the jack enough to support the weight of the slide
and eccentric shaft assembly. This is done to take up the
bearing clearances while checking parallelism.
7. Use the corner of the press with the shut height scale as a reference point. Place an indicator on
the press bolter, about 6” from the corner. Set the indicator to .000.
8. Move the indicator to the remaining three corners and take a IMPORTANT
reading. Record all four readings. DO NOT disassemble the
9. Return the indicator to the corner of the press with the shut height idler bracket assembly.
scale.
NOTE
Verify that the indicator reads .000. If it does not, repeat Steps #7-9 until it does.
10. If all readings are within .001” per foot of the bed length, the press is considered parallel and this
procedure is complete.
11. If all four reading are not within IMPORTANT
.001” per foot of bed length, then
begin the adjustment procedure The adjusting nuts should not be raised or lowered by more
by removing one idler bracket than .012”. If more than this is required to obtain parallelism,
assembly and removing the contact Oak Products, Inc. for further instructions.
adjusting nut chain off of all four
adjusting nut sprockets.
12. Raise the crown off of the adjusting nuts.
13. Turn the appropriate adjusting nuts, as indicated by the recorded indicator readings, to return
the slide to a plane parallel with the press bolster. Each tooth on the adjusting nut sprockets is
equivalent to .001” of height adjustment.
14. Lower the crown down onto the adjusting nuts, then repeat Steps #5-13 as often as needed until
the slide and bolster are parallel.
15. Replace the adjusting chain and idler bracket assembly.
109
Progression Changer/Feed System
Weekly:
1. Grease one fitting on tear drop bearing housing. NOTICE
2. Grease one fitting on each of two feed linkage arms. All progression changer lube points
require SHC 460, lithium base grease.
3. Grease one fitting on each of five flange bearings.
4. Grease three fittings on the progression changer yoke.
5. Grease two fittings on each of two feed connector links.
Air Line Filter

& Lubricator
Flange Bearing FSI Filter
Grease Fittings
Wilden Pump
Changer Yoke
Grease Fittings Grease
Fittings
Suction Unit
Daily:
1. Check air line lubricator fluid level and fill with ISO 10 hydraulic oil as needed
Weekly:
1. Grease eight flange bearings with SHC 460, lithium-base grease.
Stacker Unit
Daily:
1. Grease four fittings on the side of the rotary stacker base frame with SHC 460, lithium base
grease, when applicable.
Weekly:
1. Grease one fitting at center of rotary stacker table with SHC 460, lithium base grease, when
applicable.
2. Grease four to six fittings on the shuttle stacker wheels with SHC 460, lithium base grease, when
applicable.
110
M
W O Y
D E N E
PROCEDURE A E T A LUBRICATION TYPE
I K H R
L L L L
Y Y Y Y
UNCOILER:
-Check and fill air line lubricator X ISO 10 Hydraulic Oil
-Check and drain air filter X
-Grease spindle jaws (6) X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Grease end of spindle X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Grease spindle blocks (2) X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Grease uncoiler clutch X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Check and fill drive unit X ISO VG 220 Gear Lube
LUBE SYSTEM at rear of PRESS:

-Check and fill air line lubricators (2) X ISO 10 Hydraulic Oil
-Check and drain air filter X
-Check and fill remote stock lube reservoir X Forming Lube
-Change stock lube filter bag X
-Check and fill die pin/tie rod lube reservoir X ISO 10 Hydraulic Oil
-See Appendix C for ESL maintenance schedule
PROGRESSION CHANGER/FEED SYSTEM:

-Grease tear drop bearing X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Grease feed linkage arm bearings (2) X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Grease feed shaft support bearings (5) X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Grease yoke bearings (3) X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Grease feed connector link bearings X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
PRESS:
-Check for broken lube lines X
-Check for hydraulic system leaks X
-Check for broken guards X
-Check for loose electrical fittings X
-Check for air leaks X
-Check bearing temperature (140° F) X
-Manually cycle press lube system X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Raise and lower press crown X
-Drain fluid from air inlet filter X
-Check and fill trabon lube system X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Check and fill clutch air lubricator X
111
M
W O Y
D E N E
PROCEDURE A E T A LUBRICATION TYPE
I K H R
L L L L
Y Y Y Y
PRESS (Continued)
-Check and adjust gib tightness X
-Check Gearbox Fluid Level (FP3/FP3B only) X ISO VG 220 Gear Lube
-Check hydraulic fluid level X ISO 32,
Anti-Wear Hydraulic Oil
-Check and adjust adjusting chain tension X
-Check total bearing clearance X
-Check and adjust press level X
-Check and adjust ram parallelism X
-Change press speed from max. to min. X
SUCTION UNIT:
-Check and fill air line lubricator X ISO 10 Hydraulic Oil
-Grease suction door bearings (4) X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
STACKER:
-Four grease points on side of rotary frame X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Grease point at center of rotary table X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
-Four to six grease points on shuttle wheels X SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease
112
Global Experience
...Local Solutions
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the Fin Line (FP1, FP2, FP3)
The following guide lists the problem or condition first, then where to check to correct the problem. This is only
a quick guide. If a specific solution cannot be found, please contact Burr Oak Tool Inc., and we will try to help
resolve the problem and return your machine to full production.
Uncoiler
PROBLEM CAUSE SOLUTION
The pinch rollers do not operate. The pneumatic supply line is not Check the connection and correct
connected to the uncoiler. if necessary.
The electrical supply line is not Check the connection and correct
connected to the uncoiler. if necessary.
The motor, clutch, brake, solenoid, Identify the problem and replace or
and/or stock fault sensor is repair defective part(s).
malfunctioning.
The stock fault sensor is out of Readjust the stock fault sensor.
alignment.
The fin stock wrinkles while The fin stock coil is not centered Center the stock coil.
passing through the pinch rollers. on the spindle, relative to the die.
The compression between the Adjust the spring plungers on the
pinch rollers is uneven. pinch roller locking bar.
The fin stock unrolls from the coil The pressure between the pinch Adjust the spring plungers on the
too slowly. rollers is insufficient. pinch rollers.
The motor speed is set too low. Increase the uncoiler drive speed.
The clutch/brake pressure Adjust the pressure regulator to the
regulator is set too low. appropriate setting.
The fin stock unrolls from the coil There is a spindle brake Identify the problem and replace or
too quickly. malfunction. repair the defective brake unit.
There is a stock fault malfunction Identify the problem and replace or
or misalignment. repair the stock fault sensor.
There is excessive play in the The wear strip is damaged. Replace the wear strip.
uncoiler jaws. The wedge nut is worn. Replace the wedge nut.
The wear strip screw(s) are broken Replace the strip screw(s).
or loose.
The lock pin will not lock. The pin is in the wrong location. Check and locate the pin correctly.
The pin is bent or broken. Replace the pin assembly.
Only one side of the jaws expands. The wear strip is damaged. Replace the wear strip.
The wear strip screw is damaged. Replace the strip screw.
Fin Press
The press will not run in The fins are binding near the cutoff Adjust the stacker tooling position
Continuous Mode area, causing a stacker jam. as required to insure proper fin
stacking.
The press crown is not resting in Lower the crown onto the adjusting
the adjusting nuts. nuts. See the Operation Manual.
The hydraulic circuit breaker has Determine the cause of the
tripped. hydraulic overload and reset the
circuit breaker.
A light on the control panel Reset the hydraulic pump.
indicates LOW HYDRAULIC OIL
PRESSURE.
Insufficient supply of air to the Increase the incoming pneumatic
press. service volume.
One of the lubricant reservoirs is Verify fluid levels in the reservoirs,
not filled to the proper level. and then fill as needed.
The mode switch is in the wrong Verify that the mode switch is in
position. cont.
There is a malfunction in the press Identify the problem and repair the
clutch or the press clutch valve. malfunction.
There is a malfunction in the fin Identify the problem and repair the
line control system. malfunction.
FP-3 gear box fault light coming on The gear box is low on standard Add gear lube to the upper full
and going off repeatedly while the 90 weight gear lube. mark on the dip stick.
press is running.
Rotating gears are drawing lube Add 2-3 quarts of 90 weight gear
away from sensor. lube (minor overfill).
The press speed was increased.
The main press bearings are not There are broken grease lines. Replace all broken grease lines on
receiving sufficient grease the press.
A seal in the lubrication system Locate the leak and replace the
manifold is leaking. seal.
There is a malfunction in the line Identify the problem and repair the
control system. malfunction.
The press crown exhibits uneven, The hydraulic system contains air Bleed the hydraulic system.
spongy action when actuated. pockets. Follow the press cylinder and seal
replacement instructions.
The hydraulic circuit breaker trips The shut height is incorrect. Verify the correct shut height for
often, or the hydraulic system the installed die. Reset the shut
loses pressure when the crown is height. See the Operation Manual.
down.
Foreign material in the die is Perform a complete inspection of
causing hydraulic system pressure the die. Look for problems in the
overloads. bushings, under the stripper plates,
and check for slug accumulation.
The hydraulic circuit breaker is Identify the problem and repair the
malfunctioning. malfunction.
No pressure in hydraulic Recharge the hydraulic
accumulator. accumulator. See feed system
section for accumulator recharging
instructions.
Oil exhausts from vent port of Leaking bleed screw(s) in top of Remove plug and replace using
either of the two counterbalance crown piston(s) pipe sealing compound. Replace
air regulators. leaking piston seals.
The top stop pushbutton does Safety Unit malfunction. Check Identify the problem and repair the
not stop the press. clutch valve wiring. malfunction.
114
Suction Unit
The fins do not fit properly against Dirt and debris inside of the suction Check for and remove dirt and
the suction sheet. pan is blocking air flow through the debris from the suction fan and
suction sheet. suction sheet.
The suction doors are not sealing Check the suction unit door seals
properly. and replace if necessary.
The suction sheet is not correct for Check the end of the suction
the die. sheet for the die number. Install
the correct suction sheet for the
current die.
The suction motor velocity is Increase the AC power frequency
insufficient. to the motor.
The suction unit doors break on a The air pressure is too high. Recommended pressure is 5 PSI.
consistent basis.
The connector link between the rod Adjust the connector link so that
ends is not adjusted properly. the stroke is equalized in both the
open and closed positions.
Find do not drop off suction unit Flow control valve for suction unit Readjust valve for proper airflow.
quickly enough doors set improperly
Cylinder not working properly. Identify problem and replace or
repair cylinder.
Timing improperly set. Adjust the timing of the suction
door. See controls section.
Oil, dirt, or water in solenoid valve. Identify problem and replace or
repair solenoid.
Suction door mechanism not Identify problem and repair
functioning properly. malfunction.
115
Stacker
The fins will not drop onto the rods The stacker rods are misaligned. Realign the stacker rods. See the
properly. Operation Manual.
The stacker is out of position. Realign the stacker base. See the
Installation Manual.
The timing is incorrect. Adjust the suction unit door timing.
The stacker will not rotate. The locking pin will not retract. Identify the problem and repair the
malfunction.
The hydraulic pressure is low. Reset the hydraulic pump.
The limit switch is not making Adjust the mechanism to ensure
contact. that the switch is making contact.
The hydraulic, pneumatic, and/ Check all connections and correct
or electrical lines are not properly if necessary.
connected.
The stacker will not extend or The hydraulic pressure is low. Reset the hydraulic pump.
retract.
The limit switch is not making Adjust the mechanism to ensure
contact. that the switch is making contact.
There is a stacker fault. Check for an issue and correct.
Stacker is blocked Check stacker and surrounding
area for blockage.
The stacker drifts away from the The pull back cylinder seals are Replace the seal kit or the entire
press. (Leaves stacking position by bad. cylinder.
pulling back prematurely.)
116
Conveyor
The roller chain is jumping teeth. The roller chain my require Check the sprocket alignment and
adjusting. roller chain adjustment.
The motor is running, but the belt The torque limiter may require Check the torque limiter for proper
is not turning. adjusting; the roller chain may adjustment. Check the roller chain
be disconnected, key(s) may be adjustment. Inspect the conveyor
sheared or the conveyor belt may for parts that may be causing the
be jammed. belt to jam.
The motor full load current The conveyor belt movement may Inspect conveyor for any parts that
exceeds the name plate rating, be obstructed, causing an increase may be coming in contact with the
causing the control overload to trip. in torque. Ambient temperature is belt and causing the amount of
too high. Reducer oil level is low, torque rating of the drive. Remove
causing high heat condition. the source of heat, shield the
motor from the heat, increase
cooling capacity of the motor,
increase the insulation class of the
motor. Check the reducer oil level.
The belt is pulsating or lurching. The conveyor belt may require Inspect the belt for proper tension.
adjusting.
Parts are adhering to the belt. The coolant or oils are too thick. Reduce the consistency of
Pimples worn from the front belt coolants or change type of coolant.
surface. Parts are caught in hinge Replace belt parts as needed.
loops.
Belt axles are breaking. Belt wheels are wearing into the Belt tension is uneven: replace
belt axles causing the ends of the belt parts as required, readjust belt
axles to break. tension.
NOTE: Always replace belt

sprockets before installing a new
or rebuilt belt when this problem
occurs.
Belt aprons are cracking. Parts impact the belt surface. Reduce the impact.
Belt jamming. Obstruction inside the frame, Inspect the conveyor for
missing cotter keys from belt axles, obstruction, this may require
broken axles or belt hitting the removal of belt. Inspect the axles
frame. for missing cotter keys or broken
axles. Inspect the conveyor frame
for internal or external damage.
117
Clutch
Failure to engage. Air is not getting to the clutch due Check the control valve and the air
to a control valve malfunction or pressure setting.
low air pressure.
Defective O-ring seals are causing Replace o-ring seals.
air leaks.
Lack of lubrication on the hub Lubricate the hub spline or check
spline or in the air chamber. the air line lubricator settings.
Rigid pipe or tubing for air line Use flexible pipe or tubing for all air
connections. line connections.
Failure to disengage. Friction lock due to a lack of Lubricate the hub spline or check
lubrication on the hub spline or in the air line lubricator settings.
the air chamber.
Broken compression spring. Install new compression spring.
Unexhausted air due to a control Check or replace the control valve.
valve malfunction.
Excessive drag on the air line. Defective bearings. Replace bearings.
Air line not properly supported. Rest the air line against a support
that is parallel to the centerline of
the clutch.
Produced Fins
The produced fin stack is uneven. The feed system is deforming the Readjust the feed system. See the
fin collars. Operation Manual.
Foreign matter has accumulated Clean and stone the upper and
between die shoes and press lower mounting surfaces of the
surfaces. press and die.
The press ram surface is not Check for ram parallelism and
parallel to the bolster surface. readjust as necessary. See press
section.
Produced fins are not to A malfunction has occurred in the Reference fin die manual
specifications. fin die. troubleshooting section to
determine the problem.
Maintenance Username & Password

Maintenance: Password: 6514324
Recommended Lubricants
SHC 460, Lithium Base Grease ISO VG 220 Gear Lube
ISO 10 Hydraulic Oil ISO AW32 Hydraulic Oil
118
Global Experience
...Local Solutions Appendix B
Machine Status Message Descriptions
The machine status messages appear near the bottom of the screen on the four screens from which the
operator can run the press and cause motion on the main ram). These messages generally describe what
the operator needs to do next in order to run the press. Sometimes the messages describe errors that are
preventing the press from being operated with the requirement that the error has to be corrected before
proceeding.
A great deal of effort has gone into ordering the messages in a logical fashion so that more fundamental root
cause errors precede and preempt lesser errors. For example, if the machine is displaying “[MS035] Press
the Master Start Pushbutton: as the current message and the operator presses the console e-stop, then the
message will switch to “[MS030] The Operator’s E-Stop is Active”. This is because the Master Start will not
respond until all e-stops have been deactivated.
Even so, the system still tries to help the operator wherever possible. If under the above condition, the operator
were to try pushing the master start pushbutton even though the console e-stop was active, a pop-up screen
would appear with the following message: “[AP041] Master Start Error: Operator Console E-Stop is Active”.
The description of other pop-up messages can be found in Appendix B-3 below.
A button is associated with the machine status messages listed in the Appendix. The figure below shows a pre-
lube warning message and a yellow override error button near the bottom of the Main Screen. The message
line and the button are both either yellow or red. Yellow messages can be overridden by pressing the right
corner of the operator’s hanging console pendant. The top stop button was provided as an alternative method
in order to reduce wear and tear on the touchscreen through repeated touching. Red error messages cannot
be overridden and must be corrected before the press can be run. Some red error messages can be turned
into yellow warning messages through the use of the Line Setup & Overrides Screen.
The prelube warning can be overridden.
MESSAGE CORRECTIVE ACTION
MS001 Press is ready to Run. This is the only message that is neither yellow nor red. When it is displayed
the press is ready to be run (Continuous Run, Setup Stroke, or one of the
Inch Modes).
MS002 Operator Must be This message appears when the “Logon Required to Operate Press” option
logged on to run machine. has been set in the Authorization Configuration Screen and no valid logon
has yet been entered. Press the logon button in the lower right hand corner
of the touchscreen and enter one of the valid passwords.
MS003 Screen
Synchronization Error. Contact
BOTI. Cycle Main Power.
MS005 Fin Chart Data Error: This message occurs when there is data in the programmable fin chart after
Cutoff Must Appear on the the last programmed cutoff.
Last Line of the Fin Chart
MS006 Fin Chart Data Error: This message occurs when a cutoff has been programmed on the first stroke
First Stroke Must Not be a in the Fin Chart.
Cutoff
MS007 Fin Chart Data Error: This message occurs when cutoffs have been programmed on consecutive
Consecutive Cutoffs are not strokes in the Fin Chart. Multiple cutoffs are allowed, but not back-to-back.
permitted
MS008 Fin Chart Data Errors: This message appears when the number of holes calculated from the active
Programmed Holes Does Not Fin Chart does not match the number of Holes Per Fin entered in the input
Match Holes Required box.
MS009 Wrong Safety Unit Contact Burr Oak Tool. Check serial comm card in PLC. Check serial cable.
Program. CRC Check Does Check safety unit power.
Not Match
MS010 Fin Produced Equals This message appears when the machine has produces all the fins required
or Exceeds Fins Per Stack for a given stack according to the data entered in the Main Screen. Either
Required reset the fins produced to zero or increase the number of required Fins Per
Stack.
MS011 Coils Produced Equals This message appears when the machine has produces all the coils required
or Exceeds Coils Required according to the Coils Required input. This warning is given in order to
prevent accidental over production of a given coil run. Either reset the coils
produced counter or increase the number of coils required.
MS012 Warning: One or More This message appears when one or more of the Line Setup Overrides has
Line Setup Overrides is Active been activated in the Line Setup and Overrides Screen. These overrides are
generally set only when first setting up a machine line, changing out auxiliary
equipment, or when a temporary condition exists such as a faulty sensor and
the fault it causes is known to be erroneous.
M013 Warning; No Stock This message appears when the “NoStock” mode has been set in the Line
Mode is Active Setup and Overrides Screen. Setting this mode turns off a number of items
such as the uncoiler. It also activates a number of overrides.
MS014 No Die Mode and No This message appears when the “No Die” mode has been set in the Line
Stock Mode are Active Setup and Overrides Screen. Setting this mode also sets the No Stock mode
as well. It also activates a number of overrides in addition to those set by the
No Stock Mode.
MS015 Press Speed This message appears when the system detects no analog feedback is
Adj. Feedback Inverted/ coming from the potentiometer attached to the press motor speed adjusting
Disconnected. Fix the Cycle actuator. This problem will generally require an electrician in order to
Main Power. troubleshoot this issue further. The main power will need to be cycled in
order to clear this error.
120
MS016 Press Speed Adj. This message appears when the system detects the motor leads to the
Motor Leads Swapped. Fix press motor speed adjusting actuator are swapped. In other words, the
then Cycle Main Power. motor is going the opposite direction from what is expected. This problem
will generally require an electrician in order to troubleshoot the issue further.
It usually only occurs when the machine is initially assembled or after
replacing some other component.
MS017 Encoder Wiring or This message occurs when the system detects the encoder has a wiring
Homing Problem. Contact an problem. For example, one of the two channels A or B has a broken wire.
Electrician! Cycle Main Power.
MS018 Encoder is counting This message appears when the system detects the encoder is counting
backwards. Contact an backwards. This is generally solved by swapping A with -A or B with -B. the
Electrician! Cycle Main Power. problem will still exist if you swap both pairs.
MS019 Top Dead Center This message appears when the system detects that the Top Dead Center
Prox Not Counting Properly. Proximity switch is not counting properly. This is usually due to the sensor
Contact an Electrician! being adjusted too far or too close to the metal pickup bar that rotates with
the crank shaft. Another problem is the presence of electrical noise on the
input causing extra counts.
MS020 TDC Prox. Indicates This message will occur when the entered crank angle does not sufficiently
that the Crank Angle Should match the actual crank angle of the press. When the press sees the Top
Be Larger For Proper Homing. Dead Center Proximity switch it checks the current internal encoder value. If
the internal value is too small, 340 for example, then this message appears.
The TDC Proximity switch is first detected at around 355 degrees.
MS021 TDC Prox. Indicates This message will occur when the entered crank angle does not sufficiently
that Crank Angle Should Be match the actual crank angle of the press. When the press sees the Top
Smaller For Proper Homing. Dead Center Proximity switch it checks the current internal encoder value. If
the internal value is too large, 20 for example, then this message appears.
The TDC Proximity switch is on from about 355 to 5 degrees.
MS022 FM350-1 Saw 2nd This message occurs when the power to the high-speed encoder counter
Power Cycle. Contact an module goes through a power cycle and therefore re initiates itself. Under
Electrician! Cycle Main Power. this condition, the actual position of the crank is unknown. Check for proper
power levels going to this module. Check for loose wires to this module. This
module is in the operator’s pendant.
MS023 FM350-1 OT_ERR This message occurs when the high-speed encoder counter module has an
Contact an Electrician! Cycle internal error after trying to update the encoder crank angle value. This has
Main Power. been caused in the past by software issues and should not occur now. If this
error cannot be cleared by cycling the power or if it happens frequently, then
contact Burr Oak Tool Inc.
MS024 FM350-1 DATA_ERR This message occurs when the high-speed encoder counter module has an
Contact an Electrician! Cycle internal error after trying to update the encoder crank angle value. This has
Main Power. been caused in the past by software issues and should not occur now. If this
error cannot be cleared by cycling the power or if it happens frequently, then
Contact Burr Oak Tool Inc.
MS025 FM350-1 PAEA Bit Not This message occurs when the high-speed encoder counter module has an
Set. Contact an Electrician! internal error after trying to update the encoder crank angle value. This has
Cycle Main Power. been caused in the past by software issues and should not occur now. If this
error cannot be cleared by cycling the power or if it happens frequency, then
MS026 FM350-1 Homing This message occurs when the high-speed encoder counter module has an
Timeout. Contact an internal error after trying to update the encoder crank angle value. This has
Electrician! Cycle Main Power. been caused in the past by software issues and should not occur now. If
this error cannot be cleared by cycling the power or if it happens frequently,
121
MS027 Machine Home Req’d This message should never appear since the system remembers the
in Setup Screen (Only INCH encoder value even between power cycles so that homing is not required
Mode Allowed Until Homed) except after a software download.
MS028 I/P Access Error. This error occurs when the system tries to access an I/O point that does
Contact an Electrician! Cycle not exist on the profibus network. One of the most common ways for this to
Main Power. happen is when an option is set through the touchscreen as being installed
when in fact it is not. To fix this problem, turn off the incorrect option and
cycle the main power.
MS029 I/O Rack Error. This error occurs most commonly when the remote I/O racks are improperly
Contact an Electrician! Cycle addressed. The racks are addressed using a small screw driver. Rack 1 is
Main Power. addressed at 0 and 2 is addressed as 1, etc.
MS030 The operator’s E-Stop This message appears when the operator’s e-stop pushbutton is latched
is Active. in the depressed condition which means that the e-stop is active. Twist the
e-stop button in order to release it so that it can pop out.
MS031 The Fin Line’s Right This message appears when the e-stop pushbutton on the right side of the
Side E-Stop is Active. fin line is latched in the depressed condition which means that the e-stop is
active. Twist the e-stop button in order to release it so that it can pop out.
MS032 The Fine Line’s Left This message appears when the e-stop pushbutton near the uncoiler is
Side E-Stop is Active. latched in the depressed condition which means that the e-stop is active.
Twist the e-stop button in order to release it so that it can pop out.
MS033 The Fin Line’s Left This message appears when the e-stop pushbutton near the uncoiler is
Side E-Stop is Active. latched in the depressed condition, which means that the e-stop is active.
Twist the e-stop button in order to release it.
MS034 Uncoiler Guard is This message appears when the uncoiler guard is open.
Open.
MS035 Press the Master Start This message appears prompting the operator that the master start
Pushbutton pushbutton should be pressed in order to proceed toward getting the press
in a ready to run condition.
MS036 Drive Control in
Overload Condition. Contact
an Electrician!
MS037 Mitsubishi Main Drive
Communication Error. Cycle
Main Power.
MS038 Mitsubishi Drive Not Press reset on Mitsubishi drive in main control cabinet.
Ready or Brake Resistor is
Overheated.
MS039 Right Rear or Main
Enclosure E-Stop is Active
(I97.2 is low)
MS040 Uncoiler Guard is
Open
MS041 MCR Contacts are
Possibly Fused. Contact an
Electrician!
MS042 Press the Master Start
Push Button
MS043 Press Lacing Stick is
Active
122
MS044 Servo Feed Sign of Verify D425 is powered up and in a run condition. Reset E-Stops and cycle
Life Signal Missing power.
MS045 Die Lifters Switch is in To run the Press, move it to Off position.
Up position
MS050 The pump is in an
Overload Condition
MS051 The Press motor is in
an Overload Condition
MS052 The Vacuum Motor is
in an Overload Condition
MS053 The 2nd Vacuum
Motor is in an Overload
Condition
MS054 The Uncoiler motor is
MS055 The Conveyor Motor is
MS056 The Uncoiler Drive is
Faulted. To Clear, Reset the
Master Start
MS057 The Hydraulic Clutch
Condition
MS058 The Hydraulic Clutch
Oil Cooling Fan Motor is in an
Overload Condition
MS059 Press Motor Drive is
Faulted. To Clear, Reset the
Master Start
MS062 Replace Die Safety
Blocks into Plugs before
Running
MS063 Press the Motor Start This message appears prompting the operator that the Motor Start
Pushbuton pushbutton should be pressed in order to proceed toward getting the press
in a ready to run condition.
MS064 Press Motor Drive Not
Running. Cycle Master Start.
MS065 SPM Feedback
Voltage Too High. Set in Fin
Line Data Screen.
MS066 SPM Feedback
Voltage Too Low. Set in Fin
Line Data Screen
MS070 Left Front Die Guard
is Open
MS071 Front Progression
Changer Guard is Open
MS072 Left Rear Die Guard is
Open
123
MS073 Main Progression
MS074 Lower Progression
MS075 Right Front Die Guard
is Open
MS076 Right Side Die Guard
is Open
MS077 Right Rear Die Guard
is Open
MS078 A Rear or Front Die
Guard is Open in Setup And
Inch
MS079 Right Main Feed
Guard is Open
MS080 Right Front Feed
Guard is Open
MS081 Right Lower Feed
Guard is Open
MS082 Left Main Feed Guard
is Open
MS083 Left Front Feed Guard
is Open
MS084 Left Lower Feed
Guard is Open
MS085 Servo Feed Not
on Progression (INCH to
Override)
MS086 Servo Feed Not
Synchronized (Go to INCH
and set Feed Mode)
MS087 Must be in CONT Prior
to Switching Press Control to
LINE
MS088 Switch Press Control
to PRESS (Safety Unit
Faulted)
MS089 Stripper Bar Should
be Lowered when running
Continuous
MS090 Straightener Bar
Should be Lowered when
running Continuous
MS091 Press Cannot Run
with Switch in OFF position
MS092 Press Can only INCH This message appears when the press is in Setup, but the stroke mode is
in SETUP not in Inch. In addition to being in Inch Mode, the system restricts the type of
inching to Auto Inch. Manual Inching is not allowed in Setup since the guard
could be open and Manual Inching can produce press movement of up to
1/2 stroke at a time.
124
MS093 Changed is
EXTENDED
MS094 Changer is
RETRACTED
MS095 Servo Feed in E-Stop
Condition. Input dio_x122_1
is Off.
MS096 Must be in INCH to
Run Press from Remote Lacer
Station
MS097 Cannot Run Press
in Setup from Remote Lacer
Station
MS098 Crank Angle is Less This message appears when the current crank angle is past bottom dead
than Allowable Starting Point center, but is less than the minimum crank angle required to initiate a Setup
(Must Inch Toward Top) Stroke or begin running continuous (280 degrees). Switch to Inch Mode and
inch the press toward the top of the stroke before proceeding.
MS099 Crank Angle is Past This message appears when the current crank angle is before bottom dead
Allowable Starting Point (Inch center, but is past the largest allowable crank angle (30 degrees) to initiate
Back Around To Top) a Setup Stroke or begin running Continuous. Switch to Inch Mode and inch
the press through bottom and then back toward the top of the stroke before
proceeding.
MS100 Crank Angle is Past This message appears when the current crank angle is before bottom dead
Allowable Setup Stroke or center, but is past the point needed to fire some critical timing item. When
continuous Run Starting Point this happens, it is almost always near the cutoff stroke. Switch to Inch Mode
and inch the press through bottom and then back toward the top of the
stroke before proceeding. This allows the critical timing item to happen in
Inch Mode, which is always set for a much later point.
MS101 Blowoff Switch Not in
Auto
MS102 Cutoff Switch Not in
Auto
MS103 Lacer Must be OFF to This message appears when the Lacer is ON and the stroke mode is set to
Run Continuous Continuous Run.
MS104 Lacer Must be OFF in This message appears when the lacer is ON, but the pull-pin is not in its
Order to Run when Pull-Pin is holder. The pull-pin must be in the holder in order to be assured that it is not
Installed (Not in Holder) still installed in the feed arm. If it were in the feed arm, then the lacer with
its clamps holding the stock would fight the feed arm as it tried to feed stock
during press motion.
MS105 Pull-Pin Should be This message appears when the lacer is OFF, but the pull-pin is still in its
Installed in Feed Arm When holder. It is only a warning because there are valid reasons to run without
Running Press feeding stock, but generally the pull-pin should be installed in the feed arm.
MS106 Switch Crown to Hold This message appears after the main power on the machine has been
Position Then Down or Up as cycled and the state of the crown is unknown.
Desired
MS107 Crown Must be Down
to Run Setup Stroke or
Continuous
125
MS108 Safety Unit Faulted, This message appears when the safety unit experiences a fault. The most
Switch to INCH Mode to Reset common way for this to happen is if the operator does not hold the run
the Fault button in long enough during the Setup Stroke. Because of the hard wired
circuitry, the system must be in Inch Mode in order for the software to reset
the safety unit’s fault condition. If the fault was caused by not holding the
inch buttons in long enough, then you will probably have to inch back around
to the top of the stroke.
MS109 Switch Operator This happens when the safety unit detects a fault condition that cannot be
Station control to Pendant reset by the software. These more serious fault conditions can only be reset
(Safety United Faulted) using the switch that is on the safety unit. The safety unit is located in the
operator pendant behind the touchscreen To reset the error, turn the key
(aqua-green) to the stop position then back to the run position.
MS110 Safety Unit Faulted,
Switch to INCH Mode to
Reset the Fault
MS111 Major Safety Unit
Fault, Contact Electrician,
Reset with Internal Key
MS112 Press Control is Set to
LINE. Waiting for Remote Run
Signal
MS113 A Front or Rear Die
Guard is Slightly Open.
MS114 A Side Die Guard is
Slightly Open.
MS115 Remote Top Stop is
Active.
MS116 Low Flow for Cooling
Oil to Auxiliary Brake
MS117 Low Flow for Cooling
Oil to Clutch/Brake
MS118 Clutch/Brake Pressure
is Low
MS119 Cooling Oil for Clutch/
Brake System Exceeds high
Temperature Limit
MS120 Crown Hydraulic This message frequently occurs after a main power cycle. The crown is
Pressure Not Seen With down, but not being powered by the valve since it got turned off during the
Crown Down power cycle and will not turn on without being initiated by the operator. To fix
the problem, simply switch to hold and then back to the down position.
MS121 Air Pressure is Not
Present
MS122 Clutch Valve Pressure
is Not Present
MS123 Sensor Indicates
Blowoff Air Pressure When
OFF (Adjust Sensitivity)
MS124 Feed Overload
Pressure is Above High Limit
126
MS125 Feed Overload
Tripped (Low Pressure). Press
Motors Start PB to Reset.
MS126 Inconsistent Homing: The two encoders connected to the press crank shaft no longer agree on the
Check Crank Angle, Forward crank shaft position. Reset crank angle. If this reoccurs, verify tension on
Feed & Amp; External belts.
Encoder
MS127 Feed Parameters not (Create Die Data Recipe)
Set.
MS130 Stock Fault is Present
(Can be Overridden in INCH
Mode)
MS131 Die Jam is Present
Mode)
MS132 Stacker jam is Present
Mode)
MS133 Load Monitor Trend
Fault (Can be Overridden in
INCH Mode)
MS134 Load Monitor Capacity
Fault (Can be Overridden in
INCH Mode)
MS135 Servo Feed System
Must Be Homed (Die Setup
Screen)
Not In Auto Mode (Die Setup
Screen)
Forward Feed Sensor Not
Seen
MS138 Servo Feed System -
Feed Distance is Set to Zero
MS139 Electro Static Lube
System Fault (See Remote
Display)
MS140 Lube Level in Stock
Lube Tray is Low
MS141 Lube Level in Stock
Lube Tray is High
MS142 Lube Level in Pierce
Lube Tank is Low
MS143 Die Lube Flow
Detected After 3 Min. of
Being Idle (Decrease Sensor
Sensitivity)
MS144 Die Pin Lube Level is
Low
127
MS145 Gear Box Lube Level
is Low
MS146 Hydraulic Filter #1 is
Clogged.
MS147 Hydraulic Filter #2 is
Clogged.
MS148 Lube Level in
Enhance Lube Tank is Low
MS149 Grease Cycle Failed:
A Successful Maintenance
Grease Cycle Clears this
Warning
MS150 Gear Box 2 Lube 150
Level is Low
MS151 Electrical Enclosure
Air Conditioner is in an
Overload Condition
MS152 Stock Loop Blower
Condition
MS156 Iron Flange Lube Flow
Detected after 3min. of Being
Idle (Decrease Sensitivity)
MS160 Adjusting Die. Please
Wait or Abort the Process from
Die Setup Screen
MS161 Sequenced Die Adjust
Active. Only Inch or Single
Stock Allowed
MS162 Current Does Not
Match New. Go to Die Setup
and Make Adjustment
MS163 Die Adjustments are
NOT Locked and Press is in
Continuous Run Mode
MS164 Slit Station is
Unclamped
MS170 Shuttle Air Pressure is
OFF. Press Manual Shuttle to
Move to Position
MS171 Shuttle In-Position
Input Not Seen.
MS172 Press Motor Not Yet
at Operational Speed. Please
Wait...
MS173 Fin Counting Has
been Turned OFF in the
Production Data Screen
128
MS174 Tap Down Fault: Go to
Fin Line Data & Options/
Suction Unit to Clear Fault
& Home
MS194 Auto Inch Target
Reached. Update Inch to
Target Value.
MS195 System Believes a
Popup Screen is Active. This
Message Should Not Appear.
MS196 Some Process is
Busy and Must Finish Before
Allowing Press Motion
MS197 Must Release Prior
Action / Cont. Run Button
(Green)
MS198 Prelube (If Overridden, This message appears to warn the operator that the time has elapsed
Press Green Cont. Run Button since the pressure was last run in Continuous or since the last prelube and
Twice for Prelube) therefore the stock might be dry. Prelube happens automatically before
running Continuous, but not for Setup Stroke or Inching. Also, if you wish
to force an extra prelube before the normal timeout, simply press the green
cont. run button twice with a few seconds of each press and the system will
prelube the die.
MS199 Prelube (If Overridden,
Press Green Cont. Run Button
Twice for Prelube)
MS210 ESL Lid Not Closed The lid proximity switch is not seeing Close the lid, adjust target location,
its target. or repair faulty prox or wiring.
MS211 ESL Lube Tank Level Oil reservoir does not have enough Add oil to the system.
is Low oil in it.
MS212 ESL Lube Tank Level Oil reservoir has been over filled Drain excess oil from reservoir.
is High
MS213 ESL No Stock or Stock Stock width system does not have Install fin stock.
Not Seen by Sensor Array stock between its sensors.
MS214 ESL Left Width Data
Inconsistent
MS215 ESL Right Width Data
Inconsistent
MS216 ESL Stock Not
Centered
MS217 ESL Data Error: Less Stock width system is not seeing the Install stock, increase stock
than 4 Valve Pairs Active minimum required stock width. width, verify stock width system is
functioning.
MS218 ESL Data Error: Valve Stock width system is outputting Verify stock width system is
Pairs Active Exceed Allowable incorrect signal. configured properly. Contact BOTI to
verify system options.
MS219 ESL Data Error: Stock SPM setting is below minimum Increase SPM number, Setup ->
Speed Below Minimum allowable value. Settings.
MS220 ESL Data Error: Stock SPM setting is above maximum Decrease SPM number, Setup->
Speed Above Maximum allowable value. Settings.
129
MS221 ESL Data Error: Setting is below minimum allowable Increase deposition rate, Setup ->
Deposition Rate Below value. Settings.
Minimum
MS222 ESL Data Error: Setting is above maximum allowable Decrease deposition rate, Setup ->
Deposition Rate Above value. Settings.
Maximum
MS223 ESL Data Error: Pump Setting is below allowable value. Increase Deposition rate, SPM, Feed
Speed Below Minimum Distance, Setup -> Settings
MS224 ESL Data Error: Pump Setting is above maximum allowable Decrease Deposition rate, SPM,
Speed Above Maximum value. Feed Distance, Setup -> Settings
MS225 ESL Calculated Oil Setting is below allowable value. Increase Deposition rate, SPM, Feed
Pressure Too Low Distance, Setup -> Settings
MS226 ESL Calculated Oil Setting is above maximum allowable Decrease Deposition rate, SPM,
Pressure Too High value. Feed Distance, Setup -> Settings
MS236 Feed Encoder Saw Encoder is moving without ESL Verify run signal from press is
Motion Without Press Running running. reaching the ESL.
Signal If lacing, spray lubricant on dry
material entering the die.
MS237 Lube Filter is Clogged Clogged filter vacuum switch has Clean/replace oil filter. Fix collapsed,
- Change or Clean Filter seen a high vacuum between the pinched, or broken lines.
Element tank and pump.
MS238 ESL Master Power
Not ON
MS239 Nozzle Test Error A nozzle pair in use has failed the Clean failed nozzle pair and establish
nozzle test. a new nozzle test with valve working
properly.
MS240 Master Nozzle Data The PLC logic does not have any Run master nozzle test to establish
Missing retentive memory saved. the baseline to compare nozzle tests
to in the future.
MS241 Nozzle Test in Nozzle test is in progress. Wait for nozzle test to finish. It should
progress (Diagnostic) take 10-15 minutes.
MS242 Stock Width Array The stock width array is not seeing Verify stock width array is configured
Malfunction the width or material correctly. properly. Contact BOTI to verify
system options.
MS243 ESL Program Mode
MS300 Safety System
Initialization. Please Wait.
MS301 Guard Safety Relay
Faulted. Cycle Master Start or
contact Electrician.
130
Run Status Message Descriptions
CODE MESSAGE
RS000 Busy-Please Wait
RS001 Stock fault was detected
RS002 Die was jammed
RS003 Stacker was jammed
RS004 Low die lube flow was detected
RS005 Top stop button was pushed
RS006 Stack was completed
RS007 Finish fin button was pushed
RS008 Low stock lube level was detected
RS009 High stock lube level was detected.
RS010 Low hydraulic pressure was detected
RS011 Low air pressure was detected
RS012 Sensor indicates primary blowoff valve failure
RS013 Sensor indicates auxiliary blowoff valve failure
RS014 End of stock was reached
RS015 Stacker ready input was lost
RS016 Reclaim tank may be overfilling
RS017 Motor Stop Pushbutton Pressed
RS018 Master Stop Pushbutton Pressed
RS019 Open guard was detected
RS020 E-Stop was activated
RS021 Steady state speed not reached
RS022 Press speed exceeded maximum machine limit
RS023 Press speed exceeded timing chart adjustable limit
RS024 Press speed was below machine limit
RS025 Press speed below timing chart adjustable limit
RS026 Pierce Blowoff Sensor Not Detecting Pressure (Cont. Run)
RS027 IO Access Error
RS028 IO Rack Error
RS029 No Press Motion Seen - Reason Unknown
RS030 Run Buttons not held in long enough
RS031 Stopped Continuous Run for unknown reason
RS032 Main Power Restored. Power up Complete. Verify Crank Angle!
RS033 Pierce Lube Tank Level Low
RS034 Press was Setup Stroked
RS035 Press was Inched
RS036 Enhance Lube Tank Level Low
RS040 Saw TDC Proxy Too Late
RS041 Saw TDC Proxy Too Early
RS042 Did Not Reach Steady Stat Speed
RS043 Servo Feed Not Retracted in Time
RS044 Servo Feed not Forward in Time
131
RS045 Remote Top Stop Button was Activated
RS046 Servo Feed Controller Faulted
RS047 Servo Feed Controller Error. Cycle Master Start.
RS050 Hydraulic Clutch motor Overload
RS051 Hydraulic Cooling Fan Motor Overload
RS052 Low Cooling Oil Flow to Aux. Brake
RS053 Low Cooling Oil Flow to Clutch/Brake
RS054 Low Hydraulic Clutch/Brake Pressure
RS055 High Temperature on Clutch/Brake Cooling Oil
RS056 Coils Produced Equaled or Exceeded Coil Required
RS060 Operator Pressed Remote Top Stop/Finish Fin Button
RS061 Load Monitor Trend Fault Detected
RS062 Load Monitor Capacity Fault Detected
RS063 Remote Line Requested a Top Stop/Finish Fin Button
RS064 Upper Die Pin Pressure Not Reached
RS065 Top Stop Failed. Contact Electrical Maintenance!
RS066 Finish Fin Failed. Contact Electrical Maintenance!
RS067 Timing Engine Failed. Contact Burr Oak Tool Inc!
RS068 Feed Overload Condition Detected by High Pressure Sensor.
RS069 Machine was switched out of Continuous Run Mode
RS070 Low Iron Flange Lube Flow Detected
RS071 Electrostatic Lube System Faulted
RS072 Tap Down Servo Motor Faulted
RS073 Left Front Die Guard Opened
RS074 Front Progression Changer Die Guard Opened
RS075 Left Rear Die Guard Opened
RS076 Left Side Die Guard Opened
RS077 Lower Progression Changer Die Guard Opened
RS078 Right Front Die Guard Opened
RS079 Right Side Die Guard Opened
RS080 Right Rear Die Guard Opened
RS081 Operator E-Stop Pressed
RS082 Right Side E-Stop Pressed
RS083 Left Side E-Stop Pressed
RS084 Uncoiler E-Stop Pressed
RS085 Remote E-Stop Pressed
RS086 Misc. E-Stop Pressed
RS087 Stacker E-Stop Pressed
RS088 Run Inch Button Stuck
RS200 ESL: Lube System Did Not Start
RS201 ESL: Air Pressure Too Low
RS202 ESL: Air Pressure Too High
RS203 ESL: Lube Pressure Too Low
RS204 ESL: Lube Pressure Too High
132
RS205 ESL: HV Supply Malfunction
RS206 ESL: HV Supply Current Too High
RS207 ESL: HV Supply Voltage Too Low
RS208 ESL: Lube Over Pressure Fault
RS209 ESL: Lid was Opened
RS210 ESL: Excess Lube Flow Measured
RS211 ESL: Low Lube Flow Measured
RS212 ESL: Process Data Error Due to Change While Running
RS215 ESL: Lube Pressure Die Not Reach Steady State Condition
RS216 ESL: No Stock Motion
RS217 ESL: Measured SPM Does Not Match Entered
RS218 ESL: Measured Feed Distanced Does Not Match Entered
RS219 ESL: Lube Filter Clogged
RS220 Nozzle Pair 1 or 13 Malfunctioned
RS221-244 Nozzle Pair # Malfunctioned
133
Acknowledge Message Screen Descriptions
CODE MESSAGE
AP001 Vacuum System has been Removed
AP002 Vacuum System has been Restored
AP003 Grease Failure. Grease switch input did not transition correctly
AP004 Access Denied. Logon at higher level required
AP005 Aborted: Press Speed In Unknown State
AP006 Uncoiler System has been Removed
AP007 Uncoiler System has been Restored
AP008 Low Grease Reservoir
AP009 Master Start must be energized to Raise or Lower Crown
AP010 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Main Changer Guard Open
AP011 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Front Changer Guard Open
AP012 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Lower Changer guard Open
AP013 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Right Main Die Guard Open
AP014 Crown Switch is Up. However, pull-pins, are not installed
AP015 Must have Die Blocks in Holders to Lower Crown
AP016 Crown pressure Override is Active. Do NOT Run Press Until the Crown
is Completely Down to AVOID DIE DAMAGE
AP019 Master Start Must be Active in Order to Lace
AP020 Fin Line Main Crank Must Be Homed in Order to Lace
AP021 Main Crank Must Be in Top Half of Stroke in Order to Lace
AP022 Lacer Switch Must be in ON Position in Order to Lace
AP023 Lacer Cycle Aborted: Master Control Power Lost
AP024 Lacer Cycle Aborted: Lace Switch was Turned to the OFF Position
AP025 Changer Switch Inactive Because a Changer Guard is Open
AP026 Changer Switch Inactive Because a Changer Guard is Open
AP030 Master Start Must be ON for this Lube Operation
AP031 Already Busy with another Lube Operation
AP032 Motors Must be ON to Perform sheave Maintenance
AP037 Master Start Error: A Miscellaneous E-Stop is Active (I97.2)
AP038 Master Start Error: Remote Lacer or Remote Run E-Stop is Active
AP039 Master Start Error: MCR Contact Fused Shut?
AP040 Master Start Error: Logon Required
AP041 Master Start Error: Operator Console E-Stop is Active
AP042 Master Start Error: Left Side E-Stop is Active
AP043 Master Start Error: Right Side E-Stop is Active
AP044 Master Start Error: Uncoiler Side E-Stop is Active
AP045 Master Start Error: Pump Motor is in an Overload Condition
AP046 Master Stopped: Idle/Power Save Mode Activated
AP048 Master Start Error: Master Control Relay Failed to Pull In
AP049 Master Start Error: Pump Motor Contactor Failed to Pull In
AP050 Stacker Error: Master Control Must be ON
AP051 Stacker Error: Stacker Jam
134
AP052 Stacker Error: Operator Released Manual Stacker Button
AP053 Stacker Error: Operator pressed Stacker Stop Button
AP054 Stacker Error: Timeout waiting for pull Back
AP055 Stacker Error: Timeout During Final Rotation
AP056 Stacker Error: Timeout During Final Rotation
AP057 Stacker Error: Table Extend Input Did Not Go Low As Expected
AP058 Stacker Error: Timeout Operator Did Not Release Manual Shuttle PB
AP059 Stacker Error: Motors Must Be ON to Move Stacker
AP060 Motors Start Error: Master Start Must be Active First
AP061 Motors Start Error: Motors Already ON
AP062 Motors Start Error: Die Safety Purge Not in Their Holders
AP063 Motors Start Error: Conveyor Motors is in an Overload Condition
AP064 Motors Start Error: Press Motor is in an Overload Condition
AP065 Motors Start Error: Vacuum Motor in an Overload Condition
AP066 Motors Start Error: Uncoiler Motor is in an Overload Condition
AP067 Motors Start Error: Uncoiler drive is in a Fault Condition
AP068 Motors Start Error: Vacuum Drive is in a Fault Condition
AP069 Motors Start Error: Hydraulic Clutch Oil Level Low
AP070 Motors Start Error: Press Motor Contractor Failed to Pull In
AP071 Motors Start Error: Hydraulic Clutch Motor in Overload Condition
AP072 Motors Start Error: Main Press Motor Drive is Faulted
AP073 Main VFD Drive Not Ready. Please Wait 6 Seconds After Master Start.
AP074 Motors Start Error: Vacuum Drive 2 is in a Fault Condition
AP075 Motors Start Error: Vacuum Motor 2 is in an Overload Condition
AP081 Slit Adjust Error: Rows Per Slit value is not valid
AP082 Slit Adjust Error: Press must be inched toward top
AP083 Slit Adjust Error: Master power Must be ON to Adjust Slit
AP084 Slit Adjust Error: Air Pressure Must be Present to Adjust Slit
AP085 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Left Front Die Guard Open.
AP086 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Left Rear Die Guard Open.
AP087 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Right Front Die Guard Open.
AP088 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Right Rear Die Guard Open.
AP089 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Right Main Feed Guard Open.
AP090 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Right Front Feed Guard Open.
AP091 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Right Lower Feed Guard Open.
AP092 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Left Main Feed Guard Open.
AP093 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Left Front Feed Guard Open.
AP094 Cannot Raise or Lower Crown with Left Lower Feed Guard Open.
AP100 Motors Must Be On To Adjust The Die.
AP101 Crank Must Be Off Bottom To Adjust
AP102 Motors Shutdown. Die Adjust Operation Aborted.
AP103 Lost Master Start. Die Adjust Operation Aborted.
AP104 Changer Must be Retracted for Sequenced Die Adjust
AP105 Change AUTO Not Allowed for Seq. Adjust (RET Suggested)
135
AP106 Master Start Error: Starker E-Stop is Active.
AP107 Stacker Error:Timeout During Transfer
AP108 Master Start Error: Right Rear E-Stop is Active
AP109 Auto Die Adjust Data not Set in Die Data & Options Screen
AP110 Slit Rows Need To Be Set
AP111 Slit Clamp must be on for Slit engagement
AP120 Motors Must Be On To Synchronize Feed
AP121 Lacer Must Be Off To Synchronize Feed
AP122 Cannot Synchronize Feed with No Stock Mode Set
AP123 Run Inch Button Stuck
AP150 Stacker Error: Timeout Lowering Elevator
AP151 Stacker Error: Elevator Not at Bottom or cart not ready
AP152 Stacker Error: Edge guard Engaged Remove Obstruction and Start
Again
AP153 Motor Must be on to Adjust Edge Trim
AP160 Unknown Screen Number Requested
AP198 ESL: Master Not On Press Master power is turned off Press Master Start.
AP199 ESL: Must Test More than The operator has selected to test The operator must go to the
4 Pairs less than 4 valves. Settings Screen and set the
valve pairs used to a number 4 or
greater.
AP200 ESL: Program Key The screen or information requires Contact maintenance or
Disabled authentication to be changed management to install key if
change is necessary
AP201 ESL: Check Entered Feed The Stock Encoder is operating Verify the SPM and feed distance
Distance outside acceptable operating limits are correct. Verify the encoder is
working properly. Verify that the
encoder is not slipping or jammed.
Verify stock is present. Take
into consideration feed distance
will change if you are using the
progression changer.
AP219 ESL: Timed Out The oil system is not able to build Plumbing is disconnected.
Pressurizing the System oil pressure. Verify that the oil filters are not
broken.
Verify that the oil pump is turned
on, has power and is working.
AP221 ESL: Failed to Hold The oil system is not able to Check to see if the system has
Pressure During Leak Test maintain a pressure with all valves leaky oil lines.
closed. Verify that the Ultra-fine Oil Filter is
not broken.
Verify that the check valve is
installed and working properly.
AP223 ESL: Nozzle Test Average The nozzle test pressure drop time
Too High on average takes too long.
AP224 ESL: Nozzle Test Average The nozzle test pressure drop time
Too Low on average does not take long
enough.
136
AP230 ESL:Pair Upper 1 or 13
Plugged
AP231 - AP256 ESL: Pair ““ Plugged Master nozzle test failed due to Clean blockage in nozzles.
an over pressure, the nozzle has
too much restriction or nozzle test Verify Nozzle Test Voltage.
voltage is incorrect for oil viscosity.
AP261 - AP286 ESL: Pair ““ Leaking Master nozzle test failed due to a Fix Oil Leak.
drop in oil pressure, the nozzle has
too little restriction or nozzle test Verify Nozzle Test Voltage.
voltage is incorrect for oil viscosity
AP288 - ESL: Diagnostic Nozzle
Test Failed ESL Timer will not be
Reset
AP289 - ESL: Diagnostic Nozzle
Test Passed
AP290 ESL: Diagnostic Nozzle Contact BOTI
Test Count is Outside Allowable
Range
AP301 - ESL: Test Average Times
Not Consistent
AP302 - Diagnostic Nozzle test
PSI too high
AP303 - Master Nozzle test PSI
too high
AP305 - ESL: System ESL oil system has exceeded 15 Ensure pressure ha been released.
Overpressure psi. Keep track of what causes the
error and contact BOTI.
137
Confirmation Screen Message Descriptions
MESSAGE RESPONSE
CP003 Warning: No stroke Yes: Go ahead and feed advance without stroking between feeds.
Since Previous Advance
No: Don’t feed advance. I need to stroke the press before feeding again.
CP004 Stripper Bar Should Be Yes: Lower the Stripper Bar.
Lowered to Run Continuous
No: Leave the Stripper Bar Up

CP005 Straightener Bar Yes: Lower the Straightener Bar.
Should Be Lowered to Run
Continuous
No: Leave the Straightener Bar Up.
CP006 Accept Input Values as Yes: Update Current Crank Position with Entered Value.
New Crank Angle Position?
No: Reset Entered Value to Match Current Crank Angle.

CP007: Begin Sequence Die
Adjustment?
CP008: Begin All-At-Once Die
Adjust?
CP009: Reset Coils Produced?
CP010: Reset Data To Default
Values?
CP011: Automatically Set the
Edge Trim?
CP012: Automatically Set the
Slit Spacing (Rows Per Fin)?
CP013: Automatically Set
the Die Using the Sequential
Adjust?
CP014: Do Draw Settings
Match Selected Model
Number?
CP015: Diagnostic ESL Nozzle
Test is Due, Run a Nozzle
Test?
CP020: Abort the Nozzle Test?
CP021: Reset ESL default
Values?
CP022: Save test data as
Master?
CP999: Software error Contact BOTI!
138
Global Experience
...Local Solutions
Fin Press Line

FP-2B-48-2331
Parts Manual
Global Experience
...Local Solutions
Who We Are
For 70 years Burr Oak Tool has delivered machines, tools and expertise to the world’s heating,
refrigeration, air conditioning, tube processing industries. Our focus is to provide effective solutions to
customers worldwide by delivering quality machines, service and parts.
Why We Deliver
Oak machines are designed and manufactured for quality, durability and productivity. We will work
with you to find cost effective and timely solutions to the challenges you face. Meeting your production
requirements means greater success and profitability for you.
What We Deliver
Burr Oak Tool produces quality fin dies, fin lines, tube expanders, tube cutoffs, tube benders, and coil
forms for companies in over 70 countries. We guarantee our machines are finished, tested, and most
importantly, will work properly upon installation in your facility.
How We Deliver
Burr Oak Tool’s experienced and dedicated workforce innovates to meet and anticipate our
customers’ needs. Our service technicians are experienced in setup, troubleshooting, and upgrading
Oak equipment. Service locations in the USA, Europe, India, and China allow us to quickly respond to
needs worldwide.
Global Experience
...Local Solutions
WARRANTY:
Burr OAK Tool warrants to the original purchaser that equipment of its own manufacture is
free of defective materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months. The obligation of the
company is limited to the replacement or repair of defective parts. Inbound and outbound freight are
included under our terms of warranty. Component parts or accessories made by other manufacturers
are warranted only to the extent of the original manufacturer’s warranty to our company.
Burr OAK Tool reserves the right to deny warranty claims for consequential damages caused
by the use of non-Burr OAK Tool replacement components or accessories.
NOTE, Die Customers Only:

If the die installed in the press exceeds the tonnage ratings of the press, this
warranty will be void.
Except as to title, there are no further warranties, expressed or implied, and the company shall
have no obligation or liabilities with respect thereto to any person or firm other than as specifically
stated herein.
The above warranty of the company does not cover damages or failures due to improper use
of the equipment, or in operating the equipment beyond its rated capacity. Also the warranty does not
apply to equipment which has been altered by those other than authorized
1
FP2B48-2331LINE Fin Line, FP-2B-48-2331
Qty
Detail Description Item #
Req'd
2331 Fin Press, FP-2B-48-2331 1 FP-2B-48-2331
Feed Sys, Std 2:1 QC, FP2-48 1 217478
Vibration Isolator, Vibro Dynamics, 10L900-1.125MJ8, FP2, No 4 314623
5513 Die Block, Safety Kit, FP2B&3B 1 317702
1000 Die Support Bracket, Assy, FP2-48, Bar Type 1 217794
3 Assy Bolster Assy, FP2B48-2331 1 470925
3000 Fin Stock Uncoiler, 4/46/60, LH, 2HP SEW Drive 1 SRU-M-N-342-L
4500 Lube Tank Assy, 40 RHS w/DTO, E-Lube 1 FSLM-2056
E-Lube Assy, 45" Width, RH-Swing, 120V, for FP2B48-2331 1 EL-070
2900 Assy Suction Unit Kit, 3 Hp Var, w/Straight Arms, Size 40, 36", B 1 FSUM-2711-S
Guard Package for FP2B48-2331 1 470990
Rear Stock Containment Assembly E-Lube FP2B48 1 470423
Electrical Parts for FP2B-48-2331 1 468640E
Fluid Power parts for FP2B-48-2331 1 468640F
Hydraulic Power Unit Assembly, MFP, MFPU19694, Dual Pump, Hy 1 472281
2
217478 Feed Sys, Std 2:1 QC, FP2-48 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
1536 Frame, Feed, 8x11.500x33, FP2 1 82874
1535 Mounting Bracket, Side Plate, FP2 1 82875
5251 A Feed Adjustment, Quick Change, Connector Rod Assy 1 119043

5005 Connecting Clevis, Progression Changer 1 104368
Socket Set Screw, 5/16"-18 X 1/2", Cup Point 2 300801
5252 L Stud, 1"-14 LH Threads, 4-1/2" Lg 1 357083
Top Plate, Quick Change Assembly 1 399530
5251 SP Pin, Short, Quick Change 4 119042
5251 TP Top Plate, Quick Change 1 119036
Middle Plate, Quick Change Assembly 1 399532
5251 LP Pin, Long, Quick Change 4 119041
5251 MP Middle Plate, Quick Change 1 119037
Bottom Plate, Quick Change Assembly 1 399533
5251 SP Pin, Short, Quick Change 4 119042
5251 BP Bottom Plate, Quick Change 1 119038
5251 AR Arc Adjusting Ring, Quick Change 1 119039
5251 AS Arc Adjusting Stud, Quick Change, 10-9/16"LG 1 119040
5018 Nut, 1"-14, Modified - Ground 2 124446
5018 Nut, 1"-14, Finished Hex 1 314430
Slotted Spring Pin, 1/8" X 3/4" 1 306117
Slotted Spring Pin, 1/4" X 1-3/4" 3 301483
5006 Pin, Connecting Clevis 3/4 X 2 1/2 1 123317
Dowel Pin, 3/4" X 2-1/2", Black Lustre 1 301132
5217 S Key, 1/2" X 1/2" X 1- 1/4" 1 116076
O-Ring, 568-213 1 328478
Cylinder Assembly, 12-1/2" Stroke 1 383673
Shaft Collar, 2-3/4" Dia., 1 Piece Clamp Style, Modified 1 399673
5251 CC Shaft Collar, 2-3/4" Dia., 1 Piece Clamp Style 1 306105
5209 Feed Shaft, FP2-48 1 120279
5030 Linkage Arm Assy, Includes #5031 Bearing 2 216782

5030 Linkage Arm (do not sell - use 216782) 2 99990
5031 Bearing, Cup Needle Roller, Torrington, B1616OH 2 313009
Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8"-16 X 2" 2 300394
Grease Fitting, 1/4"-28, Straight, 37/64" OAL 2 340640
5100 Prog Chgr Assy, 2:1, QC, FP2 1 218564

5015 B Bumper, Prog Chgr, (FL) 2 104369
5015 A Bumper Retainer Plate 2 104370
5012 Stop Shaft Block 1 104371
5013 W Washer, Ground SAE 3/4" 2 104395
Washer, American SAE, 3/4" 1 301422
5018 W Washer, Ground SAE 1", P/M 2 104396
Washer, American SAE, 1" 1 301424
5001 R Changer Mtg Block, Reversed 1 117400
5032 Shaft, Short 13-1/2" FP1, 2, 4 1 218022
5001 A Retainer Inserts, Changer Mtg Blk 2 124445
5018 Nut, 1"-14, Finished Hex 1 314430
5013 Nut, 3/4"-16, P/M 2 124448
Nut, 3/4"-16, Heavy Hex 1 304887
5009 Progression Changer Shaft Slide, 1" Dia 2 125237
5007 Yoke Assy, w/Bearings, 5008A & 5008B 1 216786
3
Qty
Req'd
Yoke, for bearings, 5008A & 5008B
5007 1 104367
(See Note)
5008 A Bearing, Needle Roller, McGill MR 12 1 312981
Grease Fitting, 1/4"-28, Straight, 11/16" OAL, 5/16 Hex Size 3 318086
5008 B Bronze Bushing, 1"I.D. X 1-1/4"O.D. X 1-3/4" Long, CB1620-14 2 302393
6 -HW Washer, Heavy, 3/8" 4 229879
Socket Head Cap Screw, 1/4"-20 X 3/4" 12 300283
Socket Head Cap Screw, 3/8"-16 X 3-1/4" 4 300399
Fitting, P-H, 6-8 FTX-S TL Male Str NPT 2 309625
Cyl, H-L, 1-1/2" Bore X 3" Stroke, 1" Rd, LR5F 1 310235
Socket Set Screw, 3/4"-16 X 3/8", P/M, Machined Flat 1 384312
5210 LA Feed Linkage Arm Assy w/Bearing, LH, FP2,3,4 1 220026

5210 Feed Linkage Arm, FP2,3,4 1 99988
526 A/5210A Insert, Feed Linkage Arm 1 99991
5023 Stud, Bearing 1 117414
5024 Retainer, Bearing 1 117412
5022 Cover, Bearing 1 117413
5026 Bearing, Needle Roller, McGill MR 20 N 1 312984
5027 Bearing, Inner Race, McGill MI 16 N 1 312982
6 -HW Washer, Heavy, 3/8" 2 229879
Flat Head Cap Screw, 3/8"-16 X 1" 1 300617
5210 RA Feed Linkage Arm Assy w/Bearing, RH, FP2,3,4 1 220027

5210 Feed Linkage Arm, FP2,3,4 1 99988
526 A/5210A Insert, Feed Linkage Arm 1 99991
5023 Stud, Bearing 1 117414
5024 Retainer, Bearing 1 117412
5022 Cover, Bearing 1 117413
5026 Bearing, Needle Roller, McGill MR 20 N 1 312984
5027 Bearing, Inner Race, McGill MI 16 N 1 312982
Flat Head Cap Screw, 3/8"-16 X 3/4" 1 300616
6 -HW Washer, Heavy, 3/8" 2 229879
Feed Linkage Rod Assy, FP2, Std 1 220031

1513 R Clevis, Linkage Rod RH Assy, 1"-14-UNS-2B-RH 1 104375
1513 RA Linkage Rod Clevis, RH 1 219248
1513 RB Bushing, Linkage Rod Clevis 2 219249
Bushing, Liner,1.3772/1.3768"O.D.,1" I.D., 1/2", Carr Laner 1 328821
1513 L Clevis, Linkage Rod LH, 1"-14 UNS-2B-LH 1 104376
1547 Feed Linkage Rod FP2 1 104379
1514 Clevis Pin, 1" X 2" Dowel 1 104381
Dowel Pin, 1" X 2", Black Lustre 1 354981
5018 Nut, 1"-14, Finished Hex 1 314430
5019 Nut, 1"-14, Left Hand, Modified - Ground 1 124447
5019 Nut, 1"-14, Finished Hex, Left Hand 1 314429

4
Qty
Req'd
5204 Bearing, Dodge, F4B-SCM-200, Flange 3 314743
5233 /5204A Bearing, Dodge, FC-SCM-200, Piloted Flange 2 314744
5217 Key, 1/2" X 1/2" X 2" 1 116075
5262 SP Pull Pin Assy, Hole In End, w/ Knob & Lynch Pin 1 216783
5262 SP Pull Pin, With Hole In End (see note) 1 137145
5207 Knob, Alum. 2 1/8" Dia X 1-3/16" Dia 1 143732
5215 Lynch Pin, # HANG-2, Pivot-Point 1 314745
5
317702 Die Block, Safety Kit, FP2B&3B 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
Socket Shoulder Screw, 1/2" X 1/2" 2 301131
5513 Die Block, Safety, FP2B & FP3B, 10-1/2" 2 407098
6
217794 Die Support Bracket, Assy, FP2-48, Bar Type 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
1001 C Support Cube, Bridge 2 217804
1001 WL Side Plate, LH, Wmt, FP2, Bar 1 217809
1001 WR Side Plate, RH, Wmt, FP2, Bar 1 217810
1002 Spacer, Bridge, Die Support, Bar Type, FP2 1 217828
1003 Bridge, Bar, FP2-48 1 217836
Washer, Spherical, Two Piece # CL-4-SW 6 314826
Dowel Pin, 1/2" X 2", Pull Style (Grooved) 8 301027
7
470925 Bolster Assy, FP2B48-2331 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
3 Bolster, w/DTO, FP2B48-2331 1 470923
4312 L Bolster Track, LH, FP2, Metric 1 397971
4311 L Bolster Track, LH, FP2, Special For FP2B48-2331 1 470962

4311 R Bolster Track, RH, FP2, Metric 1 397972
26 B Bushing, Steel, Liner, 1.0018/1.0015"O.D., .7506/.7503" I.D. 2 313892

Socket Head Cap Screw, 1"-8 X 4-1/2" 2 300511
Hex Head Cap Screw, 1"-8 X 4-1/2", Grade 5 6 301537
Washer, American SAE, 1" 6 301424
Dowel Pin, 3/4" X 3", Pull Style (Grooved) 2 301544
8
SRU-M-N-342-L Fin Stock Uncoiler, 4/46/60, LH, 2HP SEW Drive 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
Uncoiler Assy, 46/60/4", LH, Pwd Spdl, SEW Drive 1 410225
3116 Coil Stop Collar, 4" 1 13872
Coil Stop Collar, 5/8" Bar, 3" lg 1 444417
3125 Bracket, Brake, 4" 1 16446
3125 W2 Base, Brake Mtg Brkt, 4" 1 157247
3027 A Bracket, Clutch Guard, 2 HP 1 166157
3100 Spindle Shaft Assy, Hyd Pwr, 46, 4", Supt Bearing 1 250115
3104 Coupling, 4" 1 113756
3123 End Cap, Helper Arm, 25, 33, 40, 46, 4" 1 113760
3105 Stop Sleeve, Size 33, 40, 46, 4" 1 128184
3107 Nut, Wedge, LH, 4" 1 135348
3106 Nut, Wedge, RH, 4" 1 135349
3160 Bearing, Cam Follower, McGill CFH 2-1/4 SB 1 302296
Nut, 1-1/8"-12, Finished, 1-11/16" Thick 1 304550
6115 Adapter, Rotary Union 1 67937
3108 Jaws, Coil Holding, Large, Size 33, 40, 46, 4" 3 69466
3110 Wear Strip, 4" Spindle 6 78060
3111 Screw, Wear Strip, 4", P/M 12 78061
6111 Motor Spline Coupling, #03-32-00034, 4", P/M 1 83319
Splined Hub, Hub City, 03-32-00034 1 328496
6117 Adapter, Spindle Motor, 4" 1 83320
6116 Thrust Bearing, 4" 1 83321
3102 Draw Bar-Screw Shaft Long, Size 46, 4" 1 91001
3103 Draw Bar-Screw Shaft Short, Size 33, 40, 46, 4" 1 91003
3101 Spindle Coil Shaft, Size 46, 4", 76" Lg 1 98659
Hyd Motor, Char-Lynn, 104-3473-006, SAE, Geroler 1 320137
Rotary Union, Deublin 2117-001-103 (RECB) 1 319796
3055 A Plumbing Mtg Brkt, Top, Uncoiler Brake 1 248505
3055 B Plumbing Mtg Brkt, Bottom, Uncoiler Brake 1 248506
3121 Stock Supt Screen, 46/60 1 250596
3118 Brake, Eaton Airflex 4CB200, Part #414361 2 314374
3021 Bearing, Pillow Block, Link-Belt, 4", P-B22464H 2 314750
Air Line Assy, 3/8" x 18", for Uncoiler Brake 2 317619
Fitting, P-H 30682-6-6B Female TL Swivel Str 3/8 LP Push-in 2 343560
Hose, P-H 7161-38250BK, Low Pressure 3/8" 500FT 1.5 315295
3030 Power Head Assy, Size 46/60, 2 HP, SEW, Profibus 1 361757
3034 Roller Support Bracket, RH, 2 HP 1 137078
3035 Roller Support Bracket, LH, 2 HP 1 137079
3050 C Hinge Connector Rod, Size 46 1 217700
3050 Roll Guard, Size 46 1 217785
3050 B Hinge Brkt, Guard Roller, Switch Side 1 233919
Mounting Bracket, Guard Switch 1 233921
3002 A Clutch, Nexen, 807300 (Bushing - 1.500" Bore) 1 303271
3003 Clutch, Nexen, 807400, Coupling Half, MW 1 303272
3002 Clutch, Nexen, 807650, M-800 1 303274
3049 Spring Plunger, Carr Lane, CL-95-SPS-1 2 306076
Ball Bearing, MRC, R16FF 3 325940
Ball Bearing, MRC, R24FF 1 311218
Gear Motor / Eurodrive, SEW, R47DRN90L4MM15, 2 Hp, 19.27:1 1 405022
TW-102 Thrust Washer, TW-102, 1.0030"I.D. X 2.0050"O.D. X 1/8" Thic 3 313921
TW-150 Thrust Washer, Bunting, 1.5040"I.D. X 2.5050"O.D. X 1/8" Thi 1 313923
3046 Support Handle, Size 46 1 71159
3042 Latch Bar 2 71160
3045 Support Bar, Size 46 1 71169
3041 A Base, Roller Sup Brkt, RH 1 71170
3040 A Base, Roller Sup Brkt, LH 1 71171
9
Qty
Req'd
3050 A Hinge Brkt, Guard Roller 1 78064
3040 Roller Support Bracket-Drive, 2 Hp 1 92458
3041 Roller Sup Brkt, Drive, 2 HP 1 92459
3036 Nitrile Roll Assy, Size:46, 2 HP 1 98654
3036 E End, Nitrile Roll 1 155345
3036 DE End, Drive, Nitrile Roll, 2 HP 1 155346
3036 T Steel Tube, Nitrile Roll, Size:46 1 217710
3031 Steel Roll Assy, Size 46 1 98664
3031 E End, Steel Roll 2 155344
3031 T Steel Tube, Size:46 1 217705
Bushing, Taper-Lock, 2517-119112, 1-1/4", Keyseat 1 318682
3020 L-SEW Frame Wmt w/ PH, 4", 46/60, LH, SEW-Eurodrive 1 361838
3020 BMP Mtg Plate, Brg, Uncoiler Sub Wmt, 1-1/4 X 6 X 17-1/2 2 174024
3020 F Foot, Uncoiler Frame Sub Wmt 4 232801
3120 A Tee Bar Mtg Brkt 1 166792
3020 A-SEW Power Head, Wmt, 2 HP, 46/60, 4", SEW-Eurodrive 1 361833
3080 Guard, Clutch Assembly, 2 Piece, Universal, 2 HP, SEW Drive 1 427485
3080 Uncoiler Clutch Guard, Two Piece Universal, Right Side 1 427486
3080 Uncoiler Clutch Guard, Two Piece Universal, Left Side 1 427492
Hinge, Piano, .040" Thick X 1-1/2" Open Width, 3/32" Pin 10 302381
Uncoiler Clutch Guard Flange, Steel Tube 4" OD 1/2" Long 1 473837
A-Frame Spindle Support Assy, 60" OD, LH 1 218627
3139 Handle Wmt, LH 1 11267
C Handle (Lift Cam) 1 115030
3139 WA Lever for Arm, Lift Cam 1 115032
3139 WB Arm, Lift Cam 1 115031
3158 Helper Arm Stop, Uncoiler A-Frame 1 113897
3132 Nest, Support Bearing, Uncoiler 1 113898
3159 Swivel Pin Wmt, Assy 1 113902
3159 W1 Swivel Pin Base 1 113901
3159 W3 Swivel Pin Shaft 1 113900
3159 W2 Swivel Pin Bar 1 113899
3134 Lift Cam 1 115027
3138 L Cam Plate, LH 1 115029
3157 A-Frame Spindle Support, LH, 60" OD 1 220037
3157 W5 Nest Plate 1 154657
3157 W4 "A" Leg 2 238197
3157 W11 A-Frame Spindle Support, Mach Wmt, 60"OD, LH 1 354293
3133 Lift Cam, Dowel Pin, 4" 1 388349
3133 Lift Cam, Dowel Pin, 3" 1 388350
TW-102 Thrust Washer, TW-102, 1.0030"I.D. X 2.0050"O.D. X 1/8" Thic 1 313921
3124 Nut Stop-Sleeve, 46, 4" 1 111279
3061 Stock Stripper Plate, 46/60 Uncoiler 1 377120
3058 Lower Powerhead Guard, 10", 2HP 1 353104
3058 Lower Powerhead Guard, 8", 2HP 1 353105
27001 Stock Fault / Slack Stock System, AB 1 220323

27003 A Bottom UNC Sensor Block 1 454541
27004 A Stock Fault Receiver Mtg Bracket 1 454540
27005 Support Plate, Metric 1 367652
27002 A Special Emitter/Receiver Mtg Plate 1 454530
27006 A Emitter/Receiver Cover Guard 1 455115
10
Qty
Req'd
27006 A Cover Guard for UNC Bottom Sensor Bracket. 1 455115BO
3000 E Uncoiler, Electrical Box Mounting Block 2 463477
Cross Bar, Tee Bar for Stock Supt, Metric 1 367495

3121 Stock Supt Screen, 46/60 1 250596
T' Bar, Tee Bar for Stock Supt, Metric 1 367496
Electrical Parts for Uncoiler w/SEW Drive 1 405147E

Mounting Rail, A-B 199-DR1, DIN 35 X 7.5mm, Steel 18.5 306502
Nipple, 1/2" X 1-1/2", Electrical, Galv. 1 307493
Ground Terminal, Phoenix 0441119, USLKG 2,5N 6 306583
ELEC Sealing Washer, Appleton STG50, Gasket Assembly, 1/2" 3 307055
PB Box, Hoffman ED1PBM2, 1 Hole 22.5mm 1 307096
Cord Grip, Appleton CG903750S, .375-.500, 1/2", 90, Purple 1 307208
ELEC Lock Nut, Appleton BL-50, 1/2" 3 307229
Bushing, Appleton BBU-50, Insul, 1/2" 3 307245
Safety Switch Cord Grip, A-B, 440AA09028, M20 Thd. 1 307638
Safety Switch Key, A-B, 440KA27010, Trojan 5, Flexible 1 307640
Prox Cable, Pico, 4-Pin, 5M Str 4 307783
Cord, Olflex, 601807, PVC, 18/7C, Gray, 190 10 307928
Profibus Conn., Turck BMSWS 8151-8.5/PDP, Field Wire Male 1 322215
Terminal Block, Phoenix 3030488, End Cover, D-ST2,5-Twin 1 322981
Terminal Block, Phoenix 3030161, Jumper, 2 pos, FBS 2-5 4 322985
Terminal End Bracket, Phoenix, 3022218, Typ, Clipfix 35 2 322986
Contact Adaptor, Siemens, 3SB3901-0AB, 3 Across 1 333314
Push Button, Siemens, 3SB3500-1HA20, Mush HD P/T Red SR 1 333352
Connector, Appleton STNM50, Flex, Str, 1/2" 1 307030
Terminal Block, Phoenix, 3031241, Spring Cage, ST2,5-Twin 30 322983
Connector, Appleton STNM9075, Flex, 90, 3/4" 2 307043
Safety Switch, A-B, 440KT11146, MSS5, Trojan 5, No Act, MBB 1 342389
Connector, Appleton, STNM9050, Flex, 90°, 1/2" 3 307042
Cord, Profibus, Siemens 6XV1 830-0PH10, Flexible 22 AWG/ Oa 28 321703
Photocell, Banner, Q126EQ-94926, 24 Vdc, Emitter, Pico, Pur 2 451094
Photocell, Banner, Q12RB6RQ-94925, 24 Vdc, Receiver, Pico, P 1 451095
Photocell, Banner, Q12AB6RQ-96046, 24 Vdc, Receiver, Pico, P 1 454131
Safety Relay, Siemens 3TK2826-2CW30, No Off Delay 24-240v A 1 376795
Safety Contactor, Siemens, 3RT2024-1DB44-3MA0, 12A, 5.5 Kw/4 2 462987
Enclosure, Rittal, AE1033.500, 300 X 300 X 210, w/ Mtg Panel 2 393501
Cable Entry Plate, Murrplastik, KDP/N24/17, 87301150 1 346232
Contact Block, Siemens 3SB3403-0C 1NC, Cage Clp 3 333402
Conduit, Liquatite LNMP11, ORG, Non Met, 1/2" 23 306819
Conduit, Liquatite LNMP12, ORG, Non Met, 3/4" 21 306821
Tubing Clamp, Minerallac #115, 3/8" 5 307429
Tubing Clip, Bijur, B-3539, Double 9 301552
Tubing Clip, Bijur, A-2435, Single 6 301562
Tag, 22.5mm Push Button, Emergency Stop, Yellow 1 319093
Prox Cable, Turck, RK-4.4T-6, 6M, STR, 4 Pin 4 Wire 1 341470
Fluid Power Parts for Uncoiler w/SEW Drive 1 405147F

Valve, Numatics, VS22-04, 1/2", Manual Air Shutoff 1 309927
Regulator Module, Numatics, 152RD100J000000-SP, Dual Press, 1 309956
Valve, Numatics 152SA400M017N61, Sgl, 24vdc 1 310011
Valve Base, Numatics, 203-1226, MK15 w/ 56Y Option (12mm Rec 1 383317
Muffler, Numatics, M3MN, 3/8 Npt 1 310372
11
FSLM-2056 Lube Tank Assy, 40 RHS w/DTO, E-Lube 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
4500 Short Swing Away Assy, Size 40, FP2B-48, RH 1 471400
4256 Lube Tank Frame Wmt, RH, E-Lube, FP2B48 1 470114
4256 W9 End Mount Plate, Latch Side 1 114044
4256 W4 Mounting Plate, Pivot Side 1 114064
4256 W6 Mounting Plate, Roller Bracket, Size 40 1 123029
4307 Latch Block, 1.000" Dia. Pin, english mounting 1 115052
4308 Latch Plate, for 1.000" Dia. Pin, english mounting 1 115053
4306 Thrust Washer-Bunting 1 115166
4304 Pivot Shaft 1 115168
4303 Mounting Block 2 50791A
Swing Away Crossover Assy, Size 40, FP2B-48 Short Swing away 1 472204
4295 Swing Away Crossover, Size 40, Modified for FP2B-48 Short Sw 1 472198
4295 W4 Gusset 2 381450
4295 P Vertical Bar, Metric 1 372563
4626 Weld Block 1, Metric 1 372562
Weld Block 2, Metric 1 372625
4628 Weld Block 3, Lacer Bracket, Universal 1 373020
Rod End, Aurora, ABF-M12, High Strength, LH Thread 2 372687
Rod End, Aurora, AMF-M12, High Strength, RH Thread 2 372688
Long Adjuster, Metric 1 372664
Short Adjuster, Metric 1 372662
4309 B Latch Plate, FP-3 1 116024
Stud, Carr Lane, CL-5/8-11X4.50-STUD, 5/8"-11 x 4-1/2" 2 327980
4295 P Vertical Bar, Metric 1 372563
2278 A Pull Pin Assy, 1.000 Dia. Pin, english tap 1 98549
2278 Pull Pin, 1.000 Dia. 1 251593
Eye Bolt, Shoulder Pattern, 3/8"-16 X 1-1/4" 1 323297
4305 L Swing Away Support Bracket, Lower (Oak # 04371) 1 314596
4305 U Swing Away Support Bracket, Upper (Oak # 14058) 1 314595
DTO Table Assy, FP2B48-2331 1 471089

4255 Table Wmt, DTO, FP-2 Single Chain, RAILS 15.375" & 56.625", 1 470996
4255 B DTO Table Base Wmt, FP2, Metric 1 400616
31001 Lube Filtration Mounting Plate, Metric 1 372197
Mounting Block, FSI Filter 1 163964
4255 A Rail, DTO Table, FP-2 1 396899
Table Track, Rear, LH, FP2, Metric 2 456300
Table Track, Rear, RH, FP2, Metric 2 456301
24302 Lock Block, DTO Table Leg, Metric, FP3 <= 1270 4 372194
24301 Adjustable Leg Wmt, DTO Table, Metric 4 372192
24301 Foot, Adjustable Leg, DTO Table, Metric 1 372262
24301 Leg, Adjustable, DTO Table, Metric 1 372193
2289 Rod, Threaded, DTO, Metric 4 372191
2288 Leveling Foot, DTO, Metric 4 372237
Clamp, Straight Line, De-Sta-Co #630-R, #56301 1 344830
4255 HW DTO TABLE ASSY FASTENER PHATOM PACKAGE, Metric 1 408714
PURCH Dowel Pin, M6 X 30mm 12 301661
Socket Head Cap Screw, M8-1.25 X 20mm 4 305957
Slotted Spring Pin, 1/2" X 2" 2 306129
4900 Die Removal Assist Assembly, Single Chain, Manual, FP2 1 403603
4904 Front Sprocket Mtg. Block, DTO Removal Assist 1 392927
Socket Shoulder Screw, M20 X 35mm 1 392933
Socket Head Cap Screw, M8-1.25 x 45mm 5 337265
Bearing, Thrust Roller, 20mm I.D., 35mm O.D. 2mm Thick 2 392941
12
Qty
Req'd
Bearing, Thrust Washer, 20mm I.D., 35mm O.D., 1mm Thick 4 392942
Bearing, Cup Needle Roller, INA HK2020 1 392943
4908 Sprocket, 40 B 19, 26mm Bore, P/M 1 392944
Sprocket, 40 B 19, Roller Chain Sprocket, MPB 1 321146
Hex Head Cap Screw, M8-1.25 X 80mm, Fully Threaded 1 392947
Nut, M8-1.25, Finished Hex, Jam 1 385061
4903 Chain Adjusting Block, DTO Removal Assist 1 392925
Sprocket Guard, Front, Inner 1 393327
Sprocket Guard, Front 1 393359
Sprocket Guard, Rear 1 393364
Die Removal System Chain Guide 3 394002
2933 W2 Safety Light Mtg. Angle, 10 pc. Bar, METRIC 0.1 401047
Die Removal System DTO Cart Stop 2 393993
Ball Bearing Unit, SKF, FYT 3/4 RM-YAT 204-012 3 382799
Chain, Roller, #40 18 324175
Chain Connector Link, #40 Single Roller 2 329443
Handle, Reid RCH-45, Revolving Handle, 1/2" Sq. Hole 1 382800
4902 Crank Handle Shaft, FP-2, Metric 1 404043
4905 Crank Handle Retaining Washer 1 382908
Flat Head Cap Screw, M6-1.0 X 16mm 1 337561
Sprocket, 40 JA 19, Roller Chain Sprocket 1 392945
Bushing, JA 3/4, Roller Chain Sprocket Bushing 1 391290
PURCH Nut, M24-3.0, Heavy Hex, Jam 4 372456
4330 Mounting Bracket, DE-STA-CO Clamp #630-R, Metric 1 372316
DTO Cart Assy, FP2B48-2331, Metric 1 471094

4208 DTO Cart, FP2B48-2331 1 471095
4208 A Outside Rail, DTO Cart, FP2, Metric 2 397930
4208 B Inside Rail, DTO Cart, FP2, Metric 2 397931
4238 Stop Block, Cart, DTO Removal Assist, Metric 1 392948
4340 Guiding Catch Rail for Extended DTO Cart, Metric 2 400969
Bearing, Cam Follower, McGill MCF 16 S 4 372292
Roller Bearing, INA NATV-8PP 5712750 12 403890
Flat Head Cap Screw, M8-1.25 X 30mm 27 337570
Socket Shoulder Screw, M8 X 30mm 12 337370
PURCH Dowel Pin, M5 X 30mm 4 301652
4906 Chain Attachment Block, DTO Removal Assist, Metric 1 392946
4000 Stock Lacer/Guide Assy, Swing Away, 40, LH Control 1 220249

4001 Side Plate, LH, Size 25, 33, 40, 46 1 106487
4001 A Side Plate, RH, Size 25, 33, 40, 46 1 106488
4005 Top Feed Plate, Size 40 1 114012
4003 Top Hold Plate, Size 40 1 114016
4109 Bottom Cover Plate, Front, Size 40 1 114020
4004 Cylinder Mtg Plate, Size 25, 33, 40, 46 1 114022
4004 B Cylinder Mtg Plate, Size 40 1 114025
4004 A Cylinder Mtg Plate, Size 40 1 114033
4108 Bottom Cover Plate Support, Front 2 114445
4022 Feed Stop Bar 2 114446
4064 Stock Cover Spacer, Size 25, 33, 40, 46 2 114448
4013 Feed Shaft Mtg Block, Size 25, 33, 40, 46 4 114449
4108 B Bottom Cover Plate Support, Back RH 1 114450
4108 A Bottom Cover Plate Support, Back LH 1 114451
13
Qty
Req'd
4016 A Bearing Block, Size 25, 33, 40, 46 2 114452
4016 Bearing Block, Size 25, 33, 40, 46 2 114453
4007 Guide Rail, Square Head, LH 1 114454
4007 A Guide Rail, Square Head, RH 1 114455
4060 Stationary Stock Hold Down 2 114456
4008 /4158 T-Nut 2 114457
4067 Front Plate Spacer, FP2, 3 ,& 4 2 114458
4023 Gage Stop, Lacer 2 114459
4059 Moving Stock Hold Down 2 114460
4028 Back Tee Nut, LH 1 114461
4028 A Back Tee Nut, RH 1 114462
4006 Guide Rails, LH 1 114463
4006 A Guide Rails, RH 1 114464
4043 A Rod End, Moving Cylinder, Steel 2 117634
4043 B Rod End, Stationary Cylinder, Nylon 2 117635
4043 S Stud, 1/2-20 X 1 1/2 4 117636
4009 Feed Guide Shaft, Size 18, 25, 33, 40, 46 2 117637
4043 Rod End, Feed Cylinder, Size 25, 33, 40, 46 1 134697
4004 C Moving Cylinder Mounting Plate, Size 40 1 135005
4111 Stock Lacer/Guide Cover, Size 40, FP2 & 4-48, UNIVERSAL 1 176574
4066 A Locator Clamp, FP2,3,4 2 176578
4111 B Clamp Bar, FP2,3,4 2 176580
Cyl, H-L 2.00" Bore X 5.25" Stroke, 5/8" Rd, LR5A 1 310206
PURCH Ball Lock Pin, Carr Lane CL 6 BLP T-0.50 C, DIA. 3/8 x 1/2 L 1 312019
Linear Bearing, Thomson, A-122026 4 314653
4110 Bottom Cover Plate, Rear, Size 40 1 55476
Bottom Cover Plate, Rear, Size 40, Purchasing Print 1 86805
4025 S Side Plate Base, Swingaway 2 71615
4081 Manifold 1 71616
4074 A Orfice, Fixed 2 91677
PURCH Resilient Ball Bushing Mount, Thomson, RSL-750 4 318035
PURCH Cyl, Fabco, FPS-1532-21 4 357342
Socket Shoulder Screw, 5/16" X 3/8" 1 300988
Socket Head Cap Screw, #10-32 X 1/2" 4 300234
Fitting, W-H, 681 X 4, Brass Str, Self Align, 1/4 Tube x 1/8 4 309614
Fitting, W-H, 691 X 4, Brass 90° Self align, 1/4Tube x 1/8NP 8 309618
Fitting, W-H, 721 X 4, Brass Male Branch Tee 2 309154
Nut, 1/2"-20, Finished Hex, Jam, Plated 4 304557
Fitting, P-H, 3/8 X 1/8 PTR, HPR NPT Reducer 2 309276
Clamp, TC1/4-1, One Hole Strap 1/4" Tube 2 309329
Pierce Lube System, Swing Away w/DTO 1 220047

5511 Block, Mtg, Pierce/Enhance Tank 1 91468
14
Qty
Req'd
Enhance Lube System, Swing Away w/DTO 1 220050

Tag Bracket, Enhance Lube Sys 1 194449
5511 Block, Mtg, Pierce/Enhance Tank 1 91468
Manifold, Enhance Lube, Side of Press 2 99794
4025 SP Mounting Spacer, 1/2", Lacer/Guide, Swing-Away, For 3" Die S 2 251588
Stock Support, Swing Away Lube Tank, 50-1/4" Wide X 18" Long 1 436837
24215 Stock Support Bracket, Lube Tank, 2.250 Lg. 2 460055
Stopper Bolt, Misumi, UNBH10-50, Hexagon Socket Tip 2 459800
4297 Stock Lacer Support 2 60076

4297 W1 Back Plate, Stock Lacer Support 2 230324
15
EL-070 E-Lube Assy, 45" Width, RH-Swing, 120V, for FP2B48-2331 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
Lubrication System, Unist, 45" Width, LH, 120V, w/ Wiper (BO 1 455555
Socket Set Screw, M8-1.25 X 45mm, Cup Point 1 337441
Socket Set Screw, M8-1.25 X 20mm, Cup Point 2 337436
Controls Parts for EL-070 (FP-2331) 1 471462

Check Valve, Deltrol EC20B, 1/4, Inline 1 309859
Hood, Phoenix, 1460038, Lat. HC-B 10-TFL-N-M1PG16S 1 306349
Relay w/Base, Phoenix, DPDT, 24VDC (Au), 50ma, PLC-RSC-24DC/ 1 338153
Base, Phoenix, 1771435, P MT, 10-Pin, HCB10SMLD-52/M2PG16 1 306411
Cord, Olflex 601812, PVC 18/12C Gray 190 10 314039
Cord Grip, Appleton, CG3750S, .375-.500, 1/2" Str (Purple) 2 307174
Male Pinned Insert, Phoenix, HCB10EST, 10-Pin 1 306347
NPT Adapter, Phoenix 5540701, PG16-50 1 306406
Bushing, Appleton BBU-50, Insul, 1/2" 2 307245
ELEC Cord Grip, Appleton CG1850S, .187-.312, 1/2", Str, Brown 1 307170
Socket Head Cap Screw, #8-32 X 7/8" 2 300171
Quick Disconnect, CPC, MCD2104, Male Elbow, 1/4" OD, Ss 2 452553
Quick Disconnect, CPC, MCD1002, Female Socket, 1/8 Npt, Ss 2 453039
E-Lube Mounting Bracket #1, FP2B48, 45" E-Lube 1 473152

16
FSUM-2711-S Suction Unit Kit, 3 Hp Var, w/Straight Arms, Size 40, 36", B 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
2900 A Suction Unit Assy, 40, 36" Fin, 3 Hp Var, Straight Arm, Blow 1 470257
2903 Suction Tower Assy, External Linkage, Metric 1 402876
2952 Adjustment Ring Assy, Suction Tower, External Linkage, Metri 2 402878
2952 W1 Side Bar, Tower Adjustment Ring, External Linkage, METRIC 2 402879
2952 W2 Middle Side Bar, Tower Adjustment Ring, External Linkage, ME 2 402886
2929 Assy Connecting Link Assy, w/Bearings, Blots & Link, External Lin 1 402890
2929 Connecting Link, Suction Unit, 15.365 Long, External Linkage 1 402888
Bearing, Spherical, Joint Swivel, 1/2" ID, 1" OD, 1/2" OAL 3 406172
2999 Connecting Link Retainer, External Linkage, Metric 3 402905
Bearing, Cup Needle Roller, INA SCE810 1 402913
2926 Operating Arm, Drive Side, External Linkage, Metric 1 402907
2926 Operating Arm, Connector Link Side, External Linkage, Metric 3 402914
2926 A Operating Arm Cap, External Linkage, Metric 4 402920
Bearing, Dodge, F2B-SC-010 4 314648
2919 Assy Piston Clevis Assy, Suction Tower, External Linkage 1 402938
2919 Piston Clevis, Suction Tower, External Linkage 1 402936
2948 P Pin, E & E Fixture, Headless W/ Set Screw, 12-2-HS-RPT-38 1 402937
2914 Pivot Bar, for the Damper Door,Slave, External Linkage_Metri 2 402939
2914 Pivot Bar, for the Damper Door, Drive, External Linkage_Metr 1 402941
2909 Damper Door, External Linkage, Metric 2 403143
2909 Damper Door For Suction Tower, External Linkage, Metric, Bla 1 403142
2913 Damper Door For Suction Tower, Center, External Linkage, Met 1 403152
2913 Damper Door For Suction Tower, Center, External Linkage, Met 1 403153
2903 W Suction Tower Wmt, External Linkage, Metric 1 403155
2916 Mounting Bracket, Air Cylinder, External Linkage 1 403157
2903 W2 Support Bar, Tower Wmt, METRIC 4 378259
2903 W3 Side Support Bar, Tower Wmt, METRIC 4 378261
2903 W1 Bearing Mount Support Bar, Tower Wmt, External Linkage, Metr 4 403159
2903 W8 Center Bearing Mount Support Bar, Tower Wmt, External Linkag 2 403167
2903 W4 End Panel, Tower Wmt, External Linkage, Metric 2 403173
2903 W5 Side Panel Back, Tower Wmt, External Linkage, Metric 1 403174
2903 W6 Side Panel Front, Tower Wmt, External Linkage, Metric 1 403181
2955 Air Deflector, External Linkage Suction Tower 2 403189
2899 W Suction Tower Linkage Guard, Linkage Side, External Linkage 1 403201
2899 W1 Suction Tower Linkage Guard, Linkage Side, External Linkage, 1 403200
2899 W Suction Tower Linkage Guard, Cylinder Side, External Linkage 1 403207
2899 W1 Suction Tower Linkage Guard, Cylinder Side, External Linkage 1 403205
2916 A Air Cylinder Bracket Eccentric, Suction Tower, External Link 1 421946
Socket Shoulder Screw, 3/8" X 1-1/2" 1 301038
Flow Control Inline, Mead, MF1-25, 1/4" 2 314649
Cyl, Parker, 1.5" Bore x 2" Stroke, .625" Rd, MA Series, P/M 1 421974
Cyl, Parker, 1.5" Bore x 2" Stroke, .625" Rd, MA Series 1 421950
Rubber Seal, “E” Shape, 3/8" Wide, For 1/8" edge, 113B100B3X 90 426519
2909 A Damper Door Clamp Bar, External Linkage, Metric 4 406276
Grease Manifold, FP1000, 1400 Suction Tower 2 466962
2901 Fan Housing Wmt, Size 40, 36" Fin Length Removable Blower, F 1 474000
2901 W2 Cross Member, Front, Size:40, FP2, Straight Arm, Metric 1 431179
2901 W2 Cross Member, Backt, Size:40, FP2, Straight Arm, Metric 1 431251
2901 W10 Mounting Plate, Numatic, Valve Pack, Removable Blower 1 403285
2901 W13 Adjustment Support Bracket, 1 5/8" Long, Straight Arm Suctio 4 403283
2901 W1 Plate, Fan Housing, Size:40, FP2, Removable Blower, Metric 1 431177
2901 W8 Flange, Fan Housing, Size:46, FP3 & 4-54, Removable Blower, 1 403266
2902 Suction Unit Exhaust Cone Wmt, 90 Degree, Removable Blower 1 444240
17
Qty
Req'd
2902 W1 Suction Unit Exhaust Side Panel, 90 deg, Left, Removable Blo 1 444218
2902 W3 Suction Unit Exhaust Top Panel, 90 Degree, Removable Blower 1 444236
2902 W2 Suction Unit Exhaust Side Panel, 90 deg, Right, Removable Bl 1 444222
2902 W4 Suction Unit Exhaust Bottom Panel, 90 Degree, Removable Blow 1 444237
Blower, Chicago Blower, PBI Size 165-100%, CW, BAU, 4200 CFM 1 403338
Ball Joint Rod End, McMaster-Carr, 59935K451, Male Shank, LH 4 384041
Ball Joint Rod End, Male Shank, RH Thread, M12 X 1.75 4 384040
2900 Suction Box, Size:40, 36" Fin 1 470478
2900 WD Door Assy, 7 X 20-1/2", Suction Pan 2 76300
Door Plate, Suct Pan, FP3, FP242, FP248 1 249365
Hinge, Piano, .040" Thick X 1-1/2" Open Width, 3/32" Pin 19.5 302381
Hinge, Piano, .040" Thick X 1-1/2" Open Width, 3/32" Pin 35 302381
Knob, Thumb Screw, Black Plastic, 1/4" SHCS 2 315056
2985 Special Thumb Screw For Suction Unit 4 184342
1515 Thumb Screw, Reid, QT-1, Quarter Turn, 1/4"-20 X 1-7/8" OAL 1 319133
2901 W13 Bottom Rear Adjustment Support Bracket, Straight Arm Suction 2 431187
2901 W13 Bottom Front Adjustment Support Bracket, Straight Arm Suctio 2 383985
2906 Straight Arm Adjuster for Suction Unit, 13-1/2" Long, Metric 2 396850
Suction Tower Grease Manifold Assembly 1 467750
Grease Manifold, FP1000, 1400 Suction Tower 2 466962
Adapter, Bijur, B-3488, Straight 10 319201
Compression Bushing, Bijur, B-3783 20 301593
Compression Sleeve, Bijur, B-1061, Metal 20 301584
Tube Insert, Bijur, B-19268, for 5/32" Hose 20 301685
B-4312 Straight Adapter, Bijur, B-4312, M-Thd 1/4-28, F-Thd 5/16-24 10 341907
Tubing, P-H, NN-2.5-025-0100, 5/32" Nat. Nylon 8 321781
2906 Straight Arm Adjuster for Suction Unit, 11" Long, Metric 2 383970
Support Arm Assy, 80-5/16", Straight, Rolling Suction Unit, 1 445870

2950 Support Arm, FP1400, 80-5/16", Straight, Rolling Suction Uni 2 436309
2950 W2 End Cap, Suct Supt Arms, METRIC 8x3" Arms 1 383809
Flat Washer, M12, Metric 4 379609
Dowel Pin, M16 X 50mm, Pull Style, (Grooved) 4 383898
Dowel Pin, M5 X 10mm 4 383899
Linear Bearing Support Rail, Thomson, LSRAM-25 X 1800mm 2 383909
2918 Linear Bearing Mtg. Plate, Rolling Suction Unit, for Thomson 3 383949
2923 Linear Bearing Track Stop, Rolling Suction Unit 4 383974
Flat Washer, M16, Metric, Narrow (32mm O.D.) 4 384091
Linear Bearing, Thomson, SSE-PBO-M25-DD 4 385928
2918 A Linear Bearing Mtg. Plate, Rolling Suction Unit, for Thomson 1 385935
2918 B Linear Bearing Lock, Rolling Suction Unit, for Thomson SSE P 1 385937
Blow Down Fittings Kit, Below 48" 1 442643

Fitting, LP Pipe Tee 1/2 NPT 1 309461
Fitting, LP Pipe Nipple 1/2 X Close NPT 1 309537
Fitting, P-H, 6-8 CTX-S, TL Male 90 NPT 2 309677
Fitting, W-H, 1351, Bulkhead Coupling 1/2 NPT 2 309390
Fitting, P-H, 6-8 VTX-S, TL Male 45 NPT 2 308399
Fitting, P-H, 12-8 FBU-S, FL Male Str NPT, 3/4 x 1/2 1 308040
18
Qty
Req'd
Straight Arm Box Mount Assy for Remote Controls FP2B48 1 473137
Straight Arm Box Mount Plate for Remote Controls FP2B48 1 473136
Straight Arm Cross Bar for Remote Controls FP2B48 1 473135
Electrical Parts for FSUM-2711-S 1 FSUM-2711E-S

Hood, Phoenix, 1460110, Str, HCB16TFL./PG21G 1 306356
Mounting Rail, A-B 199-DR1, DIN 35 X 7.5mm, Steel 10 306502
Cord Grip, Hubbell, 074-01-010, .500-.625, Strain Relief, 1/ 1 307392
Clamp, TC1/2-1, One Hole Strap 1/2" Tube 1 309334
Cord, Profibus, Siemens 6XV1 830-0PH10, Flexible 22 AWG/ Oa 20 321703
PLC ET200S Output Card, Siemens 6ES7 132-4BD3x-0AA0, DO 4x24 3 321942
Cord, Carol 0276885, SO 14/4C Black 250ft spl 12 323281
ET200S Term Mod, Siemens 6ES7 193-4CA30-0AA0, TME15C24-A1 3 324400
PLC ET200S I/F Mod, Siemens, 6ES7-151-1AA05-0AB0, w/ Term, I 1 325208
ET200s PM-E, Siemens, 6ES7-138-4CA01-0AA0, w/ Diagnost 1 325209
ET200S Term Mod, Siemens 6ES7 193-4CD30-0AA0,TMP15C23-A0, Pw 1 325210
PLC 9-Pin Conn, Siemens, 6ES7-972-0BA52-0XA0, 90° No Pg, Pbu 1 325293
Enclosure, Rittal, JB101006HC, w/ Mtg Panel, RAL 7035 1 356164
Hinged Retaining Frame, Phoenix, 1679304, HC-M-MHR-A4-N 1 384525
Insert Module Male, Phoenix, 1647718, HC-M-05-MOD-STZ, 5-Pin 2 384526
EMC Contact Carrier, Phoenix 1678570, HC-M-EMV-MOD-BU, Male 1 384529
EMC Plug Connector, Male, Phoenix 1636088, HC-M-EMV-ST/3-9.5 1 384530
Male Crimp Contacts, Phoenix 1674901, CK1.6-ED-0.37ST AU, Go 2 384532
Din Plug w/Cable, Murr 7000-11021-2160500, w/Led/sup/5 m/For 2 406046
Fluid Power Parts for FSUM-2711-S 1 FSUM-2711F-S

Diverter Block, Numatics DK22-03, 1/2" X 3/8" 1 309915
Manifold, Numatics 229-718, Flexiblok, MK-3 3 309985
End Plate Kit, Numatics, 229-719, MK-3, 1/4" NPTF 1 310004
Valve, Numatics, 031SA4004000061, Sgl, 24 Vdc, 5-Port 2 310006
Air Gauge, Numatics, 214-194, 0-160 Psi,1.5 Face, Liq. 1 310082
Regulator, Numatics, R22R-04, 1/2", Gp 1 310089
Cover Plate Kit, Numatics 229-538, Mark 3 1 318722
Dowel Pin, M5 X 10mm 4 383899

19
470990 Guard Package for FP2B48-2331 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
Maytec Guard Package, FP2B48-2331 1 470842
Maytec, Left Hand Rear Press Guard FP2 1 458250
Upper Feed System Guard, Maytec, for a Standard FP2 1 458232
Maytec, Top of Progression Changer Guard 1 458251
Maytec, Progression Changer Front Door, Plus Left Side Feed 1 458237
Maytec, Lower Progression Changer Guard, FP2 1 458238
Maytec, Left Hand Roller Die Guard, 38 Inch 1 458253
Maytec, Die Guard Sliding Box, LH 18 In Long 1 470713
Maytec, Die Guard Sliding Box, RH 18 In Long 1 470728
Nose Guard FP2 Wire Tap Down 1 458236
Maytec, Right Hand Roller Die Guard, 38 Inch Overall Length 1 458254
Maytec, Right Hand Feed Arm Guard 1 458239
Maytec, Right Side Press Guard, for a Standard FP2 1 458231
Maytec, Right Hand Rear Press Guard, for a Standard FP2 1 458230
26024 Guard, Bottom of Lower Feed, FP2, Maytec 1 424329
Maytec, Rolling Door Ball Lock Pin Bracket, 2 461631
Ball Lock Pin, Carr Lane CL 4 BLP R 2.0 2 314829
Guard Switch Mount Lift Off Bracket, Maytec 1 423561
26085 B Guard, "S" Latch Brkt, Swing-Away 2 199432
Liftoff Mounting Plate, Maytec Guarding 4 420963
26005 Guard, Switch Mtg Plate, Maytec Guards 4 407503
Maytec Rolling Door Guide Bracket 2 470653
Bearing, Cam Follower, McGill MCF 16 S 2 372292
26010 Guard, Upper Feed, Bottom, FP2, Maytec 1 424245
Sheet Metal Package, FP2B48-2331 1 470991

Scrap Chute, FP248, 12" Opening 1 251770
Scrap Funnel, FP248, 3-3/4" Risers 1 251771
Scrap Box, Std 1 117383
Handle, 3/8" Dia Formed Steel 2 394179
FP2B Feed Shaft Scrap Chute Cover 2 474967
Label FP Symbol Only 1 470007

Label Label - Hearing Protection - Symbol 1 457115
Label Label, Cut or Crushing Hazard SYMBOL ONLY 6 443274
Label Label, System Under Pressure SYMBOL ONLY 5 442180
Label Label - Lock Out SYMBOL ONLY 13 449895
Label Label, Entanglement Hazard (Pulley) - SYMBOL ONLY 9 449262
Label Label - Do Not Operate Guard Removed SYMBOL ONLY 9 449879
Label Label - Cut and Crush SYMBOL only 9 444516
Label Label - Hazardous Voltage SYMBOL ONLY 4 449883
Label Label - Locking Device SYMBOL ONLY 1 449869
Label Label, Read Instructions SYMBOL ONLY 3 449871
Label Label - Flywheel in Motion SYMBOL ONLY 1 451190
Label Label - Emerg/Lt Curtain/Guards SYMBOL ONLY 1 449854
20
470423 Rear Stock Containment Assembly E-Lube FP2B48 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
Support Arm Rear Stock Containment For E-Lube 2 451453
Bottom Stock Support, E-Lube Rear Stock Containment _ FP2B48 1 473028
Universal Spacer Bar, Rear Stock Containment E Lube 2 451464
Roller Brkt, Rear Stock Containment for E-Lube 2 451456
Support Crossmember, E-Lube Rear Stock Containment - FP2B48 3 473026
Carpet Bar, E-Lube Rear Stock Containment - FP2B48 1 473027
Carpet Arm, Rear Stock Containment for E-Lube 2 451458
Support Arm, Rear Stock Containment for E-Lube 2 459350
Support Arm Attachment Block, Rear Stock Containment for E-L 2 459351
Adjustable Roller Mounting Block, Single Chain DTO Table, fo 2 466396
Carpet, Stock Dampening, 36" X 72" Bound 4 Sides, Green 1 319641
Spring Plunger, McMaster-Carr 8478A8, Plate-Mount 1 443217
21
468640E Electrical Parts for FP2B-48-2331 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
PLC ET200S Output Card, Siemens 6ES7 132-4BD3x-0AA0, DO 4x24 1 321942
Male Pinned Insert, Phoenix 1648238, HCB16IUTM, 16 pin 1 306354
Tag, 22.5mm Pushbutton BOT-100, 2" Square, White-Black Core, 1 318279
Selector, Siemens 3SB3500-2PA11, 2 Pos Std Blk w/ 3 acr hold 2 333358
Box, Hoffman, A1008CHS, 10 X 8 X 4 Short Hinge 1 307189
Panel, Hoffman, A10P8G, 8.75 x 6.88 Galv., 10 x 8 Box 1 306942
Din Plug, Canfield P5193-1B51011, Micro, Diode 6-48, 9ft cor 1 335863
Safety Switch Cord Grip, A-B, 440AA09028, M20 Thd. 8 307638
Safety Switch Key, A-B, 440KA27010, Trojan 5, Flexible 8 307640
Safety Switch, A-B, 440KT11146, MSS5, Trojan 5, No Act, MBB 8 342389
Din Plug, Canfield, P5103-1331000, Transorb, 6-48 Vdc, Mini, 5 322922
Prox Switch, 12mm, DC, 4-Pin, N.O. Short barrel PNP 1 307240
Prox Cable, Turck WK-4T-4, 4M, 90, 4 Pin, 3-W, Eurofast 1 307501
Prox Cable, Turck RK-4T-4, 4M Str, 4 Pin 3-W, Eurofast 4 307494
Contact Block, Siemens 3SB3403-0B 1NO. Cage Clp 5 333401
Contact Block, Siemens 3SB3403-0C 1NC, Cage Clp 4 333402
Push Button, Siemens, 3SB3500-1GA11, Mush HD Blk (Oak # 1642 2 333331
Push Button, Siemens, 3SB3500-1GA31, Mush HD Yellow 1 333333
Push Button, Siemens, 3SB3500-1HA20, Mush HD P/T Red SR 1 333352
Contact Adaptor, Siemens, 3SB3901-0AB, 3 Across 1 333314
Push Button Guard Ring, Siemens, 3SB3921-0BF, 40mm 2 333396
Mounting Rail, A-B 199-DR1, DIN 35 X 7.5mm, Steel 16 306502
***obselete use 469872***

1 378465
TScrn Stylus, Rubber Tip, w/ Coile
Coiled Tether, W/Ring & Eye, 3/16" I.D., #CTRE 1 445954
Stylus, Universal, Model #CAPPXXXXST22, Item #974562 1 445955
USB Transfer Cable, StarTech, USB2LINK, 2.0, Networking/Data 1 378783

ELEC Cast Box, Appleton, FS175A, Shallow, 3/4" 2 307107
ELEC Recept, Crouse Hinds X8381-19, Die Safety, YL Box 2 306329
ELEC Plug, Crouse Hinds X8381-7, Die Safety, Yel,2ft 2 306328
Terminal, Block, Weiland 21.305.1257.0, 12 Pole 16-22awg 8mm 1 306525
Terminal, Block, Weiland 29.401.0853.0, 8 Pole 1 306532
Cable, MURP-19MP-6M , 19 Pin Male strt conn, 6 meter (Fin Pr 1 418286
Enclosure, Rittal, JB101006HC, w/ Mtg Panel, RAL 7035 1 356164
Led Power Mod, Siemens 3SU1401-1BB60-3AA0, Wht, 24v, Cage Cl 1 459495
Push Button, Siemens, 3SU1051-0BB70-0AA0, ILL Ext'd Oper, Cl 1 459746
Push Button, Siemens, 3SU1050-0AB40-0AA0, Flush HD Green, Mo 1 459496
Base, Phoenix, 1771435, P MT, 10-Pin, HCB10SMLD-52/M2PG16 1 306411
Female Insert, Phoenix, 1648186, 10 Pin 1 306346
EMC Contact Carrier, Phoenix 1678570, HC-M-EMV-MOD-BU, Male 1 384529
EMC Plug Connector Female, Phoenix 1636091, HC-MOD-EMV-BU/3- 2 384531
Hinged Retaining Frame, Phoenix, 1679304, HC-M-MHR-A4-N 1 384525
Insert Module Female, Phoenix 1647721, HC-M-05 MOD-BUZ, 5-pi 2 384527
Box Mount Base, Phoenix, 1771697, HC-B-16-SMLD-67/M2PG21 (Oa 1 358074
Female Crimp Contacts, Phoenix 1674969, CK1.6-ED-0.37BU AU, 8 384533
Holder for (3) Modules, Siemens, 3SU1550-0AA10-0AA0, Metal S 1 459161
Closing Plug, Siemens 3SU1900-0FA10-0AA0, 22mm, Blk, Metal S 2 459160
22
468640E Electrical Parts for FP2B-48-2331 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
ET200S Term Mod, Siemens 6ES7 193-4CA30-0AA0, TME15C24-A1 1 324400
Hood Str, Phoenix 1773514, HCHV3TFL-45PG16G 1 306443
Male Pinned Insert, Phoenix, 1407739, HCHV03IPTM, 5-Pin 1 312382
5051 Switch Housing Body 1 339642
5052 End Cap 1 339643
Hood, Phoenix, 1675094, Lat HC-B-32-TFQ-80/01PG29S 1 306440
NPT Adapter, Phoenix 5540811,PG29-100 1 306408
Reducer Bushing, Appleton RB100-75, 1"to3/4"(Elec only) Galv 1 307268
ELEC Reducer Bushing, Appleton RB75-50, 3/4"-1/2", (Elec. only) G 1 307267
ELEC Cord Grip, Appleton CG1850S, .187-.312, 1/2", Str, Brown 1 307170
Recept, Turck, FS4.4-0.5/14.5/NPT, 4-Pin, Male Micro, 12mm: 1 378011
Prox Cable, Turck, RK-4.4T-6, 6M, STR, 4 Pin 4 Wire 1 341470
Din Plug, Canfield P5103-1631000, Transorb, 6-48VDC,ISO 4 pi 1 322924
23
468640F Fluid Power parts for FP2B-48-2331 1 FP2B48-2331LINE
Qty
Req'd
Subplate Cover, Daman, AD03-CPP, D03 6 310788
Fitting, P-H, FF-252-4FP, 1/4 Fem Disc Plug NPT 4 309277
Valve, Dir, Parker, D1VHW020DNJGJ7B91XB1011, 24 Vdc, Detente 2 381133
Fitting, Aro, 310, 3/8 Fem Disc Socket Air 1 309642
22009 Manifold Block, Lacer 1 227897
Manifold, Daman AD03-P-08-2S, SAE Ports 1 310340
Bracket, Hydraulic Manifold (Daman 8) (Oak # 14842) 2 388636
Fitting, P-H, FF-251-4FP, 1/4 Fem Disc Socket NPT 4 309279
70 -104-01 Ball Valve, Apollo, 70-104-01, 3/4 1 311970
70 -102-01 Ball Valve, Apollo, 70-102-01, 3/8 1 311968
Terminal, Block, Weiland 29.401.0853.0, 8 Pole 1 306532
Fitting, Aro, 3804, 3/8", Male, Disc Plug, Air 1 309647
Air Gauge, Numatics, 214-194, 0-160 Psi,1.5 Face, Liq. 4 310082
Manifold, Numatics 229-718, Flexiblok, MK-3 3 309985
End Plate Kit, Numatics, 229-719, MK-3, 1/4" NPTF 1 310004
Reservoir, LSP, P312, 1.5 Gal 1 310782
Valve, Numatics, 031SA4004000061, Sgl, 24 Vdc, 5-Port 3 310006
Reservoir Level Switch, Gems 01750, Spst, 316 SS, 1 314527
Check Valve, Bijur, B-3454, # 5 Inline 2 322078
5504 Lubricator / Head / LLSO Assy, Norgren, L17-600-OPKA-3P, 5 G 2 317910
Valve, Mac 35A-AAA-DDAJ-1KE, 3Way, 24Vdc, w/DIN PLUG 1 310069
Fitting, Aro, 2609, 1/4 Fem Disc Plug Air 1 309636
Lubricator, Numatics L22L-04M, 1/2", 3.8 oz 2 310128
Muffler, Numatics M1MN, 1/8 NPT. 1 310368
Regulator, Numatics, R22R-04, 1/2", Gp 4 310089
Air Valve, Spartan, 3900-00-5313, 1/8", 24 Vdc, 3p, Nc, 1.5m 1 320993
Pump-Ejector, LSP, SP0327X-1/8NPTF, MicroSpray, No Univalve 1 310784
Washer, Appleton RW100-50, Reducer, 1"-1/2" 1 307279
Unilet Left Conn, Appleton LL50-A, 1/2", Al 1 306979
Air Valve, Spartan, 3500-01-4233, 1/2", 24 Vdc, 2p, Nc, 2.45 1 310063
Reservoir Mounting Bracket, Norgren, 18-001-009, 2-5 Gal. 2 310143
System: 11/9/2016 4:00:26 PM Oak Press Solutions Inc. Page: 1
User Date: 11/9/2016 Single Level Bill of Materials User ID rdill
Item Number: FP-2B-48-2331

Item Description: FP-2B-48 Press, 1-1/2" Stroke, Carrier Mexico
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM
Effective Date: 8/7/2008

Level Item Number Quantity Detail #
Pos. Item Description
1 12673 1 Each
10 Clutch/Brake Kit, OK-FP2-OC1 (FP-2B)
1 10219 1 Each
20 Eccentric Shaft Assembly FP-2B-48
1 10287 2 Each
30 Ladder Bearing Assembly, Upper, FP-2 (w/ Backup Pl)
1 10288 2 Each
40 Ladder Bearing Assembly, Lower FP-2 (w/Backup Pl)
1 06154 12 Each
50 Gib Bearing Assembly, 1-1/2" Stk. FP-3,FP-2,LP-60
1 18197 1 Each
60 Crown Assembly, FP-2B-48, 1-1/2" Stroke
1 23417 1 Each
70 Bed Assembly, FP-2B-48-2229, 2235, 2330 & 2331
1 11341 1 Each
80 Slide Assembly, FP-2B-48
1 18804 1 Each
90 Press Assembly, Tie Rod Area, FP-2B W/O Tool Post B
1 26426 1 Each
100 Press Drive Assembly, FP-2B with Actuator
1 11321 1 Each
110 Counterbalance Spring Assembly FP-2B-48, 1-1/2" St
1 17793 1 Each
120 Encoder Assembly,( Siemens FP-2)
1 00107 1 Each
130 Variable Feed Drive Assembly
1
1 16250 1 Each
140 Pendent Arm Assembly, FP-2B Siemens, w/Vibro Mount
1 14797 1 Each
150 Schematic, Lubrication, FP-2B, 24 VDC
1 28009 1 Each
160 Hydraulic/Pneumatic Assemblies FP-2B-48-2331
1 28011 1 Each
170 Electrical Schematic FP-2B-48-2331 BOTG D-
1 14078 1 Each
180 Tie Rod Lubrication Assembly, FP-2
1 17978 1 Each
190 Decals / Tags, Locations, FP-2B
1 01123 1 Each
200 Sprocket, R.L.S. Drive 45 Tooth 3/8 Pitch
1 04204 1 Each
201 Key, RLS and Clutch Stop FP-2
1 04206 1 Each
202 Key, Feed Eccentric FP-2
1 11354 2 Each
203 Adjusting Nut Chain Guide 48-FP-2
2
User Date: 5/18/2012 Single Level Bill of Materials User ID rgraybill
Item Number: 10219

Item Description: Eccentric Shaft Assembly FP-2B-48
Revision Level: 2
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 00031 2 Each 1001

100 Counterweight, FP-2 / LP-60
1 00032 2 Each 1001

20 Eccentric, 1-1/2" Stroke, FP-2
1 04205 2 Each 1001

110 Key, Eccentric, FP-2 / LP-60
1 04852 2 Each 1001

50 Bearing, Roller Radial RBC SJ-74973
1 08441 4 Each 1001

90 Throw Block Side Plate FP-2, LP-60
1 08442 2 Each 1001

80 Throw Block, FP-2 / LP-60 (Replaces C-30B)
1 08778 4 Each 1001

40 Sleeve, Nut and Washer SNW-22x3-15/16-4 Special
1 10212 1 Each 1001

10 Eccentric Shaft FP-2B-48
1 10576 16 Each 1001

120 Flat Head Screw 3/8-16 X 1
1 10608 4 Each 1001

140 Socket Head Screw 1/2-13 X 3
1 10717 2 Each 1001

150 Junction, 2-way, Bijur B-3288
1 13116 2 Each 1001

130 Flat Head Screw 1/4-28x3/4
1 21392 4 Each 1001

60 Bearing Grease Shield 22222 EK Nyla 1/16 X 7-5/8 X
3
1 21393 4 Each 1001

70 Bearing Grease Shield 22222 EK (NUT END) Nyla 1/16
1 21442 4 Each 1001

30 Bearing, Spherical 22222
4
System: 4/19/2010 9:00:22 AM Oak Press Solutions Inc. Page: 1
Item Number: 10287

Item Description: Ladder Bearing Assembly, Upper, FP-2 (w/ Backup Pl)
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 00159 1 Each 1008

10 Ladder Bearing Back Up, Upper, FP-2
1 07039 1 Each 1008

20 Ladder Bearing, Race Upper FP-2
1 07038 2 Each 1008

30 Ladder Bearing, Stop, Upper
1 07634 1 Each 1008

40 Ladder Bearing, Cage Upper
1 07805 28 Each 1008

50 Roller 1/4 Dia. X 2 McGill SA1714941
1 10597 4 Each 1008

60 Socket Low Profile Screw 5/16-18 X 1/2 no spot loc
5
Item Number: 10288

Item Description: Ladder Bearing Assembly, Lower FP-2 (w/Backup Pl)
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 00158 1 Each 1008

10 Ladder Bearing Back Up Plate, Lower, FP-2
1 07036 1 Each 1008

20 Ladder Bearing, Race Lower, FP-2 / LP-60
1 07037 2 Each 1008

30 Ladder Bearing, Stop, Lower
1 07635 1 Each 1008

40 Ladder Bearing, Cage Lower
1 07805 30 Each 1008

50 Roller 1/4 Dia. X 2 McGill SA1714941
1 10597 4 Each 1008

60 Socket Low Profile Screw 5/16-18 X 1/2 no spot loc
6
Item Number: 06154

Item Description: Gib Bearing Assembly, 1-1/2" Stk. FP-3,FP-2,LP-60
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 00087 1 Each
10 Gib Race, FP-2 / FP-3 / LP-30 / LP-60
1 00088 1 Each
20 Roller Retainer, FP-2 / FP-3 / LP-30 / LP-60
1 00118 2 Each
30 Wiper
1 07801 14 Each
40 Roller 1/4 Dia. X 1 1/4 McGill SA1714921
1 10575 4 Each
50 Button Head Screw 5/16-24 X 5/8
7
Item Number: 18197

Item Description: Crown Assembly, FP-2B-48, 1-1/2" Stroke
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 07391 1 Each
10 Crown, 48-FP-2B
1 07443 1 Each
20 Stand Off, Front, Flywheel Guard, FP-2B
1 11338 1 Each
30 Stand Off, Flywheel Guard, Rear, FP-2B
1 11137 1 Each
40 End Plate, Crown, Flywheel End, FP-2B
1 11138 1 Each
50 End Plate, Crown, Feed End, FP-2B
1 07445 1 Each
60 Guard, Flywheel Upper, FP-2B
1 07436 1 Each
70 Guard, Flywheel, Lower, FP-2B
1 10243 4 Each
80 Insert, Upper Gib, FP-2, LP-60
1 04366 2 Each
90 Air Tank Bracket FP-2
1 05153 1 Each
100 Support, Crown Valve Manifold, FP-2B
1 10185 4 Each
110 Shackle Block, Extended, 9-1/2" Overall Height
1 06014 1 Each
120 Manifold, Feed Rod Cylinder Hydraulic Anchor
1 17172 1 Each
130 Orfice Fitting, 1/16", P-H, 8-C5BU-S FL 90 SAE
1 15560 1 Each
140 Stand Off, Numatics Valve NAF254504N00f
1 15267 1 Each
150 Mounting Bracket, Numatics Lox Valve, FP-3B
8
Item Number: 23417

Item Description: Bed Assembly, FP-2B-48-2229, 2235, 2330 & 2331
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 23249 1 Each
10 Bed, 48-FP-2, Special For FP-2B-48-2229, 2235, 2330
1 06434 1 Each
20 Air Strip Manifold
1 04754 1 Each
30 Shutheight Adjusting Tool Holder
1 10551 1 Each
40 Drive Pin, Starrett 248-E-3/8
1 17275 1 Each
50 Manifold, Bed Mounted FP-2B
1 15093 1 Each
60 Manifold, Stacker
1 05053 1 Each
70 Manifold, 1/8 NPT(2) Ports (Trabon Lube Block)
9
Item Number: 11341

Item Description: Slide Assembly, FP-2B-48
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 10235 1 Each
10 Slide, 48-FP-2B
1 01053 2 Each
20 Yoke Cap, FP-2 / LP-60
1 00025 4 Each
30 Roller Bracket
1 07035 4 Each
40 Ladder Bearing, Side Plate, Lower
1 00190 2 Each
50 Cover, Slide Access Hole, FP-2
1 00149 8 Each
60 Shim, Gib
1 00150 4 Each
70 Shim, Yoke Cap
1 10172 8 Each
80 Taper Pin #8 X 1-3/4 with 1/4-20 Tap
1 14558 2 Each
90 Safety Cable Kit .032 Wire(Spec. Length) K30B30
1 14559 2 Each
100 Safety Cable Kit .032 Wire K30B21
10
Item Number: 18804

Item Description: Press Assembly, Tie Rod Area, FP-2B W/O Tool Post Brackets
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 11334 1 Each 1063

10 Tie Rod FP-2B Position 1
1 11335 1 Each 1063

1 11336 1 Each 1063

1 11337 1 Each 1063

1 10051 4 Each 1063

50 Cylinder, Hydroline,N5G8X8.5N3.5-2XHB1-1X, (SAE)
1 08091 8 Each 1063

60 Insert, Lower Gib FP-2B
1 06444 4 Each 1063

70 Hydraulic Cylinder Spacer, Thick
1 11350 4 Each 1063

80 Hydraulic Cylinder Spacer,Thin, FP-2B, FP-3B-LP-60
1 00729 4 Each 1063

90 Sprocket, Adjusting Nut FP-2
1 01628 4 Each 1063

100 Idler Bracket
1 07538 4 Each 1063

110 Pin, Idler Sprocket
1 00044 4 Each 1063

120 Sprocket, Idler
1 05579 4 Each 1063

130 Key, Tie Rod FP-2, LP-60
1 05651 4 Each 1063

140 Cylinder Rod Lock, FP-2-LP-60
1 10477 15.00 Feet 1063

150 Chain, #35 3/8 Pitch
11
1 07296 2 Each 1063

160 Shipping Strap, FP-2
1 00045 1 Each 1063

170 Scale, Shutheight
1 00046 1 Each 1063

180 Scale, Adjusting Nut (FP-2,LP-60,SS-60)
1 10620 16 Each 1063

190 Socket Head Screw 1-8 X 5-1/2
12
Item Number: 26426

Item Description: Press Drive Assembly, FP-2B with Actuator
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 15523 1 Each
10 Actuator Bracket, FP-2B
1 16862 1 Each
20 Motor Base Weldment, FP-2B Actuator Drive
1 07438 2 Each
30 Hinge Pin, Motor Base FP-2B
1 15104 1 Each
40 Linear Actuator, Performance Pak 24DC, 00212203
1 10758 1 Each
50 Motor, Sterling 7.5 HP EHY756DFJT 1200 RPM
1 26215 1 Each
60 Sheave, Variable, Lovejoy 14420, 1-5/8" Bore, FP-2
1 10429 1 Each
70 Belt, Variable Speed, Goodyear 4430V1610
1 12575 2 Each
80 Bushing, Bronze, Flange, 1/2 ID x 3/4 OD x 1 L.
1 13278 1 Each
100 Shoulder Bolt 1/2 X 1
13
Item Number: 11321

Item Description: Counterbalance Spring Assembly FP-2B-48, 1-1/2" St
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 00037 4 Each 1040A

10 Spring Rod, 1-8, 26.50" Overall
1 00038 4 Each 1040A

20 Spring Rod Cap
1 00041 4 Each 1040A

30 Screw Swivel
1 05065 4 Each 1040A

40 Spring, Counterbalance (Standard)
1 12991 4 Each 1040A

50 Socket Head Screw 1/2-13 X 1/2
1 11322 4 Each 1040A

60 Set Screw, Nylon Tip, 1/2-13 X 1-1/2
14
Item Number: 17793

Item Description: Encoder Assembly,( Siemens FP-2)
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 16344 0 Each
5 Layout, Encoder Assembly, Prox Switch FP-2B
1 15808 1 Each
10 Subplate, APC Encoder Bracket, .75 X 5.31 X 8.63
1 08621 1 Each
20 Bearing Housing, APC Encoder
1 08622 1 Each
30 Drive Shaft, APC Encoder, 3/8" Dia.
1 08626 1 Each
40 Switch Housing, APC Encoder
1 08623 1 Each
50 Hinge, Bearing Housing, APC Encoder
1 08625 1 Each
60 Spacer, Inner, Bearing, APC Encoder
1 08627 1 Each
70 Housing Cover, APC Encoder
1 08628 1 Each
80 Pivot Pin, APC Encoder
1 10411 2 Each
90 Bearing, SKF 6205 2RSJEM
1 10771 1 Each
100 Lock Nut Whittet Higgins #BH-05 1940
1 10515 1 Each
110 Coupling, Double Loop 6183K34 3/8 x 3/8, 1942
1 15220 1 Each
120 Encoder,EPC,725N-S-S-360-R-HV-1-F-1-S-X-N-N
1 16281 1 Each
130 Sprocket. 35B45 w/.75 bore 3/16 x 3/32 KW(03180 Mod
1 08629 1 Each
140 Key, Sprocket, APC Encoder
15
1 10992 1 Each
150 Spring, Die Blue Round 1/2 X 2 1937
1 16279 1 Each
160 Guard, Sprocket Encoder Assembly Siemens FP-2B
1 16371 1 Each
170 Cover, Machined For Prox Pickup, RLS Sprocket Guard
1 16278 1 Each
180 Proximity Switch Bracket, Siemens FP-2B Press
1 16280 1 Each
190 Proximity Switch Target, FP-2B, Sprocket Mounted
1 13656 2 Each
200 Set Screw, Cup Point, 1/4-20 X 3/8
1 13685 1 Each
210 Set Screw, Cup Point, 5/8-11 X 1/2
1 13222 2 Each
220 Socket Head Screw 10-32 X 1/2
1 13223 4 Each
230 Socket Head Screw 10-32 X 5/8
1 12951 4 Each
240 Socket Head Screw 10-32 X 2
1 12952 2 Each
250 Socket Head Screw 1/4-20 X 1-1/2
1 10571 1 Each
260 Button Head Screw 1/4-20 X 1/2
16
Item Number: 00107

Item Description: Variable Feed Drive Assembly
Revision Level:
BOM Type: ENG. BOM

1 00097 1 Each 1500

10 Throw Arm
1 00101 1 Each 1500

20 Washer, 3/8" Thick, Feed Eccentric Plate
1 00198 1 Each 1500

30 Eccentric Hub (long Flange 1.88")
1 00243 1 Each 1500

40 Spacer, Feed Eccentric
1 04206 1 Each 1500

50 Key, Feed Eccentric FP-2
1 04853 1 Each 1500

60 Bearing, Roller, Throw Arm
1 10251 1 Each 1500

70 Washer, 1/4" Thick
1 11121 4 Each 1500

80 Washer, Hardened, 5/8"
1 13745 1 Each 1500

90 Variable Eccentric Plate Assembly
17
Item Number: 16250

Item Description: Pendent Arm Assembly, FP-2B Siemens, w/Vibro Mount LH Mount
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 00312 1 Each 1768

10 Pendent Base Assembly
1 15590 1 Each 1768

20 Pendent Arm, 48" Swing, 32.50" Drop
1 10158 2 Each 1768

30 Cover Plate, Pendent Arm
1 10154 1 Each 1768

40 Cover Plate, Top Pendent Bracket
1 10155 1 Each 1768

50 Cover Plate, Lower, Pendent Base
1 10290 1 Each 1768

60 Bearing, Thrust Washer Torrington TRD-4458
18
Item Number: 14797

Item Description: Schematic, Lubrication, FP-2B, 24 VDC
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 16358 1 Each
10 Pump, Trabon, MPP-GP1-NPT-A3-G3-L0-P5-S8 (24VDC)w/
1 10338 2 Each
20 Trabon Manifold MSP-NPT-MS-5-05T-05T-05T-40T-20S
1 11044 1 Each
30 Trabon Manifold MSP-NPT-MS-4-40S-40C-20T-20T
1 05051 1 Each
40 Stand Off, Limit Switch Lube System
1 05053 1 Each
50 Manifold, 1/8 NPT(2) Ports (Trabon Lube Block)
1 12142 1 Each
60 Switch,Honeywell,Micro 1Cform 9' Cord,914CE1-9
19
Item Number: 28009

Item Description: Hydraulic/Pneumatic Assemblies FP-2B-48-2331
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 17789 1 Each
20 Crown Valve Manifold Layout, FP-2B
1 17791 1 Each
30 Plumbing, Remote Circuit Breaker
1 17787 1 Each
40 Plumbing Layout FP-2B Right End
1 15551 1 Each
50 Upper Manifold, FP-2B Tie Rod
1 15558 1 Each
60 Lower Manifold, FP-2B Tie Rod
1 16275 1 Each
70 Mounting Block, Tubing Clip, FP-2B
1 17790 1 Each
100 L-O-X Blow Off Assembly, FP-2
1 17786 1 Each
120 Air Tank Assembly, FP-2B
1 17788 1 Each
130 Progression Changer Control / Plumbing, Rexroth Val
1 14820 1 Each
140 Switch, Pressure, 0-230psi, Herion 863224
1 28010 1 Each
150 Gag Valve Package Assembly, 1 Valve, 24vdc(FP-2B-48
1 20897 1 Each
160 Junction Block, Pressure Switch
20
Item Number: 28010

Item Description: Gag Valve Package Assembly, 1 Valve, 24vdc(FP-2B-48-2331)
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 12759 1 Each
10 Manifold, Daman, AD03P082S
1 14842 2 Each
20 Bracket, Hydraulic Manifold(Daman 8)
1 16500 1 Each
30 Valve, D03 Directional, 2 Pos.Double Sol., Detent,
1 10734 7 Each
40 Manifold Cover Plate, D03 Valve (AD03-CP-P)
1 13220 28 Each
50 Socket Head Screw 10-24 X 1-1/4
1 13516 28 Each
60 Washer, Lock, 1/4"
1 14875 28 each
80 Seal, 'O' Ring -012
1 15225 7 Each
90 Pin, Roll, 1/8 X 3/8, 92383A250
1 15061 16 Each
100 Fitting,P-H, 8HP5ON-S Hollow Hex Plug SAE
1 15062 2 Each
110 Fitting,P-H, 10HP5ON-S Hollow Hex Plug SAE
1 13073 4 Each
120 Socket Head Screw 5/16-18 X 1-1/4
1 13518 4 Each
130 Washer, Lock, 5/16"
1 13217 4 Each
140 Socket Head Screw 10-24 X 2
21
1 07821 2 Each
150 Hydra-Zorb Mounting Bracket
1 12818 2 Each
160 Clamp Assembly, Hydra Zorb 100050 (1/2" Tubing)
1 12817 2 Each
170 Clamp Assembly, Hydra Zorb 100075 (3/4" Tubing)
1 15158 4 Each
180 Fitting,P-H, 6-10-F5OX-S TL Str SAE
1 15152 4 Each
190 Fitting,P-H, 4-6-F5OX-S TL Str SAE
1 15351 1 Each
200 Fitting,P-H, 10-3/4-F5OG-S Str Male SAE/Fem NPT
1 15146 1 Each
210 Fitting,P-H, 8-C5BU-S FL 90 SAE
1 15134 1 Each
220 Fitting,P-H, 4-F5BU-S FL Str SAE
1 15181 1 Each
230 Fitting,P-H, 8-6-C5OX-S TL 90 SAE
1 11546 1 Each
240 SAE 37 Deg. Male Elbow, 3/8" Tube x 3/8" NPT
1 18574 4 Each
250 Button Head Screw M 6-1.00 X 12mm
1 11063 105.00 INCH

260 Tubing, CD Steel SMLS Hyd, 3/4" ODx .083" Wall x 20
1 11062 110.00 INCH

270 Tubing, CD Steel SMLS Hyd, 1/2" ODx .049" Wall x 20
1 14817 1 Each
280 Check Module, Double Pilot, Sandwich, DO3
1 15272 1 Each
290 Pressure Reducer, 22-928 psi, Sandwich, DO3 Direct
22
1 13900 1 Each
300 Gauge, Pressure 2021-2.5-1/4 CBM 0-1500 PSI
23
Item Number: 28011

Item Description: Electrical Schematic FP-2B-48-2331 BOTG D-
Revision Level: 1
BOM Type: MFG. BOM

1 12140 220.30 INCH

10 Rail,A-B,Din Mounting 35mmX7.5mmX1M,199DR1
1 15413 2 Each
20 Fuse,Bussmann,250V Fast,AGC-4
1 15414 1 Each
1 15415 2 Each
1 14890 4 Each
1 11376 1 Each
60 Box,Hoffman,Hinged 10X8X4, A-1008CH
1 11185 1 Each
70 Box,Hoffman,Panel 10X8,A-10P8G
1 11180 2 Each
80 Box,Hoffman,Hinged 12X10X5,A-1210CH
1 11186 2 Each
1 11188 2 Each
1 15370 2 Each
120 Box,Hoffman,Hinged 16X14X8,A-16148CH
1 19286 1 Each
130 Pendent Box / Control Panel, 20-1/2 x 23-1/2 (Metri
1 14637 1 Each
140 Box,Hoffman,Floor Stand Kit,AFK1210
24
1 14638 1 Each
150 Box,Hoffman,Enclosure Stabilizer,AENST
1 12005 4 Each
160 Terminal,Phoenix,Ground Bus AB/SS,0404428
1 12003 7 Each
170 Terminal,Phoenix,Ground Bus 16-6AWG,AK16,0404033
1 12002 1 Each
180 Terminal,Phoenix,Ground Bus 14-2AWG,AK35
1 12004 14.00 INCH

190 Terminal,Phoenix,Ground Bus 3X10mm,0402174
1 12001 13 Each
200 Terminal,Phoenix,Ground 12-24AWG,0441119
1 13781 22 Each
210 Terminal,Phoenix,Ground Bus AK4,0404017
1 14183 1 Each
220 Conn,Phoenix,Insert Female HC-HV03-I-PT-F,1407743
1 17550 1 Each
260 Terminal Block,A-B,1492-J3P
1 17551 1 Each
270 Terminal Block,A-B,Component Holder,1492-CPL
1 12078 143.80 INCH

280 Duct,Panduit,Cover White,C1WH6
1 12080 143.80 INCH

290 Duct,Panduit,Plastic Wiring White,F1X3WH6
1 12077 149.50 INCH

300 Duct,Panduit,Cover White,C1.5WH6
1 12079 149.50 INCH

310 Duct,Panduit,Plastic Wiring White,F1.5X3WH6
1 14957 1 Each
340 Conn,Amphenol, 97-3106A-18-1S
25
1 14956 1 Each
350 Conn,Amphenol,9767-18-10
1 14966 1 Each
355 Cont,Siemens,MSP20 11-16A 103,3RV1031-4AB10
1 26148 1 Each
360 MSP, Siemens 3RV2021-1EA10, 2.8-4.0 Amp Class 10
1 26151 0 Each
370 MSP, Siemens 3RV2021-1AA10, 1.0-1.6 Amp Class 10
1 26144 3 Each
380 Cont,Siemens,MSP Link Module DC,3RA2921-1BA00
1 14969 0 Each
390 Cont,Siemens,MSP Link Module DC 103,3RA1931-1B
1 14970 1 Each
400 Cont,Siemens,MSP DIN Rail Adapter 103,3RA1932-1AA00
1 26444 1 Each
410 Cont,Siemens,Relay Aux Cont CC 4NO,3RH2911-2FA40
1 14989 2 Each
420 Cont,Siemens,Cont Aux Cont Sc 2O Bot,3RH1921-1MA20
1 26146 0 Each
425 Cont,Siemens,Relay Adder Deck, 2NO,3RH2911-1MA20
1 14903 2 Each
430 Cont,Siemens,Relay SurgeSup 24DC MOV,3RT1916-1BB00
1 26436 6 Each
435 Cont,Siemens,Cont Surge Sup. 24VDC,3RT2916-1BB00
1 14963 0 Each
1 26142 2 Each
1 26145 2 Each
450 MSP, Siemens 3RV2021-1DA10, 2.2-3.2 Amp Class 10
26
1 26154 3 Each
460 Cont,Siemens,Relay 24V Cage 2NO 2NC,3RH2122-2BB40
1 26143 4 Each
470 Cont,Siemens,MSP Aux Cont Block,1NO 1NC,3RV2901-2E
1 15353 0 Each
480 Cont,Siemens,MSP Lineside Feeder 2-103,3RV1935-1A
1 15354 0 Each
490 Cont,Siemens,MSP Lineside Feed Lug 103,3RV1935-5A
1 15002 1 Each
500 Cont,Siemens,MSP Lineside Feeder 4 102,3RV1915-1CB
1 14972 1 Each
510 Cont,Siemens,MSP Lineside Feed Lug 102,3RV1925-5AB
1 26153 2 Each
530 Cont,Siemens,Contactor 24VDC 9A,3RT2023-1BB40
1 26150 1 Each
540 Cont,Siemens,Contactor 24VDC 25A,3RT2026-1BB40
1 15325 1 Each
550 Cont,Siemens,Cont 24V Cage 50A,3RT1036-3BB40
1 15352 1 Each
560 Cont,Siemens,MSP10 18-25A 103,3RV1031-4DA10
1 11904 1 Each
570 Fitting,Hubbell,St 1.25"ST Insulated,H1251
1 15329 1 Each
580 Cont,Siemens,Cont REV 24V 9A,3RA13178XB301BB4
1 15575 1 Each
590 Resistor (1/4w) 15K
1 20190 1 Each
600 Disc Flange,Square-D,Flange Cable,CSF30,Class9422,
1 20191 1 Each
610 Disc Flange,Square-D Cable Handle,Class9422-A1, Fla
27
1 14635 1 Each
620 Box,Hoffman,Disconnect Box & Handle,A48SA3810LPPL
1 14636 1 Each
630 Box,Hoffman,Panel,A48P36G
1 26018 5 Each
640 Conn, Murr, 24V, 5M Cord, 7000-18021-2160500
1 24309 0 Each
650 Conn, 24VDC, Numatics, 22mm Din Plug w/ Light
1 27804 1 Each
670 Conn, Murr, 24V, 5M Cord, 7000-18081-6160500
1 15381 1 Each
680 Prox.A-B,12mmS NO PNP,872C-DH3NP12-D4
1 15383 8 Each
690 Prox,Turck,4 Meter Cordset 12mm,St,4pin,3W4M RK4T-4
1 15342 4 Each
710 Terminal,Phoenix,UK 10-Twin End Bracket,1201413
1 15343 8 Each
720 Terminal,Phoenix,UK 10-Twin Partition Plt,1413272
1 15341 30 Each
730 Terminal,Phoenix,UK 10-Twin,3005196
1 15348 31 Each
740 End Bracket,Phoenix, Clipfix 35,3022218
1 15335 48 Each
750 Terminal,Phoenix,ST2.5 2-pos Jumper,3030161
1 15338 7 Each
760 Terminal,Phoenix,ST2.5-Twin End Cover,3030488
1 15339 2 Each
770 Terminal,Phoenix,ST2.5-Twin Partition Plt,3030789
1 15337 241 Each

780 Terminal,Phoenix,ST2.5-Twin,3031241
28
1 15906 12.00 INCH

790 Rail,Phoenix,Din Mounting 35mmX15mmX2M, 1201730
1 16234 9 Each
800 Terminal Block,Phoenix,Fused w/Indicator Light, 303
1 26149 3 Each
820 Cont,Siemens,Relay 24V Cage 4NO,3RH2140-2BB40
1 24125 4 Each
830 Plc,Siemens, Input Module 6ES7 3211BH02-0AA0
1 15295 11 Each
850 Plc,Siemens,ET200S 4D In 24VDC,6ES7 131-4BD01-0AA0
1 15349 1 Each
860 Plc,Siemens,ET200S 4D In,SRC 24VDC,6ES7 131-4BD510A
1 15296 7 Each
870 Plc,Siemens,ET200S 4DO 24V 2A,6ES7 132-4BD32-0AA0
1 15350 1 Each
880 Plc,Siemens,ET200S 2 Analog In,6ES7 134-4FB010AB0
1 15297 8 Each
890 Plc,Siemens,ET200S PM-E 24VDC,6ES7 138-4CA01-0AA0
1 15298 3 Each
900 Plc,Siemens,ET200S IM151I/F, 6ES7 151-1AA06-0AB0
1 15309 1 Each
910 Plc,Siemens,ET200M IM153-1,6ES7 153-1AA03-0XB0
1 15299 22 Each
920 Plc,Siemens,ET200S TME15C24A1,6ES7 193-4CA30-0AA0
1 15300 8 Each
930 Plc,Siemens,ET200S TMP15C23A0,6ES7 193-4CD30-0AA0
1 15539 1 Each
940 Plc,Siemens,CPU317-2DP, 6ES7317-2AK14-0AB0
1 15836 3 Each
960 Plc,Siemens,S7-300 Dig Out 16,6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0
29
1 15313 1 Each
980 Plc,Siemens,S7-300 Cnt FM350-1,6ES7 350-1AH03-0AE0
1 15314 19.00 INCH

990 Plc,Siemens,Din Rail 482MM,6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0
1 15301 8 Each
1,000 Plc,Siemens,I/O Con 20Pin Cage,6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0
1 15315 1 Each
1,010 Plc,Siemens,S7300 Memory Card 4MB,6ES7 953-8LM31-0A
1 15317 1 Each
1,020 PLC,Siemens,Profibus Repeater,6ES7 972-0AA02-0XA0
1 15316 4 Each
1,030 Conn,Siemens,Profibus w/oProg,6ES7 972-0BA52-0XA0
1 15302 3 Each
1,040 Conn,Siemens,Profibus w/Prog, 6ES7 972-0BB52-0XA0
1 15318 1,200.00 INCH

1,050 Cable PROFIBUS 1PR/24AWG PUR ML800+OD 8mm (Continuo
1 15384 1 Each
1,060 Conn,Woodhead,BH Profibus ST/F 5Pin,BA5S00-32
1 15323 1 Each
1,100 Cont,Siemens,Relay Safety,3TK2834-2BB40
1 16432 22 Each
1,140 Pb22,Siemens,Cont Block 1N.O.Spring, 3SB3403-0B
1 16433 19 Each
1,150 Pb22,Siemens,Cont Block 1N.C.Spring, 3SB3403-0C
1 16485 1 Each
1,160 Pb22,Siemens,Sel3 Spring Return To Center, Black, 3
1 16430 2 Each
1,170 Pb22,Siemens,Lampholder Green LED 24VDC,3SB3403-1PC
1 16419 1 Each
1,180 Pb22,Siemens,Mom Flat Black,3SB3500-0AA11
30
1 16420 1 Each
1,190 Pb22,Siemens,Mom Flat Green,3SB3500-0AA41
1 16421 2 Each
1,200 Pb22,Siemens,Mom Raised Red,3SB3500-0BA21
1 16423 2 Each
1,210 Pb22,Siemens,Mom Mush40 Black,3SB3500-1GA11
1 16424 1 Each
1,220 Pb22,Siemens,Mom Mush40 Yellow,3SB3500-1GA31
1 16429 3 Each
1,230 Pb22,Siemens,P-P Mush Red,3SB3500-1HA20
1 16425 3 Each
1,240 Pb22,Siemens,Sel2 Maint Black, 3SB3500-2PA11
1 16426 2 Each
1,250 Pb22,Siemens,Sel3 Maint Black, 3SB3500-2SA11
1 16427 1 Each
1,260 Pb22,Siemens,Selkey3 Maint Remove All, 3SB3500-4PD1
1 16428 1 Each
1,270 Pb22,Siemens,Selkey3 Maint Key,A6X30082010, Z=SSG15
1 16422 2 Each
1,280 Pb22,Siemens,III Mom Flat Green,3SB3501-0AA41
1 16436 5 Each
1,290 Pb22,Siemens,Adapter PB 3Element, 3SB3901-0AB
1 16437 2 Each
1,300 Pb22,Siemens,Adapter SS 3Element, 3SB3901-0AC
1 16927 10 Each
1,310 Pb22, Siemens, Hole Plug Black Plastic 3SB3921-OAA
1 16438 2 Each
1,320 Pb22,Siemens,Guard 40mm Mush,3SB3921-0BF
1 20328 2 Each
1,330 Conn,Phoenix,Insert Female HC-M-05 MOD/BUZ,5 Pin Sp
31
1 20330 1 Each
1,340 Conn,Phoenix,EMC Contact Carrier, HC-M-EMV-MOD-ST,
1 16677 1 Each
1,350 Filter, Schaffner, FN258-30/33, 3Phase 480V 30A
1 17049 2 Each
1,380 Terminal Block Cover,Phoenix,D-2,5-Quattro 3030514
1 16058 15.00 Feet

1,410 Wire,Olfex,Unitronic-FD CP Paired 24AWG 4Pair, 3092
1 11219 1.00 Feet

1,420 Conduit,EMT 1.00"X10'
1 11924 2 Each
1,430 Fitting,Regal,EMT 1.00"Comp Ins,603-S
1 11303 2 Each
1,440 Fitting,Appleton,St .500"45 Insulated,STB4550
1 11304 3 Each
1 11306 1 Each
1,460 Fitting,Hubbell,St .750"45 Insulated,H07541
1 11308 3 Each
1,470 Fitting Appleton,St .750"ST Insulated
1 11307 3 Each
1 11311 1 Each
1,490 Fitting,Appleton,St 1.00"ST Insulated
1 11309 1 Each
1,500 Fitting,Hubbell,St 1.00"45 Insulated,K10041
1 11299 2 Each
1,520 Fitting,Appleton,Cg 1/2" .312-.437,CG3150S
1 11919 1 Each
1,530 Fitting,Pyle National, Cg 1/2"X2Hole,DB9214
32
1 13756 1 Each
1,540 Fitting,Appleton,St Orange 1.00" 90,STNM-90100
1 13754 3 Each
1,550 Fitting,Appleton,St Orange 1.00" St,STNM-100
1 12334 2 Each
1,560 Fitting,Appleton,St Orange 1.50" St,STNM150
1 12090 1 Each
1,565 Fitting,Appleton,Entrance Elbow 1.50",SLAY-150A
1 11298 1 Each
1,570 Fitting,Appleton,Cg 1/2" .187-.312,CG1850S
1 11211 10.00 Feet

1,580 Conduit,Carlon,FNMC .500"X100',15005-100
1 11212 20.00 Feet

1,590 Conduit,Carlon,FNMC .750"X100',15007-100
1 11213 2.00 Feet

1,600 Conduit,Carlon,FNMC 1.00"X100',15008-100
1 13749 31.00 Feet

1,610 Conduit,Liquitite, FNMC Orange 1.00", LNMP13
1 12330 27.00 Feet

1,620 Conduit,Electriflex,FNMC Orange 1.50",LNMP15
1 11214 7.00 Feet

1,625 Conduit,Carlon,FNMC 1.25"X100',15009-100
1 16235 1 Each
1,630 Fitting,Appleton,Unilet LB Al 1.00"NPT,LB100-A
1 17327 1 Each
1,640 Fitting,Appleton,Unilet Cover .750",K750-A
1 16966 1 Each
1,650 Fitting,Appleton,Unilet Gasket Rubber .750",GK75-N
1 11903 1 Each
1,660 Fitting,Appletonl,St 1.25"90 Insulated,STB90125
33
1 15923 1 Each
1,690 Fitting Appleton, 3/4" Tee, T75A
1 12029 60.00 Feet

1,720 Wire,Olflex,Cord 190, 18AWG, 3-Con, 601803
1 12019 2,700.00 Feet

1,730 Wire,16AWG TFFN Blue (2500' Spool)
1 12011 160.00 Feet

1,740 Wire,12AWG THHN Green/Yellow,2500' Spool
1 12010 500.00 Feet

1,750 Wire,12AWG THHN Black,2500' Spool
1 12008 250.00 Feet

1,760 Wire,10AWG THHN Black,2500' Spool
1 15840 180.00 Feet

1,770 Wire,12AWG TFFN Blue,2500' (Plastic Spool)
1 24828 1 Each
1,790 TScrn, Siemens, 6AV2 124-0MC01-0AX0, TP1200 12" Wid
1 24829 1 Each
1,800 Protective Membrane, TScrn TP1200, Siemens, 6AV2 12
1 26339 1 Each
1,810 Memory Card, 2G, Simatic HMI, 6AV2 181-8XP00-0AX0
1 20192 2 Each
1,960 Disc Flange,Square-D, Lug Cover Kit,60A, S37446 for
1 20189 1 Each
1,970 Disc CB,Square-D,Circuit Breaker 60A,600v,3-pole,
1 15017 1 Each
1,980 Hourmeter,Redington,Round 24VDC,731-0046
1 20329 1 Each
1,990 Conn,Phoenix,Hinge Retainer Frame, HC-M-MHR-A4-N, 1
1 20331 1 Each
2,000 Conn,Phoenix,EMC, Plug Connector, HC-MOD-EMV-BU/3-9
34
1 20332 2 Each
2,010 Conn,Phoenix,Female Crimp Contacts, CK1.6ED-0.37BU
1 15078 0 Each
2,030 Conn,Phoenix,16 1Latch BoxBase&Cover 2PG21,1771697
1 11242 0 Each
2,040 Conn,Phoenix,16 Insert Female Screw 1-16,1771464 .
1 16366 1 Each
2,050 Swivel Bearing Assembly for Shock Mount Pendent Box
1 23584 2 Each
2,080 Power Supply, Puls, 24VDC 20A, Din Rail Mount, QT20
1 24165 2 Each
2,110 Cont,A-B,Relay Safety, MSR142RTP, 440R-G23216
1 24986 2 Each
2,140 Cable Entry Plate, Murrplastik, KDP 24/22, 87301160
1 24985 1 Each
2,150 Terminal Block,Phoenix,Fused AC 3036385
1 15924 1 Each
2,180 Fitting Appleton, Reducing Bushing, RB75-50
1 14684 1 Each
2,190 FittingAppleton,Reducing Bushing,RB100-75
1 11168 1 Each
2,200 Adapter, PG21 to 3/4"NPT Female
1 17039 1 Each
2,210 Cable, MURP-19FR-3
1 26152 2 Each
2,220 MSP, Siemens 3RV2021-1KA10, 9.0-12.5 Amp Class 10
1 14971 1 Each
2,230 Cont,Siemens,MSP Lineside Feeder 3 102,3RV1915-1BB
1 11932 1 Each
2,240 Fuse,Bussmann,250V Delay,MDL-5
35
1 15077 1 Each
1 14056 1 Each
1 17281 12 Each
2,270 Stud/Plate Vibration Mount 10-32 x 3/8" Stud, Neopr
1 27091 1 Each
2,280 Fitting,Phoenix,Bushing, 1686863, M32 Male to 1" NP
1 14990 1 Each
2,290 Cont,Siemens,Cont Aux Cont Sc 4NO,3RH1921-1FA40
36
Item # Detail # Qty Description Material Drawing # REVISIONS
1 1513R 1 YOKE - STANDARD PROG CHGR AISI 4140 219248 LOC DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED DRAFTED CHECKED
A NOW ASSEMBLY WAS A SINGLE PIECE OF C.R.S. THAT WAS HARDENED 12/9/2004 EHB
2 1513RB 2 BUSHING - LINKAGE ROD CLEVIS PURCHASED PART FROM CARR LANE 219249
2 1
BUSHINGS TO BE FLUSH
WITH THESE SURFACES
PRESS BUSHINGS IN SO THAT THEY ARE FLUSH

WITH INNER SURFACE
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

FL Burr Oak Tool and Gauge
Company, Inc.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MACH #
Sturgis, Michigan U.S.A.
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
TOLERANCES: MATERIAL
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
LINKAGE ROD CLEVIS ASSY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FEED SYSTEM
THREE PLACE DECIMAL: .003
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 RIGHT HAND
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Eric Berg 12/9/2004
THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA
CONTAINED HEREIN IS THE
BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES SCALE: 1:1 SIZE DRAWING NO.
C
45° CHAMFER ALL HOLES
104375
EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF BURR OAK DETAIL NO.
TOOL AND GAUGE COMPANY AND
MAY NOT BE DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT.
(1) REQ'D. 1513R
PRINT DATE: 11/15/2016
DETAIL #5251LP
Q.C. BOTTOM PLATE DETAIL #5251CC
STAFFORD HIGH STRENGTH
REF. B-119038 CLAMP TYPE COLLAR (ALUM)
REF. B-175973 (1/16") 2-3/4" BORE
PART # CL-44-A
DEATIL #5251AS
DETAIL #5251TP Q.C. ARC ADJUSTING STUD
Q.C. TOP PLATE DETAIL #5252L
REF. C-119040 STUD 1"-14 LEFT HAND
REF. B-119036 NON-B FP2 REF. C-199624
FP4 REF. C182321 REF. A-104373
NON-B FP2 REF. A-199626
1/4" ROLL PIN
1/4" ROLL PIN

DETAIL #5251MP
Q.C. MIDDLE PLATE
REF. B-119037 DETAIL #5005
CONNECTING CLEVIS
1/8" ROLL PIN
REF. C-104368
DETAIL #5251OR
DETAIL#5295 O-RING PURCH.
CONNECTOR ROD DETROIT BALL
CYLINDER BEARING
CAT.# 568-213
REF. PURCH
DETAIL #5251AR
Q.C. ADJUSTING RING
REF. C-119039
0
2.500
11.000
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

Company, Inc.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 FP-2B, FP-3, & FP-3B QUICK CHANGE
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FEED ADJUSTMENT PROG. CHANGER
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Jeff Mishler 12/29/2005

CYLINDER RETRACTED SCALE: 1:1 SIZE DRAWING NO.
C 119043
(1) REQ'D 5251A
Item # Detail # Qty Description Drawing # REVISIONS
1 5030 1 LINKAGE ARM 99990 LOC DESCRIPTION DATE APPR
2 5031 1 BEARING, TORRINGTON - B-1616 313009

3 PURCH 1 GREASE ZERK - 1/4-28 340640
4 PURCH 1 3/8-16 X 1-1/4 SHCS 300394
4
1
FIN LINE
DEPT. SOP # QTY.
FL Burr Oak Tool Inc.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MACH # Sturgis, Michigan U.S.A.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
LINKAGE ARM ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010

SCALE: 1:2 SIZE DRAWING NO.
A 216782
TOOL INC. AND MAY NOT BE
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
(2) REQ'D 5030A
BY REV. DESCRIPTION DATE AUTHY
1 5262SP 1 CLEVIS PULL PIN 137145
AG 1 RECREATED BECAUSE OF CORRUPT FILE 5/1/2008
2 5207 1 KNOB 143732
3 PURCHASE 1 5/16-18 x 1 SHCS 323044
4 PURCH 1 LYNCH PIN 314745
4 1
3
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
CROWN PULL PIN ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FEED SYSTEM
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Arlene Garfield 5/1/2008

A
216783
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
(1) REQ'D. 5262SP
Item # Detail # Qty Description Drawing # 1
REVISIONS
BY REV. DESCRIPTION DATE AUTHY
1 5007 1 YOKE 104367 AG 1 Added BOM & CHANGED TO AN ASSEMBLY DRAWING FORMAT 7/15/2008
2 5008B 2 BRONZE BUSHING, 302393 CS 2 WAS 1.000/1.005 8/10/2012
3 PURCH 1 McGILL MR 12 312981

4
3
2
4
PRESS #302393 BUSHING INTO 'A' HOLE

THEN BORE 1.000/1.003 DIA. (2) PLC'S.
2 2
FIN LINE
DEPT. FL SOP # QTY.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED Burr Oak Tool Inc.
DIMENSIONS IN METRIC DIMENSIONS IN INCHES MACH # Sturgis, Michigan U.S.A.
ASME/ANSI B18.3.1M-1986 TOLERANCES:
ASME/ANSI B18.2.8-1999 FRACTIONAL: 1/64
MATERIAL
UNITS = mm
METRIC REF.
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 ALUM 7075-T651
YOKE (ASS'Y ONLY)
1 PLACE .50 = .020"
2 PLACE .25 = .010" FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005
2 X 4-1/4 X 6-1/2 SAW CUT STANDARD PROG. CHANGER
3 PLACE .08 = .003"
4 PLACE .003 = .0001"
2 PLACE DOWEL HOLE LOCATION:
NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Arlene Garfield 7/15/2008
TOLERANCE = .013mm = .0005"
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL
BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES WITH 3/32 RADIUS SCALE: 1:1 SIZE DRAWING NO.
B
216786
THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN IS THE DETAIL NO.
EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF BURR OAK TOOL INC. AND MAY
NOT BE DISCLOSED TO OTHERS WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT. (1) REQ'D 5007
Item # Detail # Qty Description Drawing #
1 1536W1 1 H.R.S.
2 1536W2 1 H.R.S.
3 1536W3 2 H.R.S.
4 1547A 1 FEED LINKAGE ROD ASSY 220031
5 5030 2 LINKAGE ARM 99990
6 5031 2 BEARING, TORRINGTON - B-1616 313009
5251 OR
328478 7 PURCH 5 GREASE ZERK - 1/4-28 340640
8 PURCH 2 3/8-16 X 1-1/4 SHCS 300394
9 PURCH 2 FLANGE BEARING, DODGE, PILOTED GP 314744
10 PURCH 3 FLANGE BEARING, DODGE 314743
5251TP 11 5209 1 FEED SHAFT 120279
12 1535 1 MOUNTING BRACKET 82875
13 5210 2 FEED ARM 99988
5251SP 5210A/526
14 A 2 FEED ARM INSERT 99991
15 5023 2 STUD - BEARING 117414
5251MP
16 5024 2 RETAINER, BEARING 117412
31 17 5022 2 COVER BEARING 117413
5251LP
18 5026 2 BEARING, McGILL - MR-20-N 312984
19 5027 2 INNER RACE, McGILL - MI-16-N 312982
5251BP
20 2 CR-FHM1 0.375-16x1x1-N
5251SP 21 5006 1 CONNECTING CLEVIS PIN 123317
22 5262SP 1 CLEVIS PULL PIN 137145
23 5207 1 KNOB 143732
24 1 FEED ECCENTRIC PLATE/VARIABLE 00095
5251AR
25 1 ECCENTRIC STUD 00098
26 1 ADJUSTING SCREW 00099
27 1 WASHER, HARDENED 00101
28 1 BEARING, INNER RACE, RBC IR7325 14649
29 1 FEED ECCENTRIC SPACER 00243
30 1 BEARING, ROLLER RBC SJ7325 14648
31 1 THROW ARM 00097
306105 1535
32 1 WASHER, HARDENED 00101
PURCH 33 PURCH 1 McGILL MR 12 312981
34 5251A 1 FP-2B, FP-3, & FP-3B QUICK CHANGE 119043
5251AS 35 5001A 2 RETAINER INSERT 124445
5024 5023 36 5001R 1 MOUNTING BLOCK 117400
37 5009 2 SHAFT SLIDE 125237
5210A/526A
38 5012 1 STOP SHAFT BLOCK 104371
5018W
39 5013 2 NUT, 3/4-16 THREAD 124448
5252L 5026 40 5013W 2 PLAIN WASHER (MODIFIED) 104395
310235 41 5015A 2 BUMPER RETAINER PLATE 104370
5032
5018 5001A 5022 42 5015B 2 BUMPER 25556H
5018 5006
5217S 5005 43 5018 2 NUT, MODIFIED - RH THREAD 381154
13 44 5018W 2 PLAIN WASHER (MOD. & MACH.) 104396
5027 45 PURCH 1 HYDRO-LINE CYLINDER, LR-5F 310235
PURCH
5015B
5009 46 5007 1 YOKE 104367
309625
47 5008B 2 BRONZE BUSHING, 302393
5022 49 5034 1 SET SCREW, 3/4-16 X 3/8" LONG 321737
5018W 5001R 50 5032 1 PIVOT SHAFT STD. 218022
9 5013W 51 5217S 1 PROGRESSION CHANGER 116076
5009 5015A 52 PURCH 2 FITTING, PARKER, 6-8 FTX-S, MALE, NPT 309625
5024 53 5217 1 PROGRESSION CHANGER 116075
PURCH 5015B
5026
5027
5034
5023
1
5210A/526A
10 5008B 5012
5015A
5013
PURCH 13
5030 11
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

5031
5030 Company, Inc.
104381 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MACH #
4 FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
FEED SYSTEM ASSEMBLY
53 ANGULAR: 1
104376 1547 TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 STD. 2:1, FP2-48
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 QUICK CHANGE CYL. & CONN. ROD
6
22 PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Jeff Mishler 2/1/2006
104375 THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA
D 217478
23 EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF BURR OAK DETAIL NO.
(1) REQ'D 5000
ITEM NO. DetailNo DESCRIPTION DrawingNo QTY.
1 1003 SUPPORT BRIDGE 217836 B 1
2 1001WL SUPPORT BRACKET WELDMENT 217809 1
3 1001WR SUPPORT BRACKET WELDMENT 217810 1
4 1001C SUPPORT BLOCK FOR BRIDGE 217804 2
5 1002 SPACER FOR BRIDGE 217828 1
REVISIONS
LOC DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED DRAFTED CHECKED
A SUPPORT BRACKETS REDESIGNED 5/7/2008 EB EB EB
B WAS ITEM 217835 WHICH WAS FOR A FP2-42 BRIDGE 2/29/2016 S.MINER
DEPT. SO # QTY.

FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
DIE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 STANDARD BAR TYPE, FP-2-48

D 217794
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
1001
Item # Detail # Qty Description Material Drawing #
1 5001A 2 RETAINER INSERT C.R.S. C1018 124445

2 5001R 1 MOUNTING BLOCK AISI 7075-T651 ALUMINUM 117400
3 5006 1 CONNECTING CLEVIS PIN BLACK OXIDED DOWEL PIN 123317
4 5009 2 SHAFT SLIDE Steel, C1018, 1-3/4" Dia. (#303630) 125237
5 5012 1 STOP SHAFT BLOCK AISI 2024 ALUM 104371
6 5013 2 NUT, 3/4-16 THREAD NUT 3/4-16 THREAD 124448
7 5013W 2 PLAIN WASHER (MODIFIED) 3/4 SAE 1-1/2 O.D. 104395
8 5015A 2 BUMPER RETAINER PLATE ALUM 2024-T351 104370
9 5018 2 NUT, MODIFIED - RH THREAD PURCH M24X2.0 NUT - RH THREAD (GP 381154
380250)
10 5018W 2 PLAIN WASHER (MOD. & MACH.) 1" SAE 2" O.D. 104396
11 PURCH 1 HYDRO-LINE CYLINDER, LR-5F 1-1/2 X 3" STROKE 5/8" ROD 310235
13 5007 1 YOKE (ASS'Y ONLY) ALUM 7075-T651 216786
14 5034 1 SET SCREW, 3/4-16 X 3/8" LONG 321737
15 5217S 1 PROGRESSION CHANGER KEY STOCK 116076
18 PURCH 2 FITTING, PARKER, 6-8 FTX-S, MALE, NPT PURCHASED 309625
17 5015B 2 BUMPER PURCH 25556H
18 5032 1 PIVOT SHAFT STD. Steel, Stressproof, 2" Dia. (#314019) 218022
5001R
5018
11
5001A 18
5018W
5006
13
5015A
5032
5217S
5012 5009
5015A
5015A
5013W
5007
5013
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

5007 FL Burr Oak Tool and Gauge
Company, Inc.
5034 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
5015B TOLERANCES: MATERIAL

FRACTIONAL: 1/64 PROGRESSION CHANGER ASSY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 STD 2:1, QUICK CHANGE

C 218564
5100
1 5210 1 FEED ARM 99988
2 5210A/526A 1 FEED ARM INSERT 99991
3 5023 1 STUD - BEARING 117414
5 5022 1 COVER BEARING 117413
6 5026 1 BEARING, McGILL - MR-20-N 312984 2
8 PURCH 1 CR-FHM1 0.375-16x1x1-N 300617
7
5
FIN LINE
DEPT. SOP # QTY.
8 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MACH # Sturgis, Michigan U.S.A.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
FEED LINKAGE ARM ASSY, LH
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 STANDARD

CONTAINED HEREIN IS THE SCALE: 1:2 SIZE DRAWING NO.
B 220026
EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF BURR OAK
TOOL INC. AND MAY NOT BE DETAIL NO.
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT. 5210LA
1 5210 1 FEED ARM 99988
2 5210A/526A 1 FEED ARM INSERT 99991
3 5023 1 STUD - BEARING 117414
5 5022 1 COVER BEARING 117413
6 5026 1 BEARING, McGILL - MR-20-N 312984
8 PURCH 1 CR-FHM1 0.375-16x1x1-N 300617
5
6
1
7
FIN LINE
DEPT. SOP # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
FEED LINKAGE ARM ASSY, RH
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 STANDARD

B 220027
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT. 5210RA
Item # Detail # QTY Description Drawing # REVISIONS
1 1513R 1 LINKAGE ROD CLEVIS 104376 BY REV. DESCRIPTION DATE AUTHY
2 1513R 1 LINKAGE ROD CLEVIS ASSY 104375 AG 1 ORIGINAL RELEASE 12/10/2007
3 1514 1 CLEVIS PIN 104381
4 1547 1 FEED LINKAGE ROD 104379
5 5018 1 NUT, MODIFIED - RH THREAD 124446
6 5019 1 NUT, MODIFIED - LH THREAD 124447
7 PURCHASE 2 5/16-18 X 1/2 Set Screw
7 4
5 2
3
1 6
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
FEED LINKAGE ROD ASSY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FP-2
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 STANDARD
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Eric Berg 4/12/2005
B 220031
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT. (1) REQ'D. 1547A
Item # Detail # Quantity Description Drawing #
1 4001 1 LEFT HAND SIDE PLATE 106487
2 4013 4 FEED SHAFT MOUNTING BLOCK 114449
3 4001A 1 RIGHT HAND SIDE PLATE 106488
4 4108A 1 SUPPORT, BTM CVR PL, LH BACK 114451
5 4108B 1 SUPPORT, BTM CVR PL, RH BACK 114450
6 4004B 1 CYLINDER MOUNTING PLATE 114025
7 4108 2 BOTTOM COVER PLATE SUPPORT 114445
8 4004A 1 CYLINDER MOUNTING PLATE 114033
9 4003 1 TOP HOLD PLATE 114016 33
10 4067 2 FRONT PLATE SPACER 114458
11
12
4022
4064
2
2
FEED STOP BAR
SPACER, STOCK COVER
114446
114448
28
13 4109 1 FRONT BOTTOM COVER PLATE 114020
14 4110 1 REAR BOTTOM COVER PLATE 55476
15 PURCHASE 1 Air Cylinder 310206
16 PURCHASE 4 PANCAKE CYLINDER 310318
17 4009 2 FEED GUIDE SHAFT 117637
18 4016 4 BEARING BLOCK, BACK 114453 34 35 37
19 4023 2 GAGE STOP 114459 9
20 4004C 1 MOVING CYL. MOUNTING PLATE 135005
21 4004 1 CYLINDER MOUNTING PLATE 114022
22 4043 1 FEED CYLINDER ROD END 134697 10
24 4043B 4 STAT. PANCAKE CYL. ROD END 117635
13
25 4043S 4 PANCAKE CYL. ROD END STUD 117636
26 4008 2 TEE NUT 114457
27 4028A 1 BACK RAIL NUT R.H. 114462
28 4007A 1 RH GUIDE RAIL SQ. HEAD 114455
29 4006 1 GUIDE RAIL, LH 114463 26
30 4007 1 LH GUIDE RAIL SQ. HEAD 114454
31 4006A 1 GUIDE RAIL, R.H. 114464 14
32 4028 1 BACK RAIL NUT L.H. 114461
33
34
4005
4059
1
2
TOP FEED PLATE
MOVING STOCK HOLD-DOWN
114012
114460
31
35 4060 2 STATIONARY STOCK HOLD DOWN 114456
36 PURCHASE 4 THOMSON BEARING RESILENT MT. 314654
37 4011 1 STOCK COVER ASSY 176574 11
38 4025S 2 MOUNTING PLATE, STOCK LACER 71615
39 4081 1 MANIFOLD, AIR 71616
40 4043A 2 MOVING PANCAKE CYL. ROD END 117634
41 1 36 27 29
12
30
18 32
3 15
17 24
5 25
7
16
39
6 8
20
38
19
22
1
FIN LINE
DEPT. SO # QTY.
FL
21 Burr Oak Tool Inc.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 FIN STOCK LACER
ANGULAR: 1
4 2
LACER ASSY, SWING AWAY, 40, LH Control
FP-2-48 & FP-4-48
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY 11/13/2008
D 220249
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
4000S234
Item # Detail # Qty Description Material Drawing #
2 5295 1 CYLINDER PISTON ROD 1-1/4" DIA. GP 326389
4 5018 1 NUT, MODIFIED - RH THREAD PURCH 1"-14 NUT - RH THREAD (GP 314430) 124446
6 5252R 1 CONNECTING ROD STUD FATIGUE - PROOF STEEL 104372
GLUE STUD IN PLACE AND THEN

PUT NUT IN PLACE
DEPT. SOP # QTY.


FRACTIONAL: 1/64 CYLINDER ASSY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 UT 2 X 12-1/2 X 1-1/4
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Mark Rudy 2/25/2010

RETRACTED FOR 2:1 QUICK CHANGE SCALE: 1:2 SIZE DRAWING NO.
C 383673
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
5295
REVISIONS
ZONE REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED

1 ADDED DIMENSIONS FOR "A" 6/9/2010 S.R.
1.110
1"
.555 4903 CHAIN ADJUSTING BLOCK
.50 MAT'L: C-1018 1 x 1.110 x 2-1/4
A- M8 X 1.25 TAP THRU. (1) PL.

.50
B B- .344 DIA. DRILL THRU.
1.13 .561 DIA. C'BORE X .344 DEEP (2) PL.
A
1.25 2 1/4"
B
1
ENGRAVE
AS SHOWN
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES TOLERANCES: MATERIAL
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FRACTIONAL: 1/64
C-1018 1 x 1.110 x 2-1/4
CHAIN ADJUSTING BLOCK
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 DTO REMOVAL ASSIST
CHAMFER ALL HOLES 45° X .010 FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 DTO
DEEP UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Brian Killian 12/31/2009
.047 RADIUS ON PART PERIMETER
A 392925
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. TOOL INC. AND MAY NOT BE
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
4903
5 5/8" REF.
4.50 1.110
.63 1.50
.50
.551 THRU ALL
.344
M16X2.0 - 6H THRU ALL
.63
A
2 1/4"
.63
20.25
.797 1.48
1.25 ENGRAVE AS SHOWN .058
1.50
4904 FRONT SPROCKET MTG. BLOCK

MAT'L: C-1018 1.110 X 2-1/4 X 5-5/8
A- .797 +.003/-.000 DIA. C'BORE X .058 ±.001 DEEP.
M16 X 2.0 TAP THRU (1) PL.
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

FRONT SPROCKET MTG. BLOCK
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
ANGULAR: 1 C-1018 1.110 X 2-1/4 X 5-5/8
CHAMFER ALL HOLES 45° X .010
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 DTO
B 392927
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT. 4904
REVISIONS
LOC DESCRIPTION DATE APPR
.500 1 MOVED ENGRAVING 4/11/2014 BK
R.150 .150
A A 4906 CHAIN ATTACHMENT BLOCK

R.050 MAT'L: C-1018 1.916 X 2 X 4
A- .166 DIA. DRILL THRU (2) PL.
1.766
B- M8 X 1.25 TAP THRU (4) PL.
1.916
4"
1.00
2.750 .625
B B
.415
R.050
.208
.625
1.250 2"
B B
ENGRAVE OPP.
SIDEAS SHOWN
1 FINLINE
DEPT. SOP # QTY.
CHAIN ATTACHMENT BLOCK
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
ANGULAR: 1 C-1018 1.916 X 2 X 4
CHAMFER ALL HOLES 45° X .010
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 METRIC DTO
B 392946
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
.750 4.250 4.250
.500
1"
M8 X 1.25 TAP THRU (3) PL.
10"
1"
ENGRAVE AS SHOWN
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. FRACTIONAL: 1/64
C1018 1 X 1 X 10
CART STOP BLOCK
ANGULAR: 1
CHAMFER ALL HOLES 45° X .010 FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 DTO
BREAK EDGES WITH 3/64" RADIUS SCALE: 1:2 SIZE DRAWING NO.
A
392948
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. TOOL INC. AND MAY NOT BE
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
(1) REQ'D. 4238
4
1 2919 1 PISTON CLEVIS 402936 LOC DESCRIPTION DATE APPR
REPLACED WASHERS ON DOOR WITH
1 3/11/2011 BK
2 PURCH 1 NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING 402913 DAMPER DOOR CLAMP BAR
REDESIGNED CYLINDER & CYLINDER
3 2 LINKAGE 6/18/2012 BK
3 2926 1 OPERATING ARM 402907
4 2926 4 OPERATING ARM CAP 402920 5
5 PURCH 1 HEADLESS FIXTURE PIN 402937 2
6 PURCH 4 GREASE FITTING PURCH
16
7 PURCH 1 DOOR CYLINDER 421974
6 7
8 2916A 1 AIR CYLINDER BRACKET ECCENTRIC 421946 8 9
9 PURCH 1 3/8 X 1 1/2" SHSS 301038
10 PURCH 2 FLOW CONTROL 314649
11 PURCH 2 3/8" - 1/4" ELBOW PURCH
1
12 2914 1 PIVOT BAR 402941
14 15
13 2909 2 DAMPER DOOR 403143
10
14 PURCHASE 8 M6 X 16MM Dowel Pin 10
15 PURCH 24 M6 X 1.0 X 16MM SHCS 318928
16 2899W 1 SUCTION TOWER LINKAGE GUARD 403207
17 2913 1 DAMPER DOOR CENTER 403153
18 2914 2 PIVOT BAR 402939
19 2909A 4 DAMPER DOOR CLAMP BAR 406276
20 2913 1 DAMPER DOOR CENTER 403152
17
21 PURCH 2 RUBBER SEAL 426519 11
22 PURCH 2 RUBBER SEAL 426519 18
23 2952 2 ADJUSTING RING 402878 13 19
24 PURCH 6 BEARING, DODGE #SC 2B 5/8" 314648 11 15
25 2903W 1 SUCTION TOWER WELDMENT ASSY. 403155 33 14
26 PURCH 3 M8 X 1.25 X 16MM SHCS
12 20
27 PURCH 3 M8 NARROW WASHER 422550
28 2926 3 OPERATING ARM 402914 23
29 PURCH 3 SPHERICAL BEARING 406172
18
30 2999 3 CONNECTOR LINK RETAINER 402905
31 2929 1 CONNECTING LINK 402888
32 2899W 1 SUCTION TOWER LINKAGE GUARD 403201
15
33 PURCH 4 RUBBER SEAL
14
19
13
21
6
32 22
23
26
27
28
4 24
29 25
30
31
DEPT. SO # QTY.
DIMENSIONS IN METRIC DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
ASME/ANSI B18.3.1M-1986 TOLERANCES: MATERIAL
ASME/ANSI B18.2.8-1999
UNITS = mm
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
ANGULAR: 1 SEE CALLOUT
SUCTION TOWER ASSEMBLY
METRIC REF.
1 PLACE .50 = .020"
2 PLACE .25 = .010"
TWO PLACE DECIMAL:
THREE PLACE DECIMAL:
.010
.003
EXTERNAL LINKAGE
3 PLACE .08 = .003"
4 PLACE .003 = .0001"
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 METRIC
2 PLACE DOWEL HOLE LOCATION: NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Brian Killian 11/16/2010
D
402876
DETAIL NO.
THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN IS THE
NOT BE DISCLOSED TO OTHERS WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT.
2903
1 2952W1 2 ADJUSTING RING SIDE BAR 402879
2 2952W2 2 ADJUSTING RING MIDDLE SIDE BAR 402886
A A A A A 2 1/2" REF.
2" REF.
WW WW WW
4 25/32" B
1
A A
4 1/2"
4 25/32" B
2 1/4"
2
A A +1/8"
21 1/8" 17 1/8"
- 0"
2 1/4"
2
B
4 25/32"
A A 4 1/2"
1 B
4 25/32"
WW WW WW
A A A A A
1"
4 25/32" 4 25/32" 4 25/32" 4 25/32"
21 1/8"
A) 6.8mm THRU LOCATE BY JIG AT TOWER (16) PLC'S.
+1/8" B) 7.1mm X 3/4 SLOT (16) REQ'D

17 1/8" REF.
- 0"
5/16" REF. TYP. 29/64" TYP.
4 1/2" 2 1/4" 2 1/4" 4 1/2"
STACKER
DEPT. SO # QTY.
B FL Burr Oak Tool Inc.
B B B Sturgis, Michigan U.S.A.
DIMENSIONS IN METRIC DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
UNITS = mm MATERIAL
METRIC REF.
0 PLACE .50 = .020"
TOLERANCES:
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
ADJUSTING RING
1 PLACE .25 = .010" ANGULAR: 1
2 PLACE .08 = .003" TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 SUCTION TOWER
3 PLACE .003 = .0001" THREE PLACE DECIMAL: .003
1 1/4" REF. TYP. FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 STRAIGHT ARM, METRIC
31/32" TYP. 2 PLACE DOWEL HOLE LOCATION: NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Brian Killian 11/4/2010
SCALE: 1:1.5 SIZE DRAWING NO.
D
402878
DETAIL NO.
THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA CONTAINED HEREIN IS THE
NOT BE DISCLOSED TO OTHERS WITHOUT WRITTEN CONSENT.
2952
ITEM NO. QTY. Description SecDescription DrawingNo REVISIONS
1 1 TWO PIECE, UNIVERSAL GUARD RIGHT SIDE 427486 LOC DESCRIPTION DATE APPR
1 ADDED ITEM 4 TO THE BOM 12/9/2016 S.MINER
2 1 TWO PIECE, UNIVERSAL GUARD LEFT SIDE 427492
3 1 PIANO HINGE .040" THICK X 1-1/2 OPEN WIDTH GP 302381
4 1 CLUTCH GUARD FLANGE 4" O.D. X .065" WALL 473837
1
10"
DEPT. SOP # QTY.


FRACTIONAL: 1/64 TWO PIECE CLUTCH GUARD
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 ASSEMBLY
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 2HP UNCOILER
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Jacob Drews 11/28/2012
C 427485
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
3080
1 2918 3 LINEAR BEARING MTG. PLATE 383949

2 2918A 1 LINEAR BEARING MTG. PLATE 385935
3 2918B 1 LINEAR BEARING LOCK 385937
4 2923 4 LINEAR BEARING TRACK STOP 383974
5 PURCH 4 LINEAR BEARING, THOMSON SSE PBO M25 DD 385928
6 PURCH 2 LINEAR BEARING SUPPORT RAIL GP 383909
7 2950 2 SUPPORT ARM 436309 2
3
1
7
6
DEPT. SOP # QTY.


FRACTIONAL: 1/64 SUPPORT ARM ASSY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 80-5/16", METRIC
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 STACKER
37" PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Brett Esseltine 7/21/2015
WHEN MOUNTED
REF
CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE
C 445870
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
2950
B
A
DETAIL B
SCALE 1 : 1
HOSE CONNECTIONS ARE 1/8" NPT ON MANIFOLD TO 1/4-24 ON BEARING
DEPT. SOP # QTY.


FRACTIONAL: 1/64
466962 - MANIFOLD
SUCTION TOWER ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 GREASE MANIFOLD INFORMATION
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY

DETAIL A THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA
SCALE 1 : 1 CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE SCALE: 1:8 SIZE DRAWING NO.
B 467750
DETAIL NO.
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
ITEM NO. DetailNo DESCRIPTION DrawingNo QTY.
1 2903 SUCTION TOWER ASSEMBLY 402876 1
2 PURCH BLOWER GP 403338 1
3 PURCH SEW MOTOR GP 405024 1
4 2902 EXHAUST CONE 444240 1
5 2906 STRAIGHT ARM ADJUSTER 383971 2
6 PURCH Rod End GP 384041 4 3 2
7 PURCH Rod End GP 384040 4
8 SUCTION UNIT CLEVIS FLANGE 465491 4
9 2901W13 ADJ. SUPPORT BRACKET 383985 2
10 2901W13 ADJ. SUPPORT BRACKET 431187 2
11 2901 SUCTION BOX FAN HOUSING 474000 1
12 2906 STRAIGHT ARM ADJUSTER 383970 2
13 2900 SUCTION BOX WELDMENT 470478 1
11
12
13
6 10 8 12 7 4
DEPT. SOP # QTY.


FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
SUCTION UNIT ASSY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 SIZE 40, 36" FIN LENGTH, 3 HP
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 STRAIGHT ARM, METRIC
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Steve Miner 2016-08-23
C 470257
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
2900A
ITEM NO. DrawingNo Description QTY. REVISIONS
LOC DESCRIPTION DATE APPR
1 451453 SUPPORT ARM 2 CHANGED THREE PARTS TO BE 6.5
1 INCHES NARROWER TO FIT ON A 11/9/2016 S.MINER
2 473028 LOWER SUPPORT - FP2B48 1 1 FP2B48 PRESS
3 451464 UNIVERSAL SPACER BAR 2

4 451456 ROLLER BRACKET 2
5 473026 SUPPORT CROSSMEMBER - 3

FP2B48 1
6 473027 CARPET BAR - FP2B48 1 1
7 451458 CARPET ARM 2
8 459350 SUPPORT ARM 2
9 459351 ATTACHMENT BLOCK 2
10 466396 ROLLER MOUNTING BLOCK 2
3
10
8
4
10
9
5
9 7
DEPT. SO # QTY.
Burr Oak Tool Inc.
8 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED MACH # Sturgis, Michigan U.S.A.

FRACTIONAL: 1/64 ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 REAR STOCK CONTAINMENT
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 E-LUBE - FP2B48
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Keith Wilfong 8/18/2016
D 470423
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
1 4238 1 CART STOP BLOCK 392948

2 4906 1 CHAIN ATTACHMENT BLOCK 392946
3 4208A 2 OUTSIDE RAIL 82401
4 4208B 2 INSIDE RAILS, DIE CART 82402
5 4340 2 GUIDING CATCH RAIL 400969
6 4 CAM FOLLOWER 372292
7 12 CAM FOLLOWER 372290
8 4208 1 DIE CART 471095
7
3
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

2 FL Burr Oak Tool Inc.
1 DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES

FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE BOM
DIE TAKE OUT CART ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FP-2B-48-2331

C 471094
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
(1) REQ'D. 4208ASSY
ITEM NO. DetailNo DESCRIPTION DrawingNo QTY. REVISIONS
1 4256 UPPER FRAME WELDMENT 470114 1

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE APPROVED
2 4307 LATCH BLOCK 115052 1

A Changed Crossover Support Weldment & Components 10/13/2016 KW
3 4308 LATCH PLATE 115053 1
4 PURCHASE THRUST WASHER 115166 1
5 4304 PIVOT SHAFT 115168 1
6 4303 MOUNTING BLOCK 50791A 2
7 2278 PULL PIN 98549 1
8 PURCH SWING AWAY BRACKET 314595 1
9 PURCH SWING AWAY BRACKET 314596 1
10 4295 CROSSOVER SUPPORT WELDMENT 472198 1 A 5

6
11 PURCH AURORA ROD END, ABF-M12, RH GP#372688 2
12 PURCH AURORA ROD END, ABF-M12, LH GP#372687 2 9 8
13 4309B LATCH BLOCK MTG PLATE 116024 1

4
14 4630 SHORT ADJUSTER 372662 1
15 4629 LONG ADJUSTER 372664 1
16 4628 WELD BLOCK 3 373020 1
17 4627 WELD BLOCK 2 372625 1
18 4626 WELD BLOCK 1 372562 1 A
19 4297 STOCK LACER SUPPORT 60076 2 7

13
6
1
17
2
12
11 18
15
16
DEPT. SOP # QTY.


FRACTIONAL: 1/64 SHORT SWING AWAY ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 SIZE 40, FP2B-48
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Steve Miner 2016-09-14

C 471400
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS
(1)REQ'D 4500
Item # Qty Description Drawing #
1 1 CROSS BAR 457625
2 1 MOUNTING PLATE, REMOVABLE 473136
DEPT. SOP # QTY.

Burr Oak Tool Inc.

FRACTIONAL: 1/64 SUPPORT BRACKET ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 REMOTE CONTROL
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 FP-2B
CONTAINED HEREIN ARE THE SCALE: 1:8 SIZE DRAWING NO.
B 473137
DETAIL NO.
DISCLOSED TO OTHERS

CAST EYE BOLT
McMASTER CARR #3014T471
PULL PIN - REF DWG#- 251593
DEPT. SO # QTY.
Company, Inc.
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES Sturgis, Michigan U.S.A.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE DWG
PULL PIN ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 STACKER & SWING LUBE TANK
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Kyle Keaffaber 7/19/2004
BREAK ALL EDGES SCALE: 1:1 SIZE DRAWING NO.
A
98549
2278A
8 1/4" 1.750
3/4"
.625 1.125 46" 1.125
.375WIDE X .212 DP KEYWAY
1.497 .9995
2.000±.010 4.000±.005
1.498 1.0000
2" R1/64" TYP.
1.4995
1.5000 2.000±.010
3 2
1
NOTES:
4
1. MACHINE TO FINISHED SIZES AFTER WELDING ENDS IN PLACE
2. ADD 3/16" NOMINAL NITRILE COVER AFTER ASSEMBLY AND FINAL MACHINING
3. MUST BE STRAIGHT AND CONCENTRIC
4. ALL PARTS ARE SHOWN MACHINED. REFERENCE CALLOUT FOR DWG. NUMBERS
OF PARTS PRIOR TO MACHINING.
DEPT. SO # QTY.
Company, Inc.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
SEE CALLOUT
NITRILE ROLL ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 UNCOILER
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 SIZE: 46, 2 HP
Item # Detail # Quantity Description Material Drawing # PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Brandon Coburn 7/12/2005
1 3036T 1 NITRILE ROLL Steel Tube, A513, 217710 THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA
BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES SCALE: 1:1 SIZE DRAWING NO.
D
2 3036E 1 END PLUG LEADLOY C12L14 155345 45° CHAMFER ALL HOLES
98654
3 3036DE 1 DRIVE END LEADLOY C12L14 155346
4 1 NITRILE COVER 55/60 DUROMETER NITRILE PURCH
(1) REQ'D PER MACHINE 3036
Item # Detail # Quantity Description Drawing #
1 3031T 1 STEEL FEED TUBE 217705
2 3031E 2 END PLUG 155344
46"
2 2
1.0000
3.962 2.000 3.962
.9995
1/32" RAD. TYP.
3.968 WELD SHAFTS IN PLACE. TYP. BOTH ENDS

MUST BE CONCENTRIC TO ENDS
NOTES: MACHINE TO FINISHED SIZES AFTER WELDING

SHAFTS INTO PLACE.
.005/.007 DIA. TAPER EACH WAY FROM
CENTERLINE TO END.
DEPT. SO # QTY.
Company, Inc.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
STEEL WELDMENT
STEEL FEED ROLL
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 UNCOILER
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 46 INCH
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Brandon Coburn 9/11/2003
BREAK ALL EDGES WITH 3/32" RADIUS SCALE: 1:1 SIZE DRAWING NO.
C 98664
(1) REQ'D. PER MACHINE 3031
00032
04852
08442
04205
08441
21442
00031
10212 08778
DEPT. SO # QTY.
OAK Oak Products, Inc.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 ECCENTRIC SHAFT ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FP-2B-48
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Eugene Crooks 7/2/2004

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA SEE DWG. A-7447 FOR 36" & A-10218 FOR 42" SCALE: 1:1 SIZE DRAWING NO.
A
REDRAWN, WAS C-7447
10219
EXCLUSIVE PROPERTY OF OAK DETAIL NO.
PRODUCTS, INC. AND MAY NOT
BE DISCLOSED TO OTHERS WITHOUT
WRITTEN CONSENT.
1001
00159
10597
07039
07634
07038 07805
DEPT. MO # QTY.
OAK Oak Press Solutions Inc.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED Sturgis, Michigan U.S.A.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 LADDER BEARING ASSEMBLY, UPPER
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FP-2 (W/ BACKUP PL)

A
10287
PRESS SOLUTIONS INC. AND

07805
07635
07037
07036
10597
00158
DEPT. MO # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 LADDER BEARING ASSEMBLY, LOWER
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FP-2 (W/ BACKUP PL)

A
10288

10575
00118
ROLLER
INSERT
(NOT PART OF
THE ASSEMBLY)
07801
00087
00088
DEPT. MO # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 GIB BEARING ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 1-1/2" STK., FP3, FP2, LP60

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA WAS B-6154-A SCALE: 1:2 SIZE DRAWING NO.
A
06154

11342
10235
01053
13266
00150
00025
00190 06154
10634
10636
00149
DEPT. MO # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 SLIDE ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1

A
11341

07538 00044 01628
13617 08091
13385
11336 00018
10620 11350 10604

10051
10618 12954 10625
00729 05579
00020
06444 05651
DEPT. MO # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 TIE ROD ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FP-2B

A
18804

13278
16862
07438
15104
12575
10758
15523
26215
10429
DEPT. MO # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 PRESS DRIVE ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FP-2B WITH ACTUATOR
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Gary Clouse 12/15/2009

A
26426

00037 CROWN
00038
05065
INSTALLATION OF COUNTERBALANCE:
WITH THE PRESS AT THE TOP OF STROKE
SCREW SPRING RODS IN UNTIL ROD
TOUCHES THE SPRING ROD CAP.
PRE-LOAD THE COUNTERBALANCE
SPRING 1/2"
00041 TIGHTEN SET SCREW IN SWIVEL LOCATED
IN THE SLIDE.
12991
SLIDE
DEPT. MO # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 COUNTERBALANCE SPRING ASS'Y
ANGULAR: 1

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA 4 PER FP-2B-48 SCALE: 1:10 SIZE DRAWING NO.
A
2 PER FP-2B-36 & FP-2B-42
11321

11724 13685
08627
20663 13222
08623 15220
13656 13908
08628 08621 13222
12951
16281 10411 08622 08626
10771
10515
08629
10411
08625
15808
16280
15381 12234
16278
16279
DEPT. MO # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 ENCODER ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 FP-2B, FP-4
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY Gary Clouse 03/20/2003

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA Drawing updated 11-2013 SCALE: 1:1 SIZE DRAWING NO.
A
17793

00198
10594, 11121 04206
10251 00101
04853
14648 23630
13745
11372
00097
SECTION A-A
DEPT. MO # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64 VARIABLE FEED DRIVE ASSEMBLY
ANGULAR: 1

A
00107
UPDATED JAN 2013 PRESS SOLUTIONS INC. AND

ITEM 16358
MPP-GP1 A3 L1 S1 PO COO
PUMP
SET PUMP TO .120 CUBIS/IN
LOWER GIB LOWER GIB
LOWER GIB LOWER GIB
UPPER GIB UPPER GIB
.220 CUBIC/IN
LOWER GIB LOWER GIB
LOWER LADDER UPPER LADDER
.080 CUBIC/IN
LOWER GIB LOWER GIB
ECC. BRG.
UPPER GIB UPPER GIB
LOWER LADDER UPPER LADDER
MSP-5 ITEM10338
ECC. BRG.
LOCATED ON END OF SLIDE .080 CUBIC/IN
MAIN BRG. MAIN BRG.

CYCLE INDICATOR
MAIN BRG. MAIN BRG.
MSP-5 ITEM10338
LOCATED ON END OF SLIDE
MSP-4 ITEM 11044
LOCATED REAR OF CROWN
DEPT. MO # QTY.
FRACTIONAL: 1/64
ANGULAR: 1
TWO PLACE DECIMAL: .010 LUBRICATION SCHEMATIC
FOUR PLACE DECIMAL: .0005 FP-2B PRESSES
PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL NOTES PRINT DRAWN BY 3/20/2003
THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE DATA PROGRAM TIME 2 HOURS MONITOR TIME 5 MIN. SCALE: 1:4 SIZE DRAWING NO.
A
5 PUMP STKS REQ'D. FOR COMPLETE CYCLE
14797
PRESS SOLUTIONS INC. AND ALLOW 30 -60 SEC BETWEEN PUMP STK FOR
PISTON TO RETURN

Electrical Bill of Materials
FP-2B-48-2331
ID STOCK # QTY PART # DESCRIPTION

BOT&G
1002 306408 4 Phoenix 5540811,PG29-100 NPT Adapter, Phoenix 5540811,PG29-100
153 307080 1 E-6PBAMOD SLOPE FACE P.B. ENCLOSURE; 6 HOLE; 22 mm
154 307096 1 E-D1PBM2 SINGLE HOLE P.B. ENCLOSURE; 22 mm HOLE
156 307149 1 A-P36L44 PEDESTAL WITH LEGS
186 306440 2 Hood, Phoenix, 1675094, Lat HC-B-32-TFQ-80/01PG29S Hood, Phoenix, 1675094, Lat HC-B-32-TFQ-80/01PG29S
197 306354 1 #1771480 TYPE - HC-B 16ESTS 16 PIN MALE INSERT; SCREW CONNECTION; NUMBERED 1-16
198 306356 2 #1771574 TYPE - HC-B 16TFL/PG21G HOOD FOR SINGLE LOCKING LATCH; 16 PIN; PG21
217 306583 6 USLKG 2.5N GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK; 24-12 AWG WIRE
224 312382 1 #1773310 TYPE - HC-B 3-ESTS 6 PIN MALE INSERT; SCREW CONNECTION; 3 POSITION + PE + 2 SWITCHING
227 306443 1 #1773514 TYPE - HC-HV 3-TFL-45/M1PG16G SLEEVE HOUSING FOR SINGLE LOCKING LATCH; 3 POS. + 2 SWITCHING
237 306406 4 #5540701 TYPE - PG16-50 ADAPTER; PG16- 1/2" NPT
238 306407 2 #5540714 TYPE - PG21-75 ADAPTER; PG21 - 3/4" NPT
494 307189 & 306942 2 A-1008CHS & A-10P8G PANEL 10" X 8" CONTINUOUS HINGE ENCLOSURE WITH PANEL
524 335863 1 P5193-1B51011 MICRO DIN PLUG; 6-48VDC; TRANSORB
602 307638 8 440AA09028 SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH CORD GRIP
603 307640 8 440KA27010 SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH KEY
604 342389 8 440KT11146 SAFETY INTERLOCK SWITCH
611 322922 5 P5103-1331000 MINI DIN PLUG; 6-48VDC; TRANSORB
618 307240 1 A-B 872C-DH3NP12-D4, Prox Switch, A-B 872C-DH3NP12-D4, 12mm, DC, 4 Pin, Short
620 307501 1 WK-4T-4 PROX CABLE; 4 PIN MICRO DC 90°
625 307494 1 RK-4T-4 PROX CABLE; 4 PIN MICRO DC; STRAIGHT
636 322986 4 #3022218 TYPE - CLIPFIX 35 END BRACKET
637 322985 8 #3030161 TYPE - FBS 2.5 TERMINAL JUMPER; 2 POSITION
639 322981 2 #3030488 TYPE - D-ST 2.5-TWIN THREE CONDUCTOR TERMINAL BLOCK END COVER
643 322983 55 #3031241 TYPE - ST2.5-TWIN THREE CONDUCTOR SPRING CAGE TERMINAL BLOCK
694 322215 1 BA5S06-32 FIELD ATTACHABLE CONNECTOR; MALE STRAIGHT
727 333488 2 3SB3403-0A CONTACT BLOCK; CAGE CLAMP; 1NO/1NC
728 333401 6 3SB3403-0B CONTACT BLOCK; CAGE CLAMP; 1NO
729 333402 7 3SB3403-0C CONTACT BLOCK; CAGE CLAMP; 1NC
737 333522 1 3SB3403-1PE PUSH BUTTON; 24V LED MODULE; WHITE
742 333331 2 3SB3500-1GA11 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; MUSHROOM HEAD BLACK
743 333333 1 3SB3500-1GA31 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; MUSHROOM HEAD YELLOW
744 333352 2 3SB3500-1HA20 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; MUSHROOM HEAD RED; TWIST TO RELEASE
758 333314 4 3SB3901-0AB ADAPTER FOR 3 ACROSS MOUNTING; PUSH BUTTON
764 333396 2 3SB3921-0BF 40 mm MUSHROOM HEAD PUSH BUTTON GUARD
79 306502 16 199-DR1 DIN MOUNTING RAIL; 35mm X 17.5mm; ZINC PLATED; STEEL (INCHES)
795 307783 4 889P-F4AB-5 PROX CABLE; 5M; STRAIGHT; 4 PIN Pico
813 333502 1 3SB3501-0AA71 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; ILLUMINATED; FLUSH HEAD CLEAR
859 378465 1 #T1102-PT-TU-HS TScrn Stylus #T1102-PT-TU-HS Pilot Rubber Tip W/ Coiled Urethane Tether & Holder.
860 378783 1 USB Transfer Cable Jetlan 2.0 USB Transfer Cable Jetlan 2.0 Networking/Data Transfer
891 307107 2 Appleton FS175A Cast Box Appleton FS175A Shallow 3/4"
892 306329 2 Crouse Hinds X8381-19 Recept Crouse Hinds X8381-19 Die Safety YL Box
893 306328 2 Crouse Hinds X8381-7 Plug Crouse Hinds X8381-7 Die Safety Yel 2ft
915 384525 2 Phoenix 1679304 Hinged Retaining Frame, Phoenix 1679304, HC-M-MHR-A4-N.
916 384526 4 Phoenix 1647718 Insert Module Male, Phoenix 1647718, HC-M-05-MOD-STZ, 5 -pin Spr Cage
918 384529 1 Phoenix 1678570 EMC Contact Carrier, Phoenix 1678570, HC-M-EMV-MOD-BU, Female
918 384528 1 Phoenix 1678567 EMC Contact Carrier, Phoenix 1678567, HC-M-EMV-MOD-ST, Male
920 384530 4 Phoenix 1636088 EMC Plug Connector, Male, Phoenix 1636088, HC-M-EMV-ST/3-9.5
922 384532 10 Phoenix 1674901 Male Crimp Contacts, Phoenix 1674901, CK1.6-ED-0.37ST AU, Gold
950 306525 1 Weiland 21.305.1253.0, 12 Pole Terminal, Block, Weiland 21.305.1253.0, 12 Pole
958 306532 1 Weiland 29.401.0853.0, 8 Pole Terminal, Block, Weiland 29.401.0853.0, 8 Pole
988 418286 1 MURP-19MP-6M Cable, MURP-19MP-6M , 19 Pin Male strt conn, 6 meter (Fin Press)
1041 451094 2 Photocell, Banner, Q126EQ-94926, 24 Vdc, Emitter, Pico, Pur Pigtail Photocell, Banner, Q126EQ-94926, 24 Vdc, Emitter, Pico, Pur Pigtail
1042 451095 1 Photocell, Banner, Q12RB6RQ-94925, 24 VDC, Receiver, Pico, PUR Pigtail, Bipolar DO Photocell, Banner, Q12RB6RQ-94925, 24 VDC, Receiver, Pico, PUR Pigtail, Bipolar DO
1043 454131 1 Photocell, Banner, Q12AB6RQ-96046, 24 VDC, Receiver, Pico, PUR Pigtail, Bipolar LO Photocell, Banner, Q12AB6RQ-96046, 24 VDC, Receiver, Pico, PUR Pigtail, Bipolar LO
1 of 4
FP-2B-48-2331
1053 306411 1 1771435 Base, Phoenix 1771435, P MT, 10Pin, HCB10SMLD-

1081 425698 1 Insert, Phoenix, 1773132, HC-HS 6-EBUS, Female 6 pos 35A Insert, Phoenix, 1773132, HC-HS 6-EBUS, Female 6 pos 35A
1082 425699 1 Insert, Phoenix, 1773129, HC-HS 6-ESTS,Male 6 pos 35A Insert, Phoenix, 1773129, HC-HS 6-ESTS,Male 6 pos 35A
192 306346 1 #1771202 TYPE - HC-B 10-EBUS 10 PIN FEMALE INSERT; SCREW CONNECTION
193 306347 1 #1771228 TYPE - HC-B 10-ESTS 10 PIN MALE INSERT; SCREW CONNECTION
194 306351 1 #1771312 TYPE - HC-B 10-TFL/PG16G HOOD FOR SINGLE LOCKING LATCH; STRAIGHT CABLE ENTRY; 10 PIN; PG16
668 321942 1 6ES7 132-4BD32-0AA0 ET200S 4DO STANDARD MODULE 24VDC; 2A
674 324400 1 6ES7 193-4CA30-0AA0 ET200S TERMINAL FOR ELECTRONIC SUBMODULES (TM-E15C24-A1) ( 2X4 TERMINALS)
745 333358 2 3SB3500-2PA11 SELECTOR SWITCH OPERATOR; 2 POSITION
339642 1 Switch Housing Body Switch Housing Body
339643 1 End Cap End Cap
487 318279 1 BOT-100 22.5 mm PUSH BUTTON TAG
OAK PRODUCTS
1019 26152 1 3RV2021-1KA10 3RV202 MOTOR STARTER PROTECTOR (MSP) - CLASS 10 TRIP - (9.0-12.5 AMP SETTING) (S0)
1020 26143 6 3RV2901-1E PLUG IN CONTACT BLOCK FOR MSP
1021 26150 2 3RT2026-3BB40 3RT202 CONTACTOR - 24VDC COIL; 25 AMP; SPRING CAGE
1022 26142 4 3RT2926-1BB00 SURGE SUPPRESOR; 24-70 VDC MOV; 3RT202 & 3RT203 CONTACTORS
1024 26144 3 3RA2921-1BA00 DC LINK MODULE - CONNECTS 3RT202 TO 3RV202
1025 ????? 1 3RT2023-3BB40 3RT202 CONTACTOR - 24VDC COIL; 9 AMP; SPRING CAGE
1026 26146 3 3RH2921-1MA20 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK FOR CONTACTORS; 2 N.O. BOTTOM ENTRY
1027 26148 1 3RV2021-1EA10 3RV202 MOTOR STARTER PROTECTOR (MSP) - CLASS 10 TRIP - (2.8-4.0 AMP SETTING)
1028 26147 1 3RV1021-1GA10 MSP, Siemens 3RV1021-1GA10, 4.5-6.3 Amp Class 10 (S0)
1029 26149 3 3RH2140-2BB40 CONTROL RELAY; 24 VDC; 4N.O. CONTACTS; SPRING CAGE
1030 ????? 2 3RH2911-2FA22 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK; FRONT MOUNT; 2N.O. & 2N.C.; SPRING CAGE
1031 26436 6 3RT2916-1BB00 SURGE SUPPRESOR; 24-70 VDC MOV; 3RH21 RELAYS
1032 26154 3 3RH2122-2BB40 Relay, Siemens 3RH2122-2BB40, 24VDC, Cage Clp (S00)
1038 26145 2 3RV2021-1DA10 3RV202 MOTOR STARTER PROTECTOR (MSP) - CLASS 10 TRIP - (2.2-3.2 AMP SETTING)
1044 24828 1 Siemens 6AV2124-0MC01-0AX0 TScrn, Siemens, 6AV2 124-0MC01-0AX0, TP1200, 12" Widescreen Comfort Panel
1045 24829 1 Siemens 6AV2124-6MJ00-0AX0 Protective Membrane, TScrn TP1200, Siemens, 6AV2 124-6MJ00-0AX0
1047 26339 1 Siemens 6AV2181-8XP00-0AX0 Memory Card, 2G, Simatic HMI, 6AV20181-8XP00-0AX0
1049 26444 1 3RH2911-2FA40 AUXILIARY CONTACT BLOCK; FRONT MOUNT; 4N.O.; SPRING CAGE
1083 467491 2 Box Mount Base, Phoenix, 1675036, HC-B-32-SMQ-72/01PG29, Double Locking Latch Box Mount Base, Phoenix, 1675036, HC-B-32-SMQ-72/01PG29, Double Locking Latch
146 11376 & 11185 1 A-1008CH & A-10P8G PANEL 10" X 8" CONTINUOUS HINGE ENCLOSURE WITH PANEL
150 11182; 11188 1 A-1614CH & A-16P14G PANEL 16" X 14" CONTINUOUS HINGE ENCLOSURE WITH PANEL
171 14146 1 D-14146 SPECIAL PADDED PENDANT; 23.5" X 20.5"
196 11242 1 #1771464 TYPE - HC-B 16EBUS 16 PIN FEMALE INSERT; SCREW CONNECTION; NUMBERED 1-16
208 12005 4 #0404428 TYPE - AB/SS BUSSBAR SUPPORT
209 12003 9 #0404033 TYPE - AK16 GROUNDING TERMINAL; 16-6 AWG WIRE
213 12004 2 #0402174 TYPE - NLS-CU 3/10 10 mm COPPER BUSSBAR; TIN-PLATTED
217 12001 15 USLKG 2.5N GROUND TERMINAL BLOCK; 24-12 AWG WIRE
223 14183 1 #1773323 TYPE - HC-HV 3-EBUS 6 PIN FEMALE INSERT; SCREW CONNECTION; 3 POS + PE + 2 SWITCHING
226 15077 1 #1773637 TYPE - HC-HV 3-SMLD-52/M2PG16 BOX MOUNT BASE WITH SINGLE LOCKING LATCH; TWO ENTRIES; 3 POS. + 2 SWITCHING
229 15078 1 #1771697 TYPE - HC-B 16SMLD-67/M2PG21 BOX MOUNT BASE WITH SINGLE LOCKING LATCH; 16 PIN; TWO CABLE ENTRIES
237 11165 2 #5540701 TYPE - PG16-50 ADAPTER; PG16- 1/2" NPT
238 11168 4 #5540714 TYPE - PG21-75 ADAPTER; PG21 - 3/4" NPT
248 15030 3 RK-4.5T-4 PROX CABLE; 5 PIN MICRO DC; STRAIGHT; 4 METERS
342 12078 143.8 C1WH6 WIRE DUCT COVER; 1" WHT
343 12080 143.8 F1X3WH6 WIRE DUCT; 1" X 3" WHT
344 12077 149.5 C1.5WH6 WIRE DUCT COVER; 1.5" WHT
345 12079 149.5 F1.5X3WH6 WIRE DUCT; 1.5" X 3" WHT
355 14637 1 A-FK1210 STEEL FLOOR STAND KIT; 12" X 10"
356 14638 1 A-ENST ENCLOSURE STABILIZER
2 of 4
FP-2B-48-2331

OAK PRODUCTS
383 14957 1 97-3106A-18S SHELL; PLUG & INSERT (FEMALE) STRT; 10 PIN
386 14956 1 9767-18-10 CABLE CLAMP & CORD GRIP; SIZE 18
395 14056 1 1771684, HCB16SMLD/1PG21 Box Mounting Base, Phoenix 1771684, HCB16SMLD/1PG21
408 15017 1 731-0046 HOUR METER; ROUND; 24VDC
428 14969 1 3RA1931-1BA00 DC LINK MODULE - CONNECTS 3RT103 TO 3RV103
429 14970 1 3RA1932-1A ADAPTER PLATE FOR DIN RAIL MOUNTING OF 3RV103 & 3RT103
444 14903 2 3RT1916-1BB00 SURGE SUPPRESOR; 24-70 VDC MOV; 3RH11 RELAYS
463 15002 1 Siemens 3RV1915-1CB MSP BUS, Siemens 3RV1915-1CB, Line side 4 units
465 14972 1 3RV1925-5AB LINE SIDE FEEDER LUG; 63 AMPS
473 15325 1 3RT1036-3BB40 3RT103 CONTACTOR - 24VDC COIL; 50 AMP; SPRING CAGE
474 15352 1 3RV1031-4DA10 3RV103 MOTOR STARTER PROTECTOR (MSP) - CLASS 20 TRIP - (18-25 AMP SETTING)
475 15353 1 3RV1935-1A LINE SIDE FEEDER - CONNECTS 2 MSP; 100 AMPS
476 15354 2 3RV1935-5A LINE SIDE FEEDER LUG; 100 AMPS
477 15329 1 3RA1317-8XB30-1BB4 REVERSING MOTOR STARTER; 24VDC; 12 AMPS
488 15575 1 15k ohm / 1/4 W RESISTOR; 15k ohm / 1/4 W
489 17550 1 1492-J3P TERMINAL BLOCK; PLUG-IN STYLE
490 17551 1 1492-CPL TERMINAL BLOCK; COMPONENT HOLDER
491 14635 1 A-48SA3810LPPL 48" X 38" X 10" ENCLOSURE
492 14636 1 A-48P36G 48" X 36" PANEL
525 16355 2 P5100-1080000 ISO DIN PLUG;PG9 STRAIN RELIEF; NO CIRCUIT
605 11024 1 914CE1-6 LIMIT SWITCH; BUTTON
611 15607 1 P5103-1331000 MINI DIN PLUG; 6-48VDC; TRANSORB
612 15503 4 P5103-1631000 ISO DIN PLUG; 6-48VDC; TRANSORB
618 15381 1 872C-DH3NP12D4 PROX SWITCH; 12mm 4 PIN MICRO; 3-WIRE DC
620 15383 1 WK-4T-4 PROX CABLE; 4 PIN MICRO DC 90°
622 15220 1 725N-S-S-360-R-HV-1-F-1-SX-N-N ENCODER; 360 PPR; 5-28VDC; 3/8" SHAFT
625 15383 5 RK-4T-4 PROX CABLE; 4 PIN MICRO DC; STRAIGHT
627 15342 8 #1201413 TYPE - E/UK1 POWER DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BLOCK END BRACKET
628 15343 10 #1413272 TYPE - ATP-DIK 1.5 POWER DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BLOCK PARTITION PLATE
635 15341 30 #3005196 TYPE - UK10-TWIN POWER DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL BLOCK
636 15348 25 #3022218 TYPE - CLIPFIX 35 END BRACKET
637 15335 48 #3030161 TYPE - FBS 2.5 TERMINAL JUMPER; 2 POSITION
639 15338 7 #3030488 TYPE - D-ST 2.5-TWIN THREE CONDUCTOR TERMINAL BLOCK END COVER
641 15339 2 #3030789 TYPE - ATP-ST-TWIN THREE CONDUCTOR TERMINAL BLOCK PARTITION PLATE
643 15337 202 #3031241 TYPE - ST2.5-TWIN THREE CONDUCTOR SPRING CAGE TERMINAL BLOCK
649 15906 12 #1201730 TYPE - NS 35/15 PERFORATED DIN MOUNTING RAIL; 35mm X 15mm
650 16234 9 #3036385 TYPE - ST 4-HESI FUSED TERMINAL; 1/4" X 1-1/4"; #10-#24 AWG WIRE; 10 A
666 15295 11 6ES7 131-4BD01-0AA0 ET200S 4DI STANDARD MODULE 24VDC
667 15349 1 6ES7 131-4BD51-0AA0 ET200S 4DI SOURCING MODULE 24VDC
668 15296 9 6ES7 132-4BD32-0AA0 ET200S 4DO STANDARD MODULE 24VDC; 2A
669 15350 1 6ES7 134-4FB01-0AB0 ET200S ANALOG INPUT MODULE
670 15297 8 6ES7 138-4CA01-0AA0 ET200S PM-E 24VDC WITH DIAGNOSTICS
672 15298 3 6ES7 151-1AA02-0AB0 ET200S IM151 I/F MOD. WITH TERMINALS
674 15299 22 6ES7 193-4CA30-0AA0 ET200S TERMINAL FOR ELECTRONIC SUBMODULES (TM-E15C24-A1) ( 2X4 TERMINALS)
675 15300 8 6ES7 193-4CD30-0AA0 ET200S TERMINAL FOR POWER MODULES (TM-P15C23-A0) (2X3 TERMINALS)
677 15539 1 6ES7 317-2AK14-0AB0 PLC CPU; S7 SERIES; 317-2DP
681 15836 3 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0 DIGITAL OUTPUT CARD; 16 PT; 24 VDC; 0.5 A
683 15313 1 6ES7 350-1AH03-0AE0 FM 350-1 COUNTER MODULE
685 15314 19 6ES7 390-1AE80-0AA0 482mm DIN RAIL FOR PLC; QTY IN INCHES
686 15301 8 6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0 20 PIN FRONT CONNECTOR; SPRING CAGE TERMINALS
687 15315 1 6ES7 953-8LM20-0AA0 4MB MEMORY CARD
688 15317 1 6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0 PROFIBUS REPEATER MODULE
689 15316 4 6ES7 972-OBA50-0XA0 BUS CONNECTOR W/O PG CONNECTOR
690 15302 3 6ES7 972-OBB50-0XA0 BUS CONNECTOR WITH PG CONNECTOR
693 15318 1 6XV1830-OPH10 HIGH FLEX CABLE (METERS)
3 of 4
FP-2B-48-2331

OAK PRODUCTS
695 15384 1 BA5S00-32 FIELD ATTACHABLE CONNECTOR; FEMALE STRAIGHT
24VDC PERFORMANCE PAK ACTUATOR; 1500# @ 0.4 IN/SEC TRAVEL; 8" STROKE WITH 10K POT
720 15104 1 7828551
727 16431 3 3SB3403-0A CONTACT BLOCK; CAGE CLAMP; 1NO/1NC
728 16432 24 3SB3403-0B CONTACT BLOCK; CAGE CLAMP; 1NO
729 16433 13 3SB3403-0C CONTACT BLOCK; CAGE CLAMP; 1NC
731 16434 2 3SB3403-0E CONTACT BLOCK; CAGE CLAMP; 2NC
735 16430 2 3SB3403-1PC PUSH BUTTON; 24V LED MODULE; GREEN
738 16419 1 3SB3500-0AA11 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; FLUSH HEAD BLACK
740 16420 2 3SB3500-0AA41 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; FLUSH HEAD GREEN
741 16421 2 3SB3500-0BA21 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; EXTENDED HEAD RED
742 16423 2 3SB3500-1GA11 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; MUSHROOM HEAD BLACK
743 16424 1 3SB3500-1GA31 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; MUSHROOM HEAD YELLOW
744 16429 3 3SB3500-1HA20 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; MUSHROOM HEAD RED; TWIST TO RELEASE
745 16425 4 3SB3500-2PA11 SELECTOR SWITCH OPERATOR; 2 POSITION
746 16426 2 3SB3500-2SA11 SELECTOR SWITCH OPERATOR; 3 POSITION
749 16427 1 3SB3500-4PD11 SELECTOR SWITCH OPERATOR; 3 POSITION KEY; STANDARD (CES)
750 16428 1 3SB3500-4PD11-ZSSG15 SELECTOR SWITCH OPERATOR; 3 POSITION KEY; SSG15 KEY (CES)
752 16422 2 3SB3501-0AA41 PUSH BUTTON OPERATOR; ILLUMINATED; FLUSH HEAD GREEN
758 16436 5 3SB3901-0AB ADAPTER FOR 3 ACROSS MOUNTING; PUSH BUTTON
759 16437 3 3SB3901-0AC ADAPTER FOR 3 ACROSS MOUNTING; SELECTOR SWITCH
761 16927 11 3SB3921-0AA PUSH BUTTON HOLE PLUG; BLACK PLASTIC
764 16438 2 3SB3921-0BF 40 mm MUSHROOM HEAD PUSH BUTTON GUARD
766 16305 2 6ES7 921-3BE10-0AA0 CONNECTOR; 16 PIN RIBBON; 8/PACK
782 16677 1 FN258-30/33 (Newark # 83F5422) AC LINE FILTER; 3 PHASE 30 AMP
79 12140 196.8 199-DR1 DIN MOUNTING RAIL; 35mm X 17.5mm; ZINC PLATED; STEEL (INCHES)
809 17048 65 #3031306 TYPE - ST2.5-QUATTRO FOUR CONDUCTOR SPRING CAGE TERMINAL BLOCK
810 17049 2 #3030514 TYPE - D-ST 2.5-QUATTRO FOUR CONDUCTOR TERMINAL BLOCK END COVER
885 20189 1 SqD HJL36060 Circuit Breaker, SqD HJL36060, Class 0611, 60A 600V 3 pole, 150A frame
886 20190 1 SqD CSF30 Disconnect Operator, Cable, SqD CSF30, Class 9422, 36"
887 20191 1 SqD A1, Class 9422 Disconnect Operator Handle, SqD A1, Class 9422, flange Mt
888 20192 2 SqD S37446 Circuit Breaker, SqD S37446, Short lug shield kit, 3 pole, 150A frame
91 15413 2 AGC-4 1/4" X 1-1/4" 4 AMP FAST ACTING FUSE
915 20329 2 Phoenix 1679304 Hinged Retaining Frame, Phoenix 1679304, HC-M-MHR-A4-N.
917 20328 4 Phoenix 1647721 Insert Module Female, Phoenix 1647721, HC-M-05 MOD-BUZ, 5-pin, spr cage
919 20330 2 Phoenix 1678570 EMC Contact Carrier, Phoenix 1678570, HC-M-EMV-MOD-BU, Female
921 20331 4 Phoenix 1636091 EMC Plug Connector Female, Phoenix 1636091, HC-MOD-EMV-BU/3-9.5
923 20332 16 Phoenix 1674969 Female Crimp Contacts, Phoenix 1674969, CK1.6-ED-0.37BU AU, Gold
928 23584 2 QT20.24 POWER SUPPLY; 24VDC; 20 AMPS 480V 3PHASE
947 15323 1 3TK2834-2BB40 Safety Relay, Siemens 3TK2834-2BB40, 2-hand control
95 14890 4 AGC-2 1/4" X 1-1/4" 2 AMP FAST ACTING GLASS FUSE
962 24165 2 440R-G23216 Safety Relay, AB-S MSR142, 440R-G23216
987 17039 1 MURP-19FR-3-18 Cable, MURP-19FR-3-18 1/2-14 Thrd. 19 Pin Female (Fin Press)
998 16485 1 3SB3500-2TA11 Siemens 3SB3500-2TA11, 3 Pos SRTC Blk, w/3 acr holder
999 24125 4 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0 16PTS PLC Input Mod, Siemens 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0 16PTS,
4 of 4
Hydraulic Bill of Materials
FP-2B-48-2331

BOT&G
213 382957 1 MFP-926169-X4556 Filter Element, MFP-926169-X4556, Oak #19623
28 381133 2 D1VHW020DNJGJ7B91XB1011 VALVE; HYD.; DIRECTIONAL CONT.; 3-POSITION DETENT; 24V VDC SOLENOID
310340 1 Manifold, Daman AD03-P-08-2S, SAE Ports Manifold, Daman AD03-P-08-2S, SAE Ports
388636 2 Bracket, Hydraulic Manifold (Daman 8) (Oak # 14842) Bracket, Hydraulic Manifold (Daman 8) (Oak # 14842)
42 310788 6 AD03-CP-P COVER PLATE; D03 VALVE PATTERN
54 309279 4 FF-251-4FP QUICK DISCONNECT SOCKET; HYD.; 1/4" FEMALE NPT
55 309277 4 FF-252-4FP QUICK DISCONNECT PLUG; HYD.; 1/4" FEMALE NPT
OAK PRODUCTS
10 10051 4 N5 8" BORE X 8-1/2" STROKE X 3-1/2" ROD (OAK DRAWING C-10051) CYLINDER; HYDRAULIC; SAE PORTS
12 15109 1 0863424 PRESSURE SWITCH; HYD.; SOLID STATE; 0- 1450 PSI
191 18049 1 4SN-72-09 COUPLING Hayes Complete (42mm x .88 )
192 18050 1 Model 1202-180mm-X-7.50 ADAPTER PUMP / MOTOR
193 18046 1 PVP16362R12 PUMP; HYD.
194 18045 1 PVP33362R6A221 PUMP; HYD.
195 18048 1 15HP IEC with NEMA FLANGE; 1760 RPM < TEFC FRAME DF 160 MC MOTOR; LEESON
25 15016 1 OAK DRAWING #D-15016 MANIFOLD
28 16500 1 D1VHW020DNJGJ7B91XB1011 VALVE; HYD.; DIRECTIONAL CONT.; 3-POSITION DETENT; 24V VDC SOLENOID
35 1 10-24 UNC X 2" SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW SAE GRADE 8 OR BETTER BOLT KIT; D03 VALVE; 4 BOLTS PER KIT; 2"
36 1 10-24 UNC X 3.5" SOCKET HEAD CAP SCREW SAE GRADE 8 OR BETTER BOLT KIT; D03 VALVE; 4 BOLTS PER KIT; 3.5"
44 10055 1 MANIFOLD; CROWN
56 15272 1 PRDM2PP06KNS 'Reducing Mod, Parker PRDM2PP06KNS, P port D03
6 13900 2 0-1500 PSI 2.5 FACE 0.25 BOTTOM GAUGE
7 16370 1 S15A1X/12 CHECK VALVE; SAE-12 PORT; 7 PSI CRACKING PRESSURE
74 16916 1 D-16916 HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR; 35 GALLON
75 16507 1 SM-537 TANK FILLER CAP
76 10726 1 T-550-5 TANK OIL LEVEL GAUGE
77 12271 1 ADO3DO5VAAB DO3 TO DO5 ADAPTER PLATE
79 15783 2 W46-12-12U PUMP FLANGE; 1 1/16-12 SAE
VALVE; HYD.; DIRECTIONAL CONT.; 3-POSITION CLOSED CENTER; 24V VDC SOLENOID
8 16501 1 D1VHW001CNJGJ7B91XB1011
88 17172 1 A-17172 ORIFICE FITTING; 0.060
9 15274 1 C-9358 WITH 1UAR100P20S INSTALLED MANIFOLD; HYD. CIRCUIT BREAKER
1 of 1
Pneumatic Bill of Materials
FP-2B-48-2331

BOT&G
183 310371 2 M2MN MUFFLER; 1/4" NPT
2 309642 1 310 QUICK DISCONNECT COUPLER; AIR; 3/8" FEMALE NPT
207 227897 1 227897 MANIFOLD BLOCK; LACER
227 311970 1 Apollo 70-104-01 3/4 Ball Valve, Apollo 70-104-01 3/4
228 311968 1 Apollo 70-102-01 3/8 Ball Valve, Apollo 70-102-01 3/8
239 306532 1 W eiland 29.401.0853.0, 8 Pole Terminal, Block, W eiland 29.401.0853.0, 8 Pole
270 309647 1 3804 QUICK DISCONNECT PLUG; AIR; 3/8" MALE NPT
271 309872 1 QE3 QUICK EXHAUST; 3/8"
273 1 FAW ICK AIRFLEX AIR BRAKE
274 4 FPS-437 CYLINDER; AIR; PANCAKE
280 1 LR5A 2"BORE X 5.25"STROKE X 5/8"ROD CYLINDER; AIR
282 310082 4 214-194 GAUGE; LIQUID FILLED; 0-160 PSI; 1.5" FACE; 1/8" NPT
284 309985 3 229-718 MANIFOLD KIT; AIR; 1/8" NPT; MARK 3 SERIES
285 310004 1 229-719 MANIFOLD END PLATE KIT; AIR; 1/8" NPT; MARK 3 SERIES
286 310372 1 M3MN MUFFLER; 3/8" NPT
288 310782 1 P-312 RESERVOIR; 1-1/2 GALLON
29 310006 3 031SA4004000061 (24VDC REPLACEMENT COIL 236-127) DIRECTIONAL VALVE; AIR; 4-W AY VALVE; 2 POSITION; MARK 3 SERIES; 1/8" NPT PORTS
297 314527 1 01750 FLOAT SW ITCH; SPST; 316 S.S.; 0.7 SPECIFIC GRAVITY
299 322078 2 B3454 CHECK VALVE; 5#
300 317910 2 L17-600-OPKA-3P LUBRICATOR; 5 GALLON W ITH LOW LEVEL SHUTOFF
306 310069 1 35A-AAA-DDAJ-1KE DIRECTIONAL VALVE; 3-W AY VALVE; 1/8" NPT
4 309636 1 2609 QUICK DISCONNECT PLUG; AIR; 1/4" FEMALE NPT
41 310128 2 L22L-04M LUBRICATOR; 1/2" NPT
43 310368 1 M1MN MUFFLER; 1/8" NPT
47 310089 4 R22R-04 REGULATOR; 1/2" NPT
57 320993 1 3900-00-5313 DIRECTIONAL VALVE; 3-W AY VALVE; 1/8" NPT
59 1 SIZE AS NEEDED METERING UNITS
90 310784 1 SP327-P010 LUBE INJECTOR; MICROSPRAY
924 307279 1 RW 100-50 W asher, Appleton RW 100-50, Reducer, 1"-1/2"
925 306979 1 LL50-A, Unilet Left Conn, Appleton LL50-A, 1/2", Al
926 307055 1 STG50 Sealing W asher, Appleton STG50, Gasket Assembly, 1/2"
961 310063 1 Spartan, 3500-01-4233 Air Valve, Spartan, 3500-01-4233, 1/2", 24 Vdc, 2p, Nc, 2.45 Cv
968 310143 2 Norgren 18-001-009, 2-5 Gal Reservoir Mtg Brkt, Norgren 18-001-009, 2-5 Gal
OAK PRODUCTS
268 1 210 QUICK DISCONNECT COUPLER; AIR; 1/4" FEMALE NPT
27 1 130B-591JB DIRECTIONAL VALVE; AIR; 3-W AY VALVE; 24VDC; MANIFOLD MOUNT
272 11065 1 250-094-002 ROTARY UNION
275 14820 3 0863224 PRESSURE SW ITCH; AIR; SOLID STATE; 0- 230 PSI
276 10319 1 00-166-80 MUFLER; 1-1/2" NPT
277 11019 1 10-280-63 PRESSURE SW ITCH INTERLOCK ADAPTER
278 14077 1 8116680K W ITH 0601.234.00 24VDC COIL DIRECTIONAL VALVE; AIR; 2 W AY VALVE; 3/4" NPT; POPPET; MANUAL OVERIDE
279 13864 1 XSz-32 (REPLACEMENT 24VDC COIL 24-931-20.0801) DIRECTIONAL VALVE; DUAL SOLENOID CLUTCH VALVE; 1" NPT
283 14986 3 214-195 GAUGE; LIQUID FILLED; 0-160 PSI; 2" FACE; 1/4" NPT
301 15120 2 M6MN MUFFLER; 1" NPT
1 of 2
Pneumatic Bill of Materials
FP-2B-48-2331

OAK PRODUCTS
40 15115 1 F50B-08A (REPLACEMENT ELEMENT EKF50B) FILTER; 1" NPT; 5 MICRON
41 15122 1 L22L-04M LUBRICATOR; 1/2" NPT
45 15119 1 NAF254504N00F (24VDC REPLACEMENT COIL DA-0051-U) DIRECTIONAL VALVE; AIR; 3 W AY VALVE; POPPET; 1" NPT
48 14819 1 R32R-06 REGULATOR; 3/4" NPT
49 15118 1 R50R-08 REGULATOR; 1" NPT
DIRECTIONAL VALVE; AIR; 3 W AY VALVE; SLO-START MANUAL LOCKOUT OPERATOR; 1" NPT
51 15116 1 VT40N08Y
52 15105 1 4500-01-421-3 (24VDC) DIRECTIONAL VALVE; AIR; 2-W AY VALVE; 1/4" NPT; MANUAL OVERIDE
53 1 521000020 GREASE PUMP
2 of 2
Uncoiler Bill of Materials
FP-2B-48-2331
STOCK # QTY PART # DESCRIPTION

306502 17 199-DR1 Mounting Rail; A-B 199-DR1; DIN 35 X 7.5mm
306583 6 #0441119 Ground Terminal; Phoenix 0441119; USLKG 2.5N
306819 21 Conduit, Liquatite LNMP11, ORG, Non Met, 1/2" Conduit, Liquatite LNMP11, ORG, Non Met, 1/2"
306821 21 Conduit, Liquatite LNMP12, ORG, Non Met, 3/4" Conduit, Liquatite LNMP12, ORG, Non Met, 3/4"
307030 3 Connector, Appleton STNM50, Flex, Str, 1/2" Connector, Appleton STNM50, Flex, Str, 1/2"
307034 2 STNM75 Connector; Appleton STNM75; Flex; Str; 3/4"
307042 1 Connector, Appleton STNM9050, Flex, 90, 1/2" Connector, Appleton STNM9050, Flex, 90, 1/2"
307043 1 Connector, Appleton STNM9075, Flex, 90, 3/4" Connector, Appleton STNM9075, Flex, 90, 3/4"
307055 7 STG50 Sealing Washer; Appleton STG50; Gasket Assembly; 1/2"
307059 2 BBU-75 Sealing Washer; Appleton STG75; Gasket Assembly; 3/4"
307096 2 E-D1PBM2 PB Box; Hoffman E-D1PBM2; 1 Hole 22.5mm
307170 2 CG1850S Cord Grip; Appleton CG1850S; .187-.312; 1/2"; Str; Brown
307174 1 CG3750S Cord Grip; Appleton CG3750S; .375-.500; 1/2"; Str; Purple
307186 2 DB-7 Cord Grip; Pyle-Nation DB-7; .125-.250-1 Hole; Str
307195 1 DB-9-L Cord Grip; Pyle-Nation DB-9-L; .218-3 Hole; Str
307208 1 CG903750S Cord Grip; Appleton CG903750S; .375-.500; 1/2"; 90; Purple
307229 6 BL-50 Lock Nut; Appleton BL-50; 1/2"
307245 7 BBU-50 Bushing; Appleton BBU-50; Insul; 1/2"
307247 1 BBU-75 Bushing; Appleton BBU-75; Insul; 3/4"
307638 1 440AA09028 Safety Switch; A-B 440AA09028; Cord Grip; M20 Thd
307640 1 440KA27010 Safety Switch; A-B 440KA27010; Key; Flexible
307783 4 889P-F4AB-5 PROX CABLE; 5M; STRAIGHT; 4 PIN Pico
307928 20 601807 Cord; Olflex 601807; PVC 18/7C Gray 190
309872 1 QE3 QUICK EXHAUST; 3/8"
309927 1 VS22-04 Valve; Manual Air Shutoff; Numatics VS22-04; 1/2"
309956 1 152RD100J016W-SP Regulator Module; Numatics 152RD100J016W-SP; Dbl
310011 1 152SA400M017N61 Valve; Numatics 152SA400M017N61; Sgl; 24vdc
310128 1 L22L-04M Lubricator; Numatics L22L-04M; 1/2"; 3.8 oz
310372 1 M3MN MUFFLER; 3/8" NPT
310749 1 Hyd Gauge, SPG-63-1500-PN, Back Port, 0-1500PSI Hyd Gauge, SPG-63-1500-PN, Back Port, 0-1500PSI
318910 1 Valve, Barksdale 6922 M3HC3-MC Valve, Barksdale 6922 M3HC3-MC
319796 1 Rotary Union, Deublin 2117-001-103 (RECB) Rotary Union, Deublin 2117-001-103 (RECB)
320137 1 Hyd Motor, Char-lynn 104-3473-006, SAE, Geroler Hyd Motor, Char-lynn 104-3473-006, SAE, Geroler
321703 28 6XV1830-OTS10-0PH0 Cord, Profibus, Siemens 6XV1830-OTS10-0PH0, Flexible 22 AWG
322215 1 Profibus Conn., Turck BMSWS 8151-8.5/PDP, Field Wire Male Profibus Conn., Turck BMSWS 8151-8.5/PDP, Field Wire Male
322981 1 #3030488 Terminal Block; Phoenix 3030488; End Cover; D-ST2;5-Twin
322983 25 #3031241 Terminal Block; Phoenix 3031241; Spring Cage; ST2;5-Twin
322985 4 #3030161 Terminal Block; Phoenix 3030161; Jumper; 2 pos; FBS 2;5
322986 4 #3022218 Terminal End Brkt; Phoenix 3022218; Typ Clipfix 35
333314 1 3SB3901-0AB Contact Adaptor; Siemens; 3SB3901-0AB; 3 Across
333352 1 3SB3500-1TA20 Pushbut; Siemens 3SB3500-1TA20; Mush HD P/P Red
333402 3 3SB3403-0C 1NC Contact Block; Siemens 3SB3403-0C 1NC; Cage Clp
341470 1 RK-4T-4 Prox Cable, Turck RK-4.4T-6, 6M, STR, 4 Pin 4 Wire
342389 1 440KT11089 Safety Switch; A-B 440KT11089; MSS5 Trojan; No Act; BBM
346232 1 Cable Entry Plate, Murrplastik KDP/N24/17, 87301150 Cable Entry Plate, Murrplastik KDP/N24/17, 87301150
376795 1 Safety Relay, Siemens 3TK2826-2CW30, No Off Delay 24-240v AC/DC Safety Relay, Siemens 3TK2826-2CW30, No Off Delay 24-240v AC/DC
383317 1 Numatics 203-1226 Valve Base, Numatics 203-1226, MK15 w/ 56Y option,(12mm recept.)
393501 2 Rittal, AE1033.500 Enclosure, Rittal, AE1033.500, 300 X 300 X 210, w/ Mtg Panel, RAL 7035
451094 2 Photocell, Banner, Q126EQ-94926, 24 Vdc, Emitter, Pico, Pur Pigtail Photocell, Banner, Q126EQ-94926, 24 Vdc, Emitter, Pico, Pur Pigtail
451095 1 Photocell, Banner, Q12RB6RQ-94925, 24 VDC, Receiver, Pico, PUR Pigtail, Bipolar DO Photocell, Banner, Q12RB6RQ-94925, 24 VDC, Receiver, Pico, PUR Pigtail, Bipolar DO
454131 1 Photocell, Banner, Q12AB6RQ-96046, 24 VDC, Receiver, Pico, PUR Pigtail, Bipolar LO Photocell, Banner, Q12AB6RQ-96046, 24 VDC, Receiver, Pico, PUR Pigtail, Bipolar LO
Safety Contactor, Siemens 3RT2024-1BB44-3MA0, 5.5KW/400VAC, 24Vdc Coil, SZ-S0, 3P+2NO+2NC, Adder Glued-in, and Non
462987 2 Safety Contactor, Siemens 3RT2024-1BB44-3MA0 Defeated
1 FAWICK AIRFLEX AIR BRAKE
1 of 1
E-Lube Bill of Materials
FP-2B-48-2331

314039 10 601812 Cord, Olflex 601812, PVC 18/12C Gray 190
307174 2 CG3750S Cord Grip, Appleton, CG3750S, .375-.500, 1/2" Str (Purple)
306351 1 1771312 Hood, Phoenix 1771312, Str, HCB10TFL./PG16G
306347 1 1771228 Male Pinned Insert, Phoenix 1771228, HCB10EST, 10 Pin
306406 1 5540701 NPT Adapter, Phoenix 5540701, PG16-50
307245 2 BBU-50 Bushing, Appleton BBU-50, Insul, 1/2"
307229 3 BL-50 Lock Nut, Appleton BL-50, 1/2"
307055 2 STG50 Sealing Washer, Appleton STG50, Gasket Assembly, 1/2"
307170 1 CG1850S Cord Grip, Appleton CG1850S, .187-.312, 1/2", Str, Brown
300171 2 Socket Head Cap Screw, #8-32 X 7/8"
307501 1 WK-4T-4 Prox Cable, Turck WK-4T-4, 4M, 90, 4 Pin, 3-W, Eurofast
307741 1 BES12-BS-1 Prox Switch Clamp, Balluff BES12-BS-1, Surface F MT
329325 1 872C-DH3NN12-D4 Prox Switch, A-B 872C-DH3NN12-D4, 12mm, DC, 4 Pin, Short, NPN
1 of 1
Suction Bill of Materials
FP-2B-48-2331

BOT&G
306356 1 1771574 Hood, Phoenix 1771574, Str, HCB16TFL./PG21G
306407 1 Phoenix 5540714 NPT Adapter, Phoenix 5540714, PG21-75
306502 10 A-B 199-DR1 Mounting Rail, A-B 199-DR1, DIN 35 X 7.5mm, Steel
306583 3 0441119, USLKG 2,5N Ground Terminal, Phoenix 0441119, USLKG 2,5N
307392 1 Hubbell 074-01-010 Cord Grip Hubbell 074-01-010 .500-.625 Strain Relief 1/2"
309334 1 TC1/2-1 Clamp, TC1/2-1, One Hole Strap 1/2" Tube
309915 1 DK22-03 Diverter Block; Numatics DK22-03; 1/2" X 3/8"
309985 3 229-718, Flexiblok, MK-3 Manifold, Numatics 229-718, Flexiblok, MK-3
310004 1 Numatics 229-719 End Plate Kit, Numatics 229-719, MK-3, 1/4" NPTF
310006 2 Numatics 031SA4004000061 Valve, Numatics 031SA4004000061, Sgl, 24vdc
310082 1 214-194 Air Gauge; Numatics 214-194; 0-160PSI;1.5Face; Liq
310089 1 R22R-04 Regulator; Numatics R22R-04; 1/2"; GP
310371 4 M2MN, 1/4 NPT. Muffler, Numatics M2MN, 1/4 NPT.
318722 1 Numatics 229-538 Cover Plate Kit, Numatics 229-538, Mark 3
321703 20 6XV1830-OTS10-0PH0 Cord, Profibus, Siemens 6XV1830-OTS10-0PH0, Flexible 22 AWG
321942 3 6ES7 132-4BD3x-0AA0 PLC ET200S Output Card, Siemens 6ES7 132-4BD3x-0AA0, DO 4x24VDC/2A-
322851 4 #183741 TYPE - QS-1/8-1/4-IUM Connector Push Pull; Festo #183741; QS-1/8-1/4-IUM
322981 1 3030488 Terminal Block, Phoenix 3030488, End Cover, D-ST2,5-Twin
322983 12 3031241 Terminal Block, Phoenix 3031241, Spring Cage, ST2,5-Twin
322985 3 3030161 Terminal Block, Phoenix 3030161, Jumper, 2 pos, FBS 2-5
322986 3 3022218, Terminal End Brkt, Phoenix 3022218, Typ Clipfix 35
323281 12 Carol 0276885 Cord, Carol 0276885, SO 14/4C Black 250ft spl
324400 3 6ES7 193-4CA30-0AA0 PLC Term, Siemens 6ES7 193-4CA30-0AA0, TME15C24-A1
325208 1 6ES7 151-1AA0X-0AB0, W/Term, IM151 PLC ET200S I/F Mod, Siemens 6ES7 151-1AA0X-0AB0, W/Term, IM151
325209 1 6ES7 138-4CA01-0AA0 ET200s PLC PM-E, Siemens 6ES7 138-4CA01-0AA0, w/ diagnost
325210 1 6ES7 193-4CD30-0AA0 PLC Term, Siemens 6ES7 193-4CD30-0AA0,TMP15C23-A0
325293 1 #6ES7 972-0BA52-0XA0, 90° no pg, 9-pin Pbus PLC Conn, Siemens #6ES7 972-0BA52-0XA0, 90° no pg, 9-pin Pbus
356164 1 Rittal #JB101006HC Encl , Rittal #JB101006HC, less Mtg Panel, RAL 7035
357472 1 #JBMP 1010, GALV Panel, Rittal #JBMP 1010, GALV
384525 1 Phoenix 1679304 Hinged Retaining Frame, Phoenix 1679304, HC-M-MHR-A4-N.
384526 2 Phoenix 1647718 Insert Module Male, Phoenix 1647718, HC-M-05-MOD-STZ, 5 -pin Spr Cage
384529 1 Phoenix 1678570 EMC Contact Carrier, Phoenix 1678570, HC-M-EMV-MOD-BU, Male
384530 1 Phoenix 1636088 EMC Plug Connector, Male, Phoenix 1636088, HC-M-EMV-ST/3-9.5
384532 8 Phoenix 1674901 Male Crimp Contacts, Phoenix 1674901, CK1.6-ED-0.37ST AU, Gold
406046 2 Murr 7000-11021-2160500 Form BI Din Plug w/ Cable, Murr 7000-11021-2160500 , W/Led/suppression/5 m CU
1 of 1

MANUAL Fin Press

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MANUAL Fin Press

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Global Experience

Fin Press Line

A-Weighted Noise Level:

C-Weighted Noise Level:

BOTI Default Passwords

Password Change Record

NOTE, Die Customers Only:

Fin Press Line i n al

Appendix B.................................................................................. 119

RISK DESIGN MEASURE

RISK SAFEGUARD MEASURE

Crushing hazard present. Keep feet clear of machine.

Saw Present. Rotating blades may cause severe injury.

Hazardous Voltage. Contact will cause electric shock or burn.

Hydraulic or pneumatic explosion possible.

Laser present. Avoid exposure to laser beam.

Static charge present.

Do NOT operate with guard removed.

Only authorized personnel may service this equipment.

No maintenance while machine is in use.

Do not open until saw stops rotating.

Do not operate with the guards removed.

Do not service with the flywheel in motion.

Do not operate with personnel inside the guarded area.

Read and understand the instructions.

Verify that Emergency Stop button is functioning properly.

Follow proper lock out / tag out procedure.

Verify that light curtain is functioning properly.

Verify that interlocking guards are functioning properly.

Apply locking device here.

Lock Out / Tag Out

Below is an example of such procedure.

Daily Test Procedure for Light Curtains

Hydraulic and Pneumatic

Loading the Uncoiler

Red Handle NOTICE

Steel Roller Rubber Roller

Uncoiler Air Pressure Setting

Removing from Trailer / Truck

DTO Table (if applicable)

4. Insert a roll pin into the two inner most holes.

5. Screw a bolt into the two outer holes.

Fill the Lubrication System

Square the Lacer

2. Center the pinch roll with the center of the press.

Install Suction Unit

3. Tighten the 4-6 screws that hold the unit in place.

Perform Dry Run

Press Mount Lube Tank and Support Bracket NOTICE

Die Take Out Table

FP-1, -2 Press & FP400

2. Lift the machine and move with caution.

General Descriptions and Adjustments

Shut Height Adjustment

2005 Presses and Prior

PRESS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT BREAKER RELIEF VALVE PRESS TONNAGE FP-3

Presses after 2005

Hydraulic Circuit Breaker Adjustment

Press Level and Parallelism

Shut Height Adjustment

Die and Press Preparation

Installing Throw Gauge

FP-1A Die Removal